Epiphan Pearl-2 User Guide

User Guide
Epiphan Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Release 4.3.0
September 5, 2017
UG115-07
© and ™ 2017, Epiphan Systems, Inc
Terms and conditions
This document, the Epiphan web site, and the information contained therein, including but not limited to the
text, videos and images as well as Epiphan System Inc.’s trademarks, trade names and logos are the property
of Epiphan Systems Inc. and its affiliates and licensors, and are protected from unauthorized copying and
dissemination by Canadian copyright law, United States copyright law, trademark law, international
conventions and other intellectual property laws.
Epiphan, Epiphan Video, Epiphan Systems, Epiphan Systems Inc., and Epiphan logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc., in certain countries. All Epiphan product names and logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Epiphan. All other company and product names and logos may be
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners in certain countries.
Copyright © 2017 Epiphan Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN
THE INFORMATION PACKET OR PRODUCT INSTALLATION SOFTWARE PACKAGE THAT SHIPPED WITH THE
PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE
LICENSES OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR EPIPHAN REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. EPIPHAN PERIODICALLY ADDS OR UPDATES THE INFORMATION AND
DOCUMENTS ON ITS WEB SITE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION AND
RECOMMENDATIONS ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE AT TIME OF WRITING BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR
APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL EPIPHAN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OF, OR THE INABILITY TO USE,
THIS PRODUCT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT OR PROVIDED ON EPIPHAN’S WEB
SITE, EVEN IF EPIPHAN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL
EPIPHAN’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES, LOSSES, AND CAUSES OF ACTION RESULTING FROM
YOUR USE OF THIS PRODUCT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED THE AMOUNTS YOU PAID TO EPIPHAN DURING THE MOST RECENT
THREE-MONTH PERIOD IN CONNECTION WITH AMOUNTS WHICH YOU PAID FOR USING THIS PRODUCT.
INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDED IN THIS DOCUMENT
OR THE EPIPHAN WEB SITE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”. SPECIFICALLY, BUT NOT WITHOUT LIMITATION, EPIPHAN
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT: (i) THE INFORMATION IS CORRECT, ACCURATE, RELIABLE OR COMPLETE; (ii) THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED ON THE EPIPHAN WEB SITE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE; (iii) DEFECTS
WILL BE CORRECTED, OR (iv) THIS WEB SITE OR THE SERVER(S) THAT MAKES IT AVAILABLE ARE FREE OF
VIRUSES OR OTHER HARMFUL COMPONENTS. EPIPHAN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS,
WARRANTIES, AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, BY USAGE OF TRADE OR
OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
For additional terms and conditions, please refer to additional sections in this document.
Thank you for choosing Epiphan!
At Epiphan Video (“Epiphan”), product function and quality are our top priority. We make every effort to make
sure that our products exceed your expectations.
Product feedback
Your feedback is important! We regularly contact our customers to ensure our products meet your
performance and reliability requirements. We strive to continually enhance our products to accommodate
your needs. Please let us know how you think we can improve our products by emailing your suggestions to
info@epiphan.com.
Specifications
Go to the page of the Epiphan website to get the most recent product specifications and additional
information about Epiphan Pearl-2.
Warranty
All Epiphan Systems products are provided with a 100% return to depot warranty for one year from the date
of purchase.
Technical support
Epiphan’s products are backed by our professional support team. If you are having issues with your product,
please gather details about your system and contact our team by:
l Emailing support@epiphan.com
l Live chat via the link on our support site https://www.epiphan.com/support/
l Phone toll free at 1-877-599-6581 or call +1-613-599-6581
Be sure to include as much information about your problem as possible. Including:
l Problem description
l Details of the video or audio source (type, connection, resolution, refresh rate, etc.)
l Product serial number
l Product firmware version (if applicable, from web admin interface)
Copyright © 2017 Epiphan Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
What's new in release 4.3.0?
Firmware 4.3.0 adds feature enhancements to Pearl-2 and exciting new features to expand your creative
video production possibilities.
Firmware 4.3.0
Chroma keying
Combine multiple frames or images using chroma keying. Apply different backgrounds for visual effects or
lower thirds using titling software that produces chroma key output, like New BlueTM. Any image or video
source that you normally use with Pearl-2 can be used with choma keying. From the custom layout editor, you
can apply chroma keying downstream across all custom layouts in a channel or to just a selected input source
for an upstream chroma key effect.
Text overlay and custom layout editor enhancements
Get creative with text overlays and add finesse to custom layouts. We added TrueType fonts, highlighting, and
support for multiple lines of text. Other enhancements to the custom layout editor give you greater flexibility
to change font sizes and to adjust the color, line spacing, and padding.
Clone channels and custom layouts
Set up multiple channels and custom layouts fast. Don't set up each new channel or custom layout from
scratch. Duplicate it with a simple click. You can easily create multiple custom layouts that have a common
logo or setting, like the same audio source. Just create one custom layout that has all the common elements
you want and duplicate it. Then tweak each layout to your specifications.
Clone recorders and recorder metadata
Easily duplicate a recorder you've setup in one channel to another channel with a simple click.
For single-channel recorders, the channel branding configuration information you enter now gets used as the
metadata. For multi-channel recorders, the title, author, and copyright metadata is combined from all your
channels, whereas it used to be taken from only the first channel.
AFU enhancements
We added new options to make it easier for you to manage your AFU recordings:
l Automatically create a folder for your recorded files using the channel or recorder name.
l Save recordings to a folder that's labeled using the Pearl-2 serial number. Now you can apply the same
configuration preset to several Pearl-2 systems and not have to worry about file name collisions at the
AFU server side.
Dashboard controls to start and stop individual live streams
You can now start and stop individual live streams in a custom channel using the Epiphan Live dashboard.
Logitech BRIO 4K camera support
We've added support for the Logitech BRIO 4K camera so you have even more opportunities to start using
the 4K capabilities of Pearl-2.
What's fixed
Interlaced SDI signals
We improved support for interlaced SDI signals on Pearl-2.
Table of contents
What's new in release 4.3.0?
iv
Table of contents
vi
Start here
1
About this Guide
1
What is Pearl-2?
3
Using Pearl-2 effectively
4
AV inputs
5
What's in the Box?
5
Front and back view
7
Pearl-2
8
Pearl-2 Rackmount
10
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
12
Tech specs
14
About 4K on Pearl-2
17
Feature add-ons
17
Quick start
19
Get started quickly with auto channels:
19
To view the auto channels:
20
Record the Channel
21
What’s Next?
Epiphan Live
22
23
Accessing Epiphan Live
24
Streaming, recording and monitoring using the Dashboard interface
26
Understanding the Dashboard interface
27
Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring
30
Monitoring video and audio sources
31
Configuring and monitoring video outputs
34
Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
37
Live switching using the Switcher interface
39
vi
Understanding the Switcher interface
40
Switching while live streaming and recording
42
Your Recordings
PART 1: Setup
45
48
Rackmount installation
49
The Admin panel
50
Connect to the Admin panel
50
Connect using the touch screen
50
Connect via DNS-based service discovery
51
Connect via the Epiphan discovery utility
53
Connect via persistent static IP address
55
User administration
56
User types and privileges
56
Set or change user passwords
60
Remove user passwords
61
Overcome lost passwords
62
Configure LDAP
62
Change the logged-in user
64
Restrict viewers by IP address
65
IP restriction examples
67
Pearl-2's touch screen
70
Touchscreen overview
70
View system information
72
Channel monitoring
74
Individual channel monitoring
75
Grid-view channel monitoring
76
Pearl-2's audio jack
78
Control recording of individual channels
79
Control streaming of individual channels
81
One Touch streaming and recording control
82
vii
Understand and use One Touch control
83
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
85
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
89
Customize how One Touch control is displayed
90
View AFU status
91
Configure the touch screen
94
Disable (or enable) the touch screen
94
Hide (or show) channel previews on the touch screen
95
Disable (or enable) system status on the touch screen
96
Block (or allow) configuration functions from the touch screen
97
Block (or allow) recording, streaming and switching from the touch screen
97
Set touch screen timeout
98
Configure touch screen PIN security code
99
View system information
101
Feature add-ons
102
Add-ons overview
102
Shop now
103
Install purchased add-ons
103
List of features
103
Purchase button
104
Activation indicator
104
Checking availability of add-ons
105
Available for purchase
105
Available for installation and activation
106
Available for use
107
Current list of add-ons
108
4K feature add-on
108
Activate purchased add-ons
109
Purchase and install add-ons
111
Configure network settings
115
viii
Verify IP Address and MAC address via the touch screen
115
Verify IP address and MAC address via the Admin panel
116
Configure DHCP
117
Configure a static IP address
119
Tether to a mobile network
123
Network ports used by Pearl-2
124
Perform network diagnostics
125
Configuration presets
Configuration presets overview
Configuration presets in action
128
128
129
Configuration groups
131
Create a configuration preset
133
Export and import configuration presets
134
Download a configuration preset
134
Import a configuration preset
135
Apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel
136
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
137
Apply the Factory default configuration preset
141
Update a configuration preset
142
Delete a configuration preset
144
Configuration preset considerations
145
Channel and recorder index number behavior
145
Recording and streaming states
146
Recorded files (in channels and recorders)
146
Deleting channels
147
Branding content
147
Configuration presets are not user profiles
148
Touch screen considerations
148
Configure date and time
Verify date and time via the touch screen
149
149
ix
Verify date and time settings
150
Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and RDATE)
151
Configure the date and time manually
152
Change the time zone
153
Configure a local NTP server
153
Video output ports
154
Show a channel on the video output port
155
Show a source on the video output port
157
Select a resolution for the video output port
158
Preview the video output port
159
View the video output port status
160
Disable the video output port
161
Disable or enable the audio on the video output port
162
Configure the audio meter
163
Rename a video output port
164
PART 2: Capture
166
What is a channel?
167
Channels
168
Use the automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
168
Know which signal is used for Auto-A or Auto-B
169
Configure auto channels
170
Create a simple channel
171
Create a custom channel
176
Custom channel layout editor
177
Custom channel examples
181
Create a custom channel or layout
184
Add a video source (custom channel)
186
Add an audio source (custom channel)
190
Custom crop a source
192
Configure chroma keying
194
x
To upload an image
214
Add an image (custom channel)
216
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
220
Set the background color (custom channel)
226
Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel)
227
Rename a layout (custom channel)
234
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
235
Delete an uploaded image
237
Configure encoding
238
Configure video codec
238
Configure frame size
240
Fine tune stream settings
242
Configure audio codec
244
Codec and file format compatibility
246
Multi-Encoding
246
Add channel metadata
248
Add channel metadata
248
Remove metadata from a channel
249
Preview a channel
250
Preview a channel from the Info page
250
Preview a channel from the Status page
251
Preview all channels at once
252
Rename a channel
252
Duplicate a channel
253
Delete a channel
254
Live video mixing / switching
255
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
255
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
258
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
259
What is a source?
262
xi
Video sources
262
Audio sources
263
Connect a source
264
Connect an RTSP source
265
List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras
269
List of fully supported Web cameras
271
Connect an AV.io video grabber
271
Preview a source
272
Configure a source
273
DVI and HDMI signals
274
SDI signals
275
USB signals
276
RTSP sources
279
Add a No Signal image to a source
279
Rename a source
280
Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay
281
Confirm audio levels (via the touch screen)
283
Troubleshoot capture
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
285
285
Match the output frame size to the aspect ratio of the source signal
286
Stretch the image
288
Force the capture card to use a specific EDID
288
Upload a new EDID
288
Restore factory default EDID
290
Unstretch the output video
291
Remove the combing effect on images
292
PART 3: Stream
What is streaming?
294
295
Choose a streaming option
295
Supported streaming formats
296
xii
Stream to viewers
297
Stream content using HTTP or RTSP
297
Configure HTTP and RTSP streaming ports
299
Stream content using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming)
300
Send stream URLs to viewers
301
View the Flash stream
302
View your broadcast using the View link on the Info menu
302
View your broadcast using the Live broadcast link on the Status page
304
Viewing with a web browser
306
Viewing with a media player (RTSP)
307
Disable (and enable) streams for viewers
308
Restrict access to streams for viewers
309
Restrict viewers by IP address
310
IP restriction examples
312
Allow list with distinct IP addresses
312
Allow list with a range of IP addresses
312
Allow list with a range of IP addresses and one or more specific IP addresses
313
Deny list with distinct IP addresses
313
Allow list with a range of IP addresses, distinct IP addresses and an exception
314
Deny list with a range of IP addresses
314
Stream to a server
Stream to a CDN
315
316
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
317
To stream content to a CDN using RTSP announce
322
To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push
323
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
325
Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
326
Stream to Original Livestream
329
Stream content using multicast
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
331
331
xiii
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
333
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
335
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
336
Stream to a media player or smart TV
Stream content using UPnP
338
338
Enable UPnP
339
Disable UPnP
343
Viewing with UPnP
344
Play directly to a media player
345
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
345
Change UPnP device name
346
Samples of stream settings
347
Streaming video content
347
Streaming slide content
347
PART 4: Record
349
What is a recording?
350
Recording basics
350
Record a channel via the Admin panel
351
Record channels and recorders (using One Touch control)
353
Record a channel via Epiphan Live
355
Record a channel via the touch screen
356
Configure recording file size and type
358
Restart recording
361
Recorders
363
Add a recorder
363
Change the channels recorded by a recorder
364
Record with a recorder (using the admin panel)
365
Record a recorder (using One Touch control)
367
Record a recorder (using Epiphan Live)
368
Rename a recorder
369
xiv
Duplicate a recorder
369
Delete a recorder
370
Recorded files
372
View list of recorded files
372
Download recorded files manually
373
Concatenate files
374
Extract tracks from a recording
375
Rename recorded files
377
Delete recorded files manually
378
File and recording transfer
380
Automatic file upload (AFU) overview
380
Choose files to include in AFU
381
Enable AFU and set parameters
383
AFU to an FTP server
386
AFU using RSync
388
AFU using CIFS
389
AFU using SCP
391
AFU to a secure FTP server
394
AFU to Amazon Web Server (AWS)
396
AFU to a WebDav server
397
AFU or copy to USB
398
AFU to a USB drive
399
One-time copy/move of all recorded files to USB drive
400
Manually copy recorded files to USB drive
402
View available USB storage space
404
Safely eject the USB drive
404
View the AFU log
405
View AFU status
406
Manage the AFU queue
408
Access the AFU queue
408
xv
View content in the AFU queue
409
Delete content in the AFU queue
410
Local FTP server
411
Configure the local FTP server
411
Using the local FTP server
413
PART 5: Maintenance
Power down and system restart
415
416
Restarting the device via the Admin panel
416
Shutting down the device via the Admin panel
416
Shutting down the device manually
417
Save and restore device configuration
418
Perform factory reset
419
Restore factory configuration via the Admin panel
Firmware upgrade
419
421
Check for firmware updates
421
Install firmware
422
Install firmware directly from the Admin panel:
422
Install firmware from a file
424
Support
426
Download logs and "allinfo"
426
Configure remote support
428
Disable remote support
429
Storage disk maintenance
430
Check disk storage space
430
Check disk storage space via the touch screen
431
Schedule disk check
431
Perform disk check
432
Third party integration
434
Control with RS-232 / serial port
435
Connect and configure the RS-232 cable
435
Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
436
xvi
RS-232 / Serial port command examples
Control with HTTP commands
439
441
HTTP command syntax
441
HTTP command examples
443
Global variable HTTP command syntax for custom layouts
444
Configuration keys for third party APIs
447
System-level settings keys (read-only)
448
System-level settings keys (read/write)
448
System-level custom layout keys (read/write)
449
Touch screen settings keys (read/write)
449
Recording configuration keys
450
HTTP server configuration keys
451
IP-based access control configuration keys
451
UPnP configuration keys
452
Broadcast configuration keys
452
Channel encoder configuration keys
453
Channel layout configuration keys
454
Audio configuration keys
455
Stream publishing configuration keys
455
RTSP Announce configuration keys (Publish type 2)
456
RTP/UDP configuration keys (Publish type 3)
457
MPEG-TS configuration keys (Publish types 4 and 5)
457
RTMP push configuration keys (Publish type 6 and 7)
458
Livestream configuration keys (Publish type 8)
458
Content metadata configuration keys
458
PART 6: Troubleshooting
460
Limitations and known issues
464
Previous releases and features
468
Software license
469
xvii
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start here
Start here
Welcome, and thank you for buying Epiphan Pearl-2™. This guide is designed to help you configure your new
system.
Pearl-2 details (for all three models) are described in the What is Pearl-2? and What's in the Box? sections.
Read the Quick start guide for the basic steps to get a single video (and optional audio) source configured as a
streamable, recordable output from Pearl-2.
Following the quick start section, a set of task-based procedures help you to tweak the system exactly how
you want it. These procedures are broken into five categories: Setup, Capture, Stream, Record and
Maintenance.
About this Guide
Throughout this guide there are situations where more than one solution will complete a task. In those cases
the guide describes the simplest or most common variation first. Warnings, tips and notes are depicted as
follows.
This is a warning. Pay special attention to information in red boxes.
This is a tip or note. Data in green boxes help you get the most from your new system.
1
Pearl-2 User Guide
About this Guide
Feature add-on notes: This user guide provides general instructions for the functionality of Pearl-2 with the
assumption that all add-ons are activated. Throughout the manual, in cases where there is a function or
option that is only available after a particular add-on is activated, it is indicated by a link to the Feature add-on
activation instruction page. For the 4K add-on, the link is: 4K .
2
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is Pearl-2?
What is Pearl-2?
Pearl-2, our most versatile live video production device, is a video encoder, video streamer, live switcher and
video recorder that comes in three models.
All three models have the same functionality, and this guide applies for all three models. Where used in this
guide, the product name Pearl-2 is interchangeable for Pearl-2 Rackmount or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin, except
in a few cases where physical differences are explicitly called out.
Pearl-2
A small, silent, portable
system that comes with a
hard-shell carry case.
Pearl-2 Rackmount
A 2U rackmount server with all the
same functionality as the portable
Pearl-2, but designed for installation
and operation in a rack.
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
A high density 2U rack mount
variation that contains two complete
(and independent) Pearl-2 systems.
With Pearl-2, you can capture, record and stream computer monitors, radar displays, or almost anything that
outputs to SDI, HDMI™, USB, HDMI 4K4K or DVI-I (single link). Accompanying audio capture is supported via
XLR, RCA, USB, SDI or HDMI.
Simultaneously capture up to six HD audio visual sources or two 4K sources with two HD sources and choose
how you want to record and stream them. You can create up to five simultaneous channels for live switching,
or one 4K channel. Keep your sources separate, configure them in multi-source layouts for live switching, or
do both!
The resulting streams can be viewed a number of ways: through media players, browsers, on mobile devices
and through Content Distribution Networks (CDNs). Recorded files can be downloaded via FTP or set to
automatically upload via FTP, RSYNC, or CIFS and can be integrated into your Content Management System
(CMS).
3
Pearl-2 User Guide
Using Pearl-2 effectively
Pearl-2 does not capture from HDCP encrypted sources.
Using Pearl-2 effectively
Pearl-2, Pearl-2 Rackmount and Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin are powerful live video production systems. They can
perform many different tasks, however, like any other computer system, there is a limit to the number of
concurrent tasks that can be processed and run smoothly.
For best results, we recommend you always keep the CPU usage on Pearl-2 under 70%. You can check the
Overall system load from the Info page.
The actual number of tasks your Pearl-2 can complete concurrently depends on many factors, including: how
many channels you have, how many layouts you have per channel, how often you are switching layouts,
whether or not the system is resizing input signals, frame rate and bit rate per channel, whether or not you are
using the video output ports, etc.
4
Pearl-2 User Guide
AV inputs
If you find that system load is higher than recommended, try to: disable any unused video output ports,
delete unused channels or layouts, reduce the number of channels created or ensure sources come in at the
right resolution to avoid CPU time spent scaling.
AV inputs
Pearl-2 supports the following AV inputs directly. Nearly every other AV input is supported provided you have
the correct converter or adapter.
When using Pearl-2 it is recommended you use no more than six simultaneous HD sources or two
4K sources4K with two HD input sources on one channel for best results.
Table 1 Inputs for Pearl-2*
SDI
HDMI™ (Linear
4K HDMI (Linear
Audio
PMC, non-HDCP pro-
PMC, non-HDCP pro-
(Linear
tected)/
tected)/
PCM)
DVI-I (single link)
DVI-I (single link)
2
2
2
USB (Linear PMC,
Left/Right
Left/Right
non-HDCP pro-
XLR Audio
RCA Audio
tected)
(Balanced)
(Balanced)
2
2
1
Note: Pearl-2 cannot simultaneously use both XLR audio input pairs along with the RCA audio pair. Use the
left-most XLR pair when using the RCA pair.
*Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin has two complete sets of these inputs.
What's in the Box?
There are three models of Pearl-2, namely the original portable model, and two rackmount models, Pearl-2
Rackmount and Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin.
Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Pearl-2 is shipped in a hard shell case that you can re-use for storing or moving the system between
jobs. Cable storage is under the custom foam tray that holds Pearl-2 in the case.
5
Pearl-2 User Guide
What's in the Box?
Inside the box with your Pearl-2 system, you'll find the power cable and the following items, and for Pearl-2
Rackmount Twin you'll receive two sets of these cables:
1. One SDI cable (3 feet / 1 meter in length)
2. One HDMI cable (3 feet / 1 meter in length)
3. One HDMI to DVI adapter
4. One Ethernet cable
5. One region-specific power supply cable (6 feet / 1.8 meters in lengths)
The following table will help you identify the cables included with your Pearl-2 purchase. Note these images
are for identification purpose only. The cables included with your purchase are not proprietary. If desired, you
can use other separately purchased cables to capture your sources.
Table 2 Description of included cables (images for identification only, color and appearance may vary)
Image
Name
Description
Connects SDI sources to Pearl-2's SDI
SDI cable
ports (12G-SDI capable). Roughly 3 feet
(or 1 meter) in length.
Connects HDMI or DVI sources to PearlHDMI cable
2's HDMI ports. Roughly 3 feet (or 1
meter) in length.
6
Pearl-2 User Guide
Image
Front and back view
Name
Description
Connects DVI sources to Pearl-2. Connect
DVI (female) to
the adapter to the output on your screen
HDMI (male)
or device, then connect the provided
adapter
HDMI cable to the adapter and one of
the HDMI ports on Pearl-2's back panel.
RJ-45 Ethernet
cable
Connects the system to your network.
Front and back view
Pearl-2's front panel has the power button and indicator light, audio monitor jack, USB 3.0 port and touch
screen display for confidence monitoring and simple configuration. There are connectors on the back of the
unit to connect your video sources, audio, and other devices like external monitors to Pearl-2. See below for a
complete listing of Pearl-2's physical features.
The SDI ports on the back of Pearl-2 can be delicate. Be careful to avoid sharp impacts or pressure
such as balancing the system on its back with the SDI ports against a hard surface. Rough
treatment of the SDI ports could result in loss of functionality for that port.
7
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2
Pearl-2
Table 3 Pearl-2 front panel descriptions
Label Name
Touch screen front panel
display
Description
Used for confidence monitoring and simple configuration such as
obtaining system information, previewing streams, changing
publishing option and starting/stopping recordings.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives or control
USB 3.0 port
interfaces. See AFU or copy to USB for copying data to a USB drive.
Web cameras cannot be connected to this port, only the ports on the
rear.
3.5 mm audio jack
Power button
For audio confidence monitoring. Plays the audio for the currently
visible channel.
Press to turn on. Double-click to initiate a graceful system shutdown.
8
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2
Table 4 Pearl-2 back panel descriptions
Label Name
XLR ports
Description
The four ports connect up to two line level left/right XLR audio signal
pairs to Pearl-2, calibrated for a signal of + 4.0 dBu.
Four HDMI 1.4 ports that connect HDMI and DVI signals to Pearl-2.
HDMI in
The first two ports allow for any signal up to HD, and the second two
inputs allow for any input resolution up to 4K4K .
12G SDI in
RCA audio in
RS-232 port
HDMI output ports
Connects SDI signals to Pearl-2, including 3G-SDI; 6G-SDI; 12G-SDI;
HD-SDI; SD-SDI
Connects line level left/right RCA audio to Pearl-2, calibrated for a
signal of - 10.0 dBV.
For connection to a control computer terminal.
HDMI output for connection to a display or projector. Port 1 is HDMI
2.0, and Port 2 is HDMI 1.4. See Video output ports for more details.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB webcameras,
USB 3.0 ports
USB microphones or control interfaces. See AFU or copy to USB for
copying data to a USB drive.
RJ-45 Ethernet
Auto-sensing gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T network port. See
Configure network settings for setup instructions.
9
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label Name
Power jack
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Description
Plug the power supply in here. Always use the provided 120/240 V
power supply.
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Table 5 Pearl-2 Rackmount front panel descriptions
Label Name
Touch screen front panel
display
Description
Used for confidence monitoring and simple configuration such as
obtaining system information, previewing streams, changing
publishing option and starting/stopping recordings.
Two other USB ports are located on the back. See Record for
USB 3.0 port
information about recording to USB drives. Web cameras cannot be
connected to this port, only the ports on the rear.
3.5 mm audio jack
Power button and LED
For audio confidence monitoring. Plays the audio for the currently
visible channel.
Press to turn on.
Double-click to initiate a graceful system shutdown.
10
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Table 6 Pearl-2 Rackmount back panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
Power jack
Plug the power supply in here. Always use the provided power supply.
HDMI in
Connects HDMI and DVI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
4K HDMI in
Connects 4K (and under) HDMI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
SDI in
Connects SDI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
XLR Audio (two pairs), RCA
Connects line level left/right XLR audio and/or RCA audio to Pearl-2
pair
Rackmount.
HDMI Out (4K)
For displaying a source or channel on an external display.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB webcameras,
USB 3.0 ports
USB microphones or control interfaces. See Record for recording to a
USB drive.
RJ-45 Ethernet
Auto-sensing gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T network port. See
Configure network settings for setup instructions.
11
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
This model is comprised of two completely independent Pearl-2 systems. The diagrams below show callouts
and labels for one of the two systems, the second (on the right side of the images) has all the same features.
Table 7 Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin front panel descriptions
Label Name
Touch screen front panel
display
Description
Used for confidence monitoring and simple configuration such as
obtaining system information, previewing streams, changing
publishing option and starting/stopping recordings.
Two other USB 3.0 ports are located on the back. See Record for
USB 3.0 port
information about recording to USB drives.Web cameras cannot be
connected to this port, only the ports on the rear.
3.5 mm audio jack
Power button and LED
For audio confidence monitoring. Plays the audio for the currently
visible channel.
Press to turn on.
Double-click to initiate a graceful system shutdown.
12
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Table 8 Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin back panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
Power jack
Plug the power supply in here. Always use the provided power supply.
HDMI in
Connects HDMI and DVI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
4K HDMI in
Connects 4K (and under) HDMI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
SDI in
Connects SDI signals to Pearl-2 Rackmount.
XLR Audio (two pairs), RCA
Connects line level left/right XLR audio and/or RCA audio to Pearl-2
audio
Rackmount.
HDMI Out (4K)
For displaying a source or channel on an external display.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB webcameras,
USB 3.0 ports
USB microphones or control interfaces. See Record for recording to a
USB drive.
RJ-45 Ethernet
Auto-sensing gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T network port. See
Configure network settings for setup instructions.
13
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
Tech specs
This table outlines the technical specifications for Pearl-2. Go to www.epiphan.com/pearl-2 to get the most
recent product specifications and additional information about Pearl-2.
The table below shows the number of inputs and output connectors for Pearl-2 and its
rackmount versions. The Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin version comprises two completely independent
Pearl-2 systems, therefore has double the number of every input, output and component that
Pearl-2 and Pearl-2 Rackmount have. Table 9 Specifications for Pearl-2
(2) 12G SDI
(2) HDMI™ / DVI¹
Connectors
(2) 4K HDMI / DVI¹
(2) USB video
Video Inputs
Resolutions
Most common and custom HDMI/DVI/SDI/USB modes
up to 4096×2160
3G-SDI; 6G-SDI; 12G-SDI; HD-SDI; SD-SDI
Video Format
DVI single link (through an adapter), USB video through
Options
USB Webcamera or UVC AV.io video grabber;
HDMI, 4K HDMI
(2) Stereo XLR (Pro line level, no phantom power output,
+ 4.0 dBu)
Connectors
(balanced or
Audio Input
unbalanced signals)
(1) Stereo RCA (Consumer line level, - 10.0 dBV)
(2) SDI audio
(4) HDMI audio
(2) USB audio
Analog audio
XLR Max signal: 12.3 V (RMS), (+24 dBu)
sensitivity
RCA signal level: - 10.0 dBV
Connectors
Video Output
Built-In Display
(2) HDMI out with audio for local video display or larger
confidence monitoring
Front touch screen display used for system information,
14
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
confidence monitoring, simple configuration and
recording control
Audio Output
Video Encoding
Audio Encoding
3.5 mm audio
Front-mounted jack for confidence monitoring
Video Codecs
H.264, Motion JPEG
Video Bit Rates
1 - 50 Mb/s
Key Frame Intervals
Programmable
Color Resolution
4:2:0
Output Frame Size
Configurable up to 4096×2160
Encoder
Bitrate
Sample Frequencies
MP3
64-320 kbps
22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
PCM
-
22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
AAC
64-320 kbps
16 kHz, 22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
Audio Codecs
Connector
(1) 10/100/1000 Ethernet RJ45
MPEG-TS, and FLV
RTSP over TCP/UDP
Streams
IP Network Interfaces
Multi-Publish to Streaming Server / CDN (RTSP, RTMP)
HLS - Native Apple HTTP stream for iPad, iPhone and iPod
Touch
Multicast Streams
Network Discovery /
Announce
RTP, MPEG-TS & RTP and MPEG-TS over UDP
UPnP, SAP
15
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
512 GB SSD
Internal Storage2
Automatically removes oldest recordings from internal
storage as space is required.
File maintenance through admin interface (Web UI)
Video / Audio Recording
Local Storage
and File Management
Network Storage
Playback and
Recorded Formats
Automatic or manual copy to local USB drives via the (3)
USB 3.0 ports
FTP server and FTP client capabilities (automatic and
manual)
Download recorded videos (AVI, MOV, MP4 or MPEG-TS)
using the Web UI and playback through any compatible
player.
Web UI for full administration. On-screen display and mobile UI for confidence
monitoring and simple administration and control.
Administration
Multiple user accounts/passwords.
Included API for integration into existing environments (executed via HTTP or
RS-232).
Time Synchronization
NTP, TIME (RFC 868), PTP v1 (IEEE-1588-2002 V1)
Power use
0.8 A, 100-240 V ac
Pearl-2: 11.81" × 9.45" × 3.54" (300mm x 240mm x 90mm)
Product Dimensions
Pearl-2 Rackmount: Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin: 19 ⅛” x 3½” x 10 ⅞” (498 mm x 89 mm x 276 mm)
Pearl-2: 8.38 lbs (3.8 kg)
Product Weight
Pearl-2 Rackmount: 12.1 lbs (5.5 kg)
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin: 14.6 lbs (6.6 kg)
Country of Origin
Made in Taiwan
¹Using HDMI port, with adapter
2A portion of
the hard drive space (approximately 100 MB) is reserved for system use. Recording space can be
virtually unlimited with offload to networked storage.
16
Pearl-2 User Guide
About 4K on Pearl-2
About 4K on Pearl-2
Pearl-2 supports resolutions from low-res SD to 4K, which means that you can use Pearl-2 to capture both DCI
4K and 4K UHD digital signals.
DCI 4K and 4K UHD are just different definitions of a 4K resolution. 4K UHD (3840×2160) is the standard 4K
resolution available on televisions and other common display screens. The 4K resolution of 4096×2160 is
referred to as Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI) 4K, and is the resolution used almost exclusively for cinema-scale
film production. It is rare to find this resolution outside of a cinematic context. Pearl-2 is capable of
supporting input and output at either definition with the Feature add-ons.
Feature add-ons
Pearl-2 hardware provides many useful new features and with more to come. A base model of Pearl-2 that
has similar functionality to Pearl and feature add-ons for extra functionality.
For an overview of add-ons, see:
l Add-ons overview
This section also covers the following related topics:
l Checking availability of add-ons
l Current list of add-ons
l Activate purchased add-ons
l Purchase and install add-ons
17
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Throughout the manual, there is information that applies only when your system has the 4K
feature add-on, as indicated with this symbol: 4K . Wherever that symbol appears, it denotes that
the feature is available only if you have activated the 4K feature add-on for your Pearl-2.
18
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
Quick start
This section helps you get up and running quickly with your Pearl-2. The instructions are the same regardless
of the model you are using. If using a rackmount model, you can choose to have it already installed in a rack,
or it can be placed on a desk.
Before you get started, make sure you have:
l a video source (i.e. a camera, a computer, a tablet, or a phone). For HDMI, the source must not be
HDCP protected.
l for SDI, USB video or HDMI sources, accompanying audio over the same source cable, or optionally
audio from a XLR or RCA source
l the appropriate cables or adapters to convert the output to SDI or HDMI (if needed)
l ideally, a network with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
l a computer with a web browser connected to the same network (this is referred to as the “admin”
computer in the steps below)
Pearl-2 is pre-configured with two plug and play channels: Auto A and Auto B. This quick start uses these
channels to get you streaming and recording as soon as possible.
If you're using a Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin, be sure to follow all the steps below using one of the
two systems (i.e. you cannot plug a source into one system and use it from the other).
Get started quickly with auto channels:
1. Turn on your video source and connect the output cable to a port labeled "A" on the back of Pearl-2 (if
needed, use an adapter such as the DVI to HDMI adapter).
2. If desired, plug a second source into one of the "B" inputs on the back of the system.
3. Optionally, attach a set of left/right XLR or RCA audio cables from your audio source to the XLR or RCA
audio input ports on the back of Pearl-2.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Pearl-2. Connect the Ethernet cable to your network.
5. Attach the power cable to the system and plug it into a power source.
6. Use the power button to turn on the system.
7. Wait for Pearl-2 to complete the power-up sequence. The system is ready a few moments after the
power LED illuminates.
8. (optional) Plug speakers or headphones into the 3.5 mm audio jack at the front of Pearl-2 for
confidence monitoring.
19
Pearl-2 User Guide
To view the auto channels:
The system automatically configures the channel's frame size to match the source resolution and calculates
the best bit rate for the default frame rate of 30 fps. Audio could come from any of the SDI, HDMI, USB video,
XLR or RCA audio inputs (SDI or HDMI audio must be unencrypted).
Pearl-2's front screen, if enabled (it is enabled by default, see Configure the touch screen), updates to show
you previews of your channel(s) for confidence monitoring. Use your speakers or headphones to verify audio
quality and levels.
To view the auto channels:
You can start viewing the channel(s) immediately by using a browser on a computer on the same network.
1. Find the system’s IP address: from a single channel view or grid view, touch the system settings (gear)
button then touch System Status.
2. Open a browser window on a computer on the same LAN or network
3. Browse to one of the following URLs:
For Auto A: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=1
For Auto B: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=2
For example:http://192.168.0.183/preview.cgi?channel=2
20
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record the Channel
You'll find alternate connection streams (i.e. RTSP or MPEG-TS) for these channels by logging into the Admin
panel and accessing Auto A and Auto B by the links under the Channels menu. See What is streaming?
Record the Channel
The channel is set up and streaming. This may be all you need, but if you like, you can also record the stream.
You can choose to initiate and control channel recording from either the touch screen or the Admin panel.
To control recording from the touch screen:
1. If viewing the grid view, touch the channel for which you wish to control recording; the channel view is
displayed.
2. If the channel controls are not displayed on the screen, simply touch the screen to bring them up.
3. Touch the recording control button; the touch screen will start a timer to indicate the length of the
recording. Touch the control again to stop recording. (If the button is not visible, recording control via
the touch screen is not enabled; see Configure the touch screen.)
To control recording from the Admin panel:
1. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels section.
2. Click Recording for your channel; the Recording page is displayed.
3. Click the red Start button; the text at the top of the screen changes to indicate the recording is
starting, then indicates the length of time since the recording started.
4. Click the black Stop button; the recorder stops.
5. Refresh the page by clicking Recording again; the page reloads and a file list appears that shows your
newly recorded stream snippet.
6. Click the file name to download and view your recording.
21
Pearl-2 User Guide
What’s Next?
What’s Next?
Now that you have a source setup and ready to stream, you can fine-tune the system to your exact
requirements. You can look at topics such as:
l Create a simple channel
l Create a custom channel
l Video output ports
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Live video mixing / switching
l What is streaming?
l File and recording transfer
l User administration
When you have completed system tuning, make sure to back up the system configuration using the
procedure described in:
l Create a configuration preset
Refer to the table of contents for a complete list of the topics covered.
22
Pearl-2 User Guide
Epiphan Live
Epiphan Live
Epiphan Live is a friendly and easy to use web and tablet interface designed for users with administrator and
operator-level privileges. (See User administration for more information on setting user privileges). The
Epiphan Live interface allows users to perform basic operation of their Pearl-2, including:
l streaming and recording control for channels and recorders
l live switching between sources and custom layouts while streaming and recording
l video, audio and system confidence monitoring
Epiphan Live is supported on the following operating systems/mobile devices and web browsers:
Operating system
or mobile device
Supported web browser(s)
l Google Chrome
Windows
l Microsoft Edge
l Google Chrome
Mac
l Safari
Linux
Android phone or
tablet
l Google Chrome
l Google Chrome
l Google Chrome
iPhone or iPad
l Safari
Text scaling using Google Chrome for Android is not supported.
Topics in this section include:
23
Pearl-2 User Guide
Accessing Epiphan Live
l Accessing Epiphan Live
l Streaming, recording and monitoring using the Dashboard interface
l Live switching using the Switcher interface
Accessing Epiphan Live
You can access Epiphan Live directly using your web browser, mobile device or by clicking a link within the
Admin panel. (Note you can also use Epiphan Live to access the Admin panel).
In all cases, before connecting to Epiphan Live, you need to know your Pearl-2's IP address. If you don't know
your Pearl-2's IP address or are setting up for the first time, see Connect to the Admin panel to get your IP.
Connecting to Epiphan Live directly using your computer's web
browser
You can connect to Epiphan Live directly using a web browser on your Windows, Mac or Linux computer.
To connect to Epiphan Live using your web browser:
1. Enter the following information into the address bar of your web browser, using the syntax below:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>/admin/m
2. Enter your administrator or operator credentials when prompted; you are now connected to Epiphan
Live.
Connecting to Epiphan Live directly using your mobile device
You can connect to Epiphan Live directly using your Android phone/tablet, iPhone or iPad.
To connect to Epiphan Live directly using your mobile device:
1. Enter the following information into the address bar of your web browser , using the syntax below:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>/
2. Enter your administrator or operator credentials when prompted; you are now connected to Epiphan
Live.
Connecting to Epiphan Live from the Admin panel
Accessing Epiphan Live from the Admin panel requires you to first connect to the Admin panel.
24
Pearl-2 User Guide
Accessing Epiphan Live
To connect to Epiphan Live from the Admin panel:
1. Enter the following information into the address bar of your web browser, using the syntax below:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>
2. Enter your administrator or operator credentials when prompted to connect to the Admin panel.
3. Click Epiphan Live in the upper-right corner of the window; the Epiphan Live dashboard opens in a
new window or tab.
Connecting to the Admin panel from Epiphan Live
You can also use Epiphan Live to connect to the Admin panel.
To connect to the Admin panel from Epiphan Live, click the Menu icon in the upper-right corner of the
Dashboard or Switcher interface and then click Admin panel.
25
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming, recording and monitoring using the
Dashboard interface
Streaming, recording and monitoring using the Dashboard interface
The Epiphan Live Dashboard view is an easy-to-use interface that allows you to control the streaming and
recording of channels and also to monitor your video inputs, video outputs, audio inputs and system
information.
26
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understanding the Dashboard interface
Topics in this section include:
l Understanding the Dashboard interface
l Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring
l Monitoring video and audio sources
l Configuring and monitoring video outputs
l Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
Understanding the Dashboard interface
You are first presented with the Dashboard interface upon logging in to Epiphan Live. The Dashboard
interface contains many helpful elements used for confidence monitoring and streaming/recording control,
described in the Elements in the Dashboard interface table below.
The Dashboard view is responsive and automatically adjusts and repositions its elements to fit
cleanly within any size web browser window.
27
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understanding the Dashboard interface
Table 10 Elements in the Dashboard interface
Number Title
1
Dashboard header
icons
Description
l Warning – This icon displays only if there are any configuration
errors in your channels, sources, streams or recordings. Clicking
the icon displays more detail about the errors.
28
Pearl-2 User Guide
Number Title
Understanding the Dashboard interface
Description
l Save – Saves any Dashboard layout changes.
Note that you need to press Save to preserve your
layout setting. When a layout is saved, all other
operators and administrators will see your
configured Dashboard layout when they log in or
refresh their Epiphan Live page.
l Menu – When clicked, displays links to the Switcher view,
Recordings, and Admin panel.
Configurable panels used for confidence monitoring. You can set each
2
Dashboard
panel to display a source, channel, output or basic system information.
monitoring panels
Note that the Dashboard monitoring panels appears blank by default
when logging in for the first time.
3
Dashboard panel
navigation icons
Click to navigate between three different sets of Dashboard monitoring
panels. The illuminated icon represents your currently displayed panel
set.
l 2x – Changes the quanity of Dashboard panels per set to 2 (as in
4
Dashboard panel
the screen shot above).
set quantity icons
l 4x – Changes the quantity of Dashboard panels per set to 4.
5
Video inputs
6
Video outputs
Displays a list of your video inputs configured in the Admin panel and
includes basic status information for each input.
Displays a list of your video output ports configured in the Admin panel
and includes basic status information for each output.
Displays a list of your channels configured in the Admin panel and
7
Channels
includes streaming and recording control buttons for each channel, as
well as individual control buttons for each stream when you set up
multiple streams in a channel.
8
Audio inputs
9
Recorders
Displays a list of your audio inputs configured in the Admin panel.
Includes basic status information and a VU meter for each input.
Displays a list of your recorders configured in the Admin panel and
includes a recording control button for each recorder.
29
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence
monitoring
Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring
You can customize each Dashboard panel to display a specific channel, source or video output. Epiphan Live
allows you to configure up to 8 different panels for comprehensive live preview confidence monitoring of
channels and sources. Note that when Dashboard panels are configured, other users idle on the Dashboard
interface must refresh the page in their web browser to display the updated panels.
The limit of 8 live preview panels applies across all other open instances of Epiphan Live.
Additional users may access Epiphan Live simultaneously from separate locations, for
example, or an operator may accidentally open a duplicate Epiphan Live interface.
You can also display the following set of basic system information in your panels:
l CPU load (%).
l Quantity of streaming connections.
l The current streaming bandwidth (bitrate).
l Automatic file upload status (enabled or disabled). See File and recording transfer.
l Storage available on your Pearl-2.
To configure your Dashboard panels:
1. Log in to Epiphan Live (see Accessing Epiphan Live).
2. Click the drop down box under your desired panel (text says "None" if the panel is not yet configured),
and select a channel, source or output from the dropdown menu.
30
Pearl-2 User Guide
Monitoring video and audio sources
Control streaming and recording directly from the Dashboard panel. When a channel is
applied to a Dashboard panel, streaming and recording control buttons appear under the
panel.
3. Click Save in the upper-right corner of the page to preserve your changes (if you don't save, then your
panel configuration changes are lost when you refresh or navigate away from the Dashboard).
You can navigate between 3 separate sets of Dashboard panels by clicking the circle icons above the
first row of panels.
You can also configure each panel set to display either 2 or 4 panels by clicking the 2x/4x icons above
the upper-right Dashboard panel.
Monitoring video and audio sources
In the Dashboard interface, you can specify video and audio inputs and view the details for each input.
Video sources
By default, the video inputs section of the Dashboard view lists all inputs configured on your Pearl-2.
31
Pearl-2 User Guide
Monitoring video and audio sources
l A green circle icon next to the input name means that the video source is connected to your Pearl-2
and a signal is received. Accompanying text to the right of the input name provides the input's
resolution.
l A yellow circle icon next to the input name means that your Pearl-2 is not receiving a signal from
your source.
l A triangular warning icon next to the input name means there is a source configuration issue that
requires your attention.
Configure the video input list
You can customize the video inputs displayed on the Dashboard interface by clicking the Video inputs
header.
Click the checkbox next to the name of each source to show or hide sources in the Dashboard view (the
Dashboard video input list updates automatically). Make sure to save your changes by clicking the Save icon
in the upper-right corner of your browser!
View video source details
Click the name of a video input to display your source in a small dropdown thumbnail view with warning
details (if there is a warning icon next to your source's name) and accompanying source details:
32
Pearl-2 User Guide
Monitoring video and audio sources
l HDMI, SDI, USB video sources display resolution and refresh rate.
l RTSP sources (such as IP cameras) display resolution, frame rate, codec used and bitrate.
Audio sources
By default, the audio inputs section of the Dashboard view lists all inputs configured on your Pearl-2.
l A grayed-out audio source name means that the audio source is not used in any channels.
l A triangular warning icon next to the input name means there is a source configuration issue that
requires your attention. Click the audio source name to display the corresponding warning message.
l A green circle icon next to the audio source name means the source is connected to your Pearl-2. The
accompanying VU meter to the right of the input name provides the source's volume level.
Read the VU meter
The on-screen VU meter uses quasi-peak ballistics with samples averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average
in each 100 ms period is displayed as a series of colored bars. The following table describes the levels at which
the meter changes from green to yellow and red.
Table 11 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
33
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuring and monitoring video outputs
Color
Decibel range
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
Configure the audio input list
You can customize the audio inputs to display in the Dashboard view by clicking the Audio inputs header.
Click the checkbox next to the name of each source to show or hide sources in the Dashboard view (the
Dashboard audio input list is updated automatically). Make sure to save your changes by clicking the Save
icon in the upper-right corner of your browser!
Configuring and monitoring video outputs
The Dashboard interface allows you to configure video outputs and view output details. By default, both of
Pearl-2's HDMI outputs are displayed in the Dashboard interface and cannot be hidden from view.
l If your output name is displayed with green text, it means your output is connected and transmitting
to your external display. Accompanying text to the right of the output name provides the output's
resolution and frame rate.
l An output name with grayed-out text means your output port is disabled.
l An output name with white text means your output port is enabled but is not connected to an
external display.
34
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuring and monitoring video outputs
View video output details
Click the name of a video output to display your output in a small dropdown thumbnail view.
Configure video outputs
You can enable/disable each HDMI output and set your outputs to display a channel or video source. You can
also enable or disable output volume (if any).
By default, video output ports are configured to maintain aspect ratio, use the display's
default resolution, include audio at 100% and not include the audio VU meter. You can
change these defaults in the Admin panel. See Video output ports to learn more about
advanced-level video output configuration using the Admin panel.
To configure video outputs:
1. Click the Video outputs header text to display the video output configuration box.
35
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuring and monitoring video outputs
2. Click the text box next to your desired output port and select a channel or source from the
dropdown list.
3. Click the speaker icon next to the channel/source text box to enable or disable output audio. A green
icon means audio is enabled; a gray icon means audio is disabled. (See Disable or enable the audio on
36
Pearl-2 User Guide
Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
the video output port).
Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
You can control the streaming and recording of channels and recorders directly from the Epiphan Live
Dashboard interface.
Stream and record channels
Streaming and recording control buttons are located under the Channels heading in the Dashboard view.
For each channel, the stream control is the left-most button containing the "signal" icon, and the recording
control is the right-most button containing the circle icon. If multiple streams are configured in a channel,
individual controls appear for each stream.
When a channel is not being streamed or recorded, the streaming and recording buttons are gray in color and
their respective timers are set to 00:00:00. If streaming has not been configured in the Admin panel, the
streaming button will display the text "Not set". See Stream to viewers to learn how to configure streaming in
the Admin panel.
You can preview a channel by clicking its name to display a small dropdown thumbnail view.
37
Pearl-2 User Guide
Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
To start streaming and recording a channel, simply click the channel's streaming and/or recording buttons.
When clicked, the streaming button turns blue in color and the recording button turns red. The timer
contained within each respective button also begins to count upward.
Alternatively, you can also control streaming and recording of a channel via the Dashboard's monitoring
panels. See Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring for more information.
If the stream is not able to publish, the streaming button flashes blue and displays "ERROR".
In this case, check the streaming configuration settings for your channel in the Admin panel. (See Stream to
viewers to learn how to configure a stream).
38
Pearl-2 User Guide
Live switching using the Switcher interface
Record a Admin panel Recorder
In Pearl-2 you can use Recorders to capture multiple channels at once. Epiphan Live Dashboard view allows
you to use Recorders with the using the button(s) located in the Recorders section. Note that the Recorders
section only appears if you have taken the steps to Add a recorder via the Admin panel.
When a Recorder is not being recorded, the recording button is gray in color and its timers is set to 00:00:00.
To start recording a Recorder, simply click the corresponding button.
When clicked, the recording button turns red. The timer contained within the button also begins to count
upward. Click the button a second time to stop the recording.
Live switching using the Switcher interface
The Epiphan Live Switcher view is a simple interface for live switching between custom layouts while streaming
and/or recording. (For information on creating custom layouts in the Admin panel, see Create a custom
channel or layout.) Pearl-2's touch screen and the Admin panel are also capable of performing live switching
(see Live video mixing / switching).
Performing live switching in one interface (e.g. Epiphan Live) does not dynamically update
the visuals in the other interfaces (e.g. the Admin panel and Pearl-2's touch screen). All
other interfaces must be manually refreshed to accurately reflect the current live switching
layout information.
39
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understanding the Switcher interface
Topics in this section include:
l Understanding the Switcher interface
l Switching while live streaming and recording
Understanding the Switcher interface
The Switcher view is a simple interface used to seamlessly switch between a channel's custom layouts while
live streaming and/or recording. See Create a custom channel or layout for more information on creating
custom layouts.
The Switcher interface is accessed from the Menu button in the Dashboard interface. See Understanding the
Dashboard interface.
The Switcher view is responsive and automatically adjusts and reposition its elements to fit
cleanly within any size web browser window.
See the Elements in the Switcher view table below for a description of each visual element in the Switcher
interface.
40
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understanding the Switcher interface
Table 12 Elements in the Switcher view
Number Title
Description
Select from a list of channels (configured via the Admin panel) to display
1
Channel selector
custom layouts specific to your selected channel. Note that when a
channel is selected, you can only switch between layouts within that
channel.
2
Menu icon
Displays links to the Dashboard view and the Admin panel when clicked.
Displays a preview of a selected layout, outlined with a green border.
3
Preview panel
When the Switch button is clicked, this preview layout becomes the live
layout. See Switching while live streaming and recording for more
information.
Displays the layout currently being streamed and/or recorded, outlined
4
Live view panel
with a red border. When the Switch button is clicked, this live layout is
replaced with the layout in the Preview panel.
5
Layout selection
panel
Displays small previews for all layouts contained within your selected
channel. Click a layout from this list to add it to the Preview panel.
41
Pearl-2 User Guide
Number Title
Switching while live streaming and recording
Description
Note that the layout selected for the Preview panel has a green border
and the layout in the Live view panel has a red border.
When clicked, the layout in the Preview panel replaces the layout in the
6
Switch button
Live view panel, and is immediately reflected in your streaming and/or
recording.
Switching while live streaming and recording
The Switcher interface lets you easily live switch between custom layouts with the simple press of a button.
To switch a layout while live streaming and/or recording:
1. Log in to Epiphan Live; the Dashboard view opens by default. See Accessing Epiphan Live.
2. Click the Menu icon in the upper-right corner of the Dashboard screen and click Switcher to navigate
to the Switcher interface.
42
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching while live streaming and recording
3. Click the text box next to the "Switcher" header and select your desired channel from the dropdown
list (the text box will appear blank if this is your first time configuring the Switcher interface). Note that
in the channel dropdown list, channels containing only a single layout are grayed-out and are not
selectable.
After selecting your channel from the dropdown, the Switcher interface appears with all of your
channel's layouts displayed along the bottom of the page.
The layout currently being streaming and/or recorded is displayed in the Live view panel on the right
side of the interface (see Understanding the Switcher interface).
43
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching while live streaming and recording
4. Click your desired layout at the bottom of the page to dock it in the Preview panel. This is the layout
that will be used next in your program.
5. Click the Switch button in the center of the screen to apply your layout in the Preview panel into
your live stream/recording program.
44
Pearl-2 User Guide
Your Recordings
From here, you can prepare to apply another layout to your program by selecting a new layout from the list
and docking it into the Preview panel.
Your Recordings
All recordings made in Epiphan Live are saved to the Your recordings panel.
45
Pearl-2 User Guide
Your Recordings
After recoding a file, you can manage it and any other files using the following tools on the page:
Number Title
Description
Select a From and a To date from the pop-up calendar to create a date
1
Date selector
range. Then click Apply. Only recordings that were recorded within that
time frame appear in the list below.
Each heading in the list gives information about that category. Clicking
2
File details
on Date organizes the list chronologically by the date the recording
began.
Each recorded file that falls within the search parameters appears in this
list, including important metadata about the file. Clicking on the file
3
Files
selects it so that it can be managed through the other tools on the page.
You may also download or delete an individual file by using the action
items at the end of the file line. Click on the file name to rename the file.
The page number indicates which page of results you are currently
viewing, and how many pages of results are there. The buttons allow
4
Page indicators
you to move between pages one at a time, or straight to the beginning
or end of the list. You can also change which page you are on by typing a
valid page number into the text box.
46
Pearl-2 User Guide
Number Title
5
Select all
6
Delete all
7
Delete
8
Download
Your Recordings
Description
Click this button to select all files on the page.
Click this button to delete all files on the list. Be cautious with this
button, as there is no file retrieval system.
Click this button to delete all selected files. Be cautious with this button,
as there is no file retrieval system.
Click this button to download all selected files to your local hard drive.
47
PART 1: Setup
If you followed through the quick start guide, you already have a basic configuration and possibly a recording
of an input. Before you tweak the channel or configure more, this part of the manual helps you to get your
Pearl-2 properly configured for your network.
Topics covered:
l Connect to the Admin panel
l Configure the touch screen
l User administration
l View system information
l Configure network settings
l Configure date and time
l Configuration presets
l Restrict viewers by IP address
48
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rackmount installation
Rackmount installation
All Pearl-2 models can be used in desktop mode, with the system placed on any flat, stable surface. They are
also all rackmountable into fixed racks or portable rack cases like the one depicted below.
If you purchased Pearl-2 Rackmount or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin, you can install your system directly into a
19-inch rack. For the smaller, portable Pearl-2 model, you can purchase our optional rackmount shelf for
installation in a rack. (Instructions for the rackmount shelf are included with the shelf.)
To install Pearl-2 Rackmount or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin in a 19-inch rack:
1. Ensure you have the correct bolts needed for your rack (not included). Pearl-2's rackmount holes are
sized to work with both threaded and non-threaded mounting systems.
2. Carefully slide the system into and available 2U space in your 19-inch rack.
3. Attach four bolts as shown below.
49
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Admin panel
The Admin panel
Pearl-2 is managed from a web interface. This means to perform administrative tasks with Pearl-2 you use an
internet browser on a PC (or laptop, or tablet) connected to the same local Ethernet network.
Connect to the Admin panel
If you know the IP address of the system you may type it into the address bar of your web browser.
http://<IP Address of Pearl-2>/admin
However, if this is the first time you access your system, you likely don't know the IP address, so you can use
one of the following connection methods:
For networks with DHCP use one of the following procedures:
l Connect using the touch screen
l Connect via DNS-based service discovery
l Connect via the Epiphan discovery utility
For networks without DHCP, use the following procedure:
l Connect via persistent static IP address
You can also connect to Epiphan Live – a simple and easy-to-use web and tablet interface for
confidence monitoring, streaming/recording control and live switching operation. See Epiphan
Live for more information.
Connect using the touch screen
To connect to the Admin panel, you need to know your Pearl-2's IP address. There are a number of ways to
determine the IP address, but the simplest way is to use the touch screen, if it is enabled.
To connect to the Admin panel using the touch screen to determine the IP address:
1. Obtain the IP address using the touch screen:
l from a single channel view or grid view, touch the system settings (gears) button then touch
System Status; or
50
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect via DNS-based service discovery
l if your system doesn't have any channels showing, touch the screen anywhere to move to the
system settings screen then touch System Status.
2. Type the following string into the address bar of your web browser on your admin computer, where <ip
address> is the ip address of your Pearl-2.
http://<ip address>/admin
For example: http://192.168.1.163/admin
3. Enter the user name and password then click OK. The administrative user is 'admin'. Initially no
password is set. To set a password follow the procedure outlined in User administration.
Connect via DNS-based service discovery
Pearl-2 uses DNS-based messages to advertise details about itself, including its host name. With a compatible
utility installed on your computer, you can access the system simply by typing its serial number and the suffix
".local" into the address bar of your browser.
To ensure you have compatible software, refer to the following table.
51
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect via DNS-based service discovery
Table 13 Installing Bonjour Print Services
System
Action Needed
You must install Bonjour Print Services:
1. Use the following URL - http://support.apple.com/kb/DL999
Microsoft Windows
2. Click Download.
3. Follow the system prompts to download and install the application.
The Bonjour software used for service discovery is built into the Mac OS. No special
Mac OS X
actions are needed.
The Avahi implementation used for DNS-based discovery is shipped with most Linux
Linux
distributions. If necessary, check with your administrator to ensure you have the
Avahi package installed.
To access Pearl-2's Admin panel via DNS service discovery:
1. Find the system’s serial number. It is printed on a sticker on the back of the system, or available on the
system information display on the touch screen. To access the serial number:
l from the "no channels" screen, touch the screen anywhere to move to the system information
screen;
l from a single channel view, touch the system information button; or
l from the grid view, select a channel, then touch the system information button.
2. Type the following string into the address bar of your web browser on your admin computer, where
<serial> is the serial number of your Pearl-2:
http://<serial>.local/admin
For example: http://95dd40d5.local/admin
3. Enter the user name and password then click OK. The administrative user is 'admin'. Initially no
password is set. To set a password follow the procedure outlined in User administration.
52
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect via the Epiphan discovery utility
4. Optionally, navigate to the Network link under the Configuration heading and note the IP address of
the system.
Connect via the Epiphan discovery utility
Epiphan provides a utility for discovering Epiphan systems on your network. The Epiphan network discovery
utility is a 32-bit Windows executable that works on most 32-bit and 64-bit Windows operating systems.
Download and install the utility via this link: https://www.epiphan.com/downloads/NetworkDiscovery.exe.
To access the Pearl-2's Admin panel via the Epiphan discovery utility:
1. Launch the discovery utility.
2. Click Search to find all the Epiphan systems on the network; a list similar to the following appears.
53
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect via the Epiphan discovery utility
3. If more than one system appears, select the one you wish to configure by matching the serial number
listed with the serial number marked on the back of the system.
4. Optionally, note the IP Address shown in the stream properties. Use this for quicker access to the
system on future configuration sessions.
5. Click the Web config button; your browser will open and point to the Admin panel page.
http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/admin
6. Enter the user name and password then click OK. The administrative user is ‘admin’. Initially no
password is set. To set a password follow the procedure outlined in User administration.
54
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect via persistent static IP address
Connect via persistent static IP address
Your Pearl-2 has a default persistent static IP address, also known as the recovery IP address. If ever you
need to set it up on a network that does not support DHCP, or you need to recover from a previous static IP
address setting, you can use this method to connect directly to the system for configuration.
To perform this procedure you will need a workstation computer for which you are able to modify network
settings.
Pearl-2 is pre-configured with the following static address defaults:
l IP Address:
192.168.255.250
l Netmask:
255.255.255.252
l Username:
admin
l Password:
your admin password (by default set to no password)
To access Pearl-2's Admin panel via the persistent static IP address:
1. Establish an Ethernet connection between Pearl-2 and the workstation by one of the following
methods:
a. Connect the system to a local Ethernet network shared with the workstation.
b. Connect the system directly to the workstation’s Ethernet port using either a regular or a
crossover Ethernet cable.
2. Record the network settings of the workstation being used to connect to Pearl-2 so that they can be
restored later.
3. Temporarily change the network configuration on the workstation to the following:
a. Use Static IP assignment
b. IP address: 192.168.255.249
c. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252
4. Start a web browser on the workstation and browse to: http://192.168.255.250/admin/
5. Log in as the administrator user with the user name admin and the admin password (by default there is
no password); the Admin panel opens.
6. Click the Networking link in the Configuration menu.
7. Select the radio button to use a static address and configure the system with a static IP address and
network settings relevant to the network being used. For specific details about the settings presented,
see Configure network settings.
8. Restore the previously saved network configurations on the workstation.
55
Pearl-2 User Guide
User administration
User administration
Pearl-2 has three configured users:
l admin
l operator
l viewer
By default, none of these users have passwords. For security purposes you should add passwords to the
admin and operator accounts.
This section describes the following user administration topics:
l User types and privileges
l Set or change user passwords
l Remove user passwords
l Overcome lost passwords
l Configure LDAP
l Change the logged-in user
l Restrict viewers by IP address
User types and privileges
Pearl-2's three user accounts are admin, operator and viewer. The user account names cannot be changed
and the accounts cannot be disabled. By default, none of the accounts have passwords.
Admin
The admin account is used for all system configuration. This user has access to all options in the Admin panel.
Operator
The operator account allows users limited Pearl-2 configuration control.
If an operator does not have the privileges to apply a particular configuration in the Admin panel, the Apply
button appears grayed-out in color and is not clickable (as shown in the image below).
56
Pearl-2 User Guide
User types and privileges
The operator account is intended for an operator to configure sources, control recordings (start and stop);
rename, download and delete recordings; switch layouts while live streaming or perform network diagnostics.
Viewer
The viewer account is for all end-users who are permitted to view the streamed channels. By default, when
there is no password, users are not prompted for a username and password when viewing a channel. The
viewer username and password prompt appears only when there is a viewer password set.
In addition to the global viewer account, each channel can set a viewer password that overrides the global
value. See Restrict access to streams for viewers.
Current user
When logged in to the Admin panel, the current username is displayed at the top right corner of the screen.
User privileges
The following table outlines the privileges for each user:
57
Pearl-2 User Guide
User types and privileges
Table 14 User privileges in the Admin panel
Action or Menu Option
View Channel Output
viewer
operator
admin
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Channel Operations
View Channel Configuration
Rename a Channel
ü
Configure Stream Channel
ü
Configure Stream Sources
ü
Publish a Stream
ü
Configure Branding for a Channel
ü
Switch Layouts while Streaming/Recording
ü
ü
Start the Stream Recorder
ü
ü
Stop the Stream Recorder
ü
ü
View Recorded Files List
ü
ü
Rename Recorded Files
ü
ü
Download Recorded Files
ü
ü
Delete Recorded Files
ü
ü
ü
ü
Source Operations
View Source Configuration
Rename Source
ü
Configure Source
ü
ü
View Source Snapshot
ü
ü
ü
ü
System Configuration Operations
View System Configuration
Configure Automatic File Upload
ü
Select External USB Drive Behavior
ü
58
Pearl-2 User Guide
Action or Menu Option
User types and privileges
viewer
operator
admin
Configure FTP Server
ü
Configure UPnP Sharing
ü
Configure Network Address
ü
Configure USB Tethering
ü
Perform Network Diagnostics
ü
ü
Configure Date and Time preferences
ü
Set or Change User Passwords
ü
Configure the Touch Screen
ü
Configure Serial Port Flow Control
ü
Upload Branding Images
ü
Upload Branding Templates
ü
Select Branding Template
ü
Enable Remote Support
ü
Backup Device Configuration
ü
Restore Device Configuration
ü
Restore Factory Configuration
ü
Reboot Device (via Admin panel)
ü
Shutdown Device (via Admin panel)
ü
Configure Time Until Next Disk Check
ü
Perform Disk Check
ü
View Disk Information
ü
ü
Upgrade Firmware
ü
View System Information
ü
ü
59
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set or change user passwords
Set or change user passwords
By default, admin, operator and viewer have no assigned passwords. Both the admin and the operator user
have access to the Admin panel, so you should always set a password for both admin and operator accounts.
Refer to your system administrator for your organization’s specific password requirements.
If the admin password is defined and the operator password is undefined, then the operator uses
the admin password by default.
In addition to setting global passwords for viewers, you can also set access passwords and IP restrictions on a
per-channel basis from the channel's Streaming page. See Restrict viewers by IP address.
Passwords are case sensitive and can use all alpha-numeric keys in the ASCII range. Your password can be up
to 255 characters long, but should not include any spaces.
Setting a user’s password causes the user to be logged out. Be ready to log back in with the new
admin password or have operators and viewers log in with the appropriate new password.
Viewers may need to refresh their browser window or press play in their media player.
If you lose the admin password, refer to the section Overcome lost passwords.
Changing the admin password while live streaming disrupts the view of the stream for viewer-level
users. Complete any admin password changes when there is no live stream in progress.
To set a user password:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Access passwords link in the Configuration menu; the password configuration page opens.
3. Highlight and delete the current password for your selected user (the password is currently masked
as dots).
For security reasons, the current password appears as eight dots regardless of password
length, and even if there is no password set.
4. Highlight and delete the confirmation password for the selected user.
5. Select the user’s password field and type a new password for the user.
60
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove user passwords
The new password must have between 1-255 alpha-numeric characters or special
characters with no spaces. Passwords are case sensitive.
6. Select the user’s password confirmation field and confirm the new password.
7. Click Apply.
8. If you were logged in as the user whose password you just changed, you are logged out and must log
back in with the new password. If you added or changed the viewer’s password, all viewer’s stream will
pause until they log in with the new password.
If desired, you may specify multiple account passwords on the same page before clicking Apply.
Remove user passwords
If you want to remove passwords for one or more user accounts, you may do so via the Admin panel. If you
don’t remember the admin password, refer to the section Overcome lost passwords.
Note that viewer passwords can be set on a per-channel basis.
Clearing a user’s password will cause that user to be logged out. Be ready to log back in with the
new admin password. If viewers are watching the broadcast when the viewer password is cleared
they will be logged out. Viewers may need to refresh their browser window or press play in their
media player to trigger the login prompt.
To clear a user’s password:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Access passwords link in the Configuration menu; the password configuration page opens.
3. Highlight and delete the current password for your selected user (the password is currently masked as
dots).
For security purposes, the current password appears as eight dots regardless of password
length, and even if there is no password set.
4. Highlight and delete the confirmation password for the selected user.
5. Click Apply.
6. If you were logged in as the user whose password you just cleared, you are logged out and must log
back in without a password. If you cleared the viewer’s password, all viewer streams will pause until
they log in without a password.
To clear a user’s password on a specific channel:
61
Pearl-2 User Guide
Overcome lost passwords
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the Streaming link for the channel; the channel's Streaming configuration page opens.
3. From the Access control section do one of the two following things:
a. Clear the viewer password field; or
b. Select Use global settings from the access control drop down.
4. Click Apply.
Overcome lost passwords
If you have lost the password for the operator or viewer account, you can log in to the Admin panel and reset
the password using the procedure described in Set or change user passwords.
If you have lost the admin password and you have remote support enabled on the system, you can contact
Epiphan support to request a remote password change. See Support. If remote support is disabled, you will
need to return the system to Epiphan for password recovery. Contact Epiphan support to discuss this option.
You might instead choose to regain access by resetting Pearl-2 to its factory default settings using the touch
screen. Just Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
Configure LDAP
You can use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) for authentication into the system. Specify user
roles by using group DNs for users who log in as the administrator, operator or as a viewer.
The system has only one admin user and one operator: LDAP users log in as either the admin or
operator, they do not have their own private profiles.
When enabled, LDAP authentication is an alternative to the regular system usernames and
passwords. You may still login as admin, operator or viewer using the passwords for those
accounts. Furthermore, any LDAP users with the name admin, operator or viewer are ignored. The
local accounts are used instead.
For security reasons, you should configure passwords for the local accounts. See Configure
LDAP.
These instructions assume you have a pre-configured LDAP server. The server must support anonymous
binding or have a special bind account with search access privileges. (Note that Active Directory does not
support anonymous binding.)
62
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure LDAP
LDAP referrals, restrictions and failovers are not supported.
To configure LDAP authentication for your Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Access passwords link in the Configuration menu; the password configuration page opens.
3. Scroll to the LDAP authentication section.
4. Click the Enable LDAP authentication checkbox to enable LDAP authentication (or uncheck to
disable).
5. Specify the server IP address and (optional) port for your LDAP server (i.e. 192.168.1.101:389) in the
Server address[:port] field.
6. Use the Connection encryption drop-down to specify the type of encryption, if any used by your
LDAP server.
Connection
encryption
Description/Default port used
No Encryption
No encryption is used to connect to the LDAP server. The default port is 389.
SSL
SSL encryption is used to connect to the LDAP server. The default port is 636.
TLS/STARTTLS
The connection is initially unencrypted then upgraded to TLS encryption is
used. The default port is 389.
7. Specify the fully qualified DN and password for LDAP bind in the Bind DN and Bind password fields.
(The password masked as dots on the screen.) These fields are only needed if your LDAP server does
not support anonymous binding.
8. In Base DN, specify the baseObject in which to search for entries. The system will search this object
and the whole subtree starting at the base DN.
63
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the logged-in user
9. By default the search attribute is uid, which is suitable for a unix environment. Specify a different value
in the Search attribute field, if needed. For Active Directory environments, specify
userPrincipalName. The value of this attribute must be unique in the Base DN.
10. In the Administrators (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be
part of to be logged in as the administrator. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute
for the specified group to be granted Administrator access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Administrators (but can still be used for Operators and Viewers).
11. In the Operators (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be part of
to be logged in as the operator. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute for the
specified group to be granted Operator access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Operators (but can still be used for Administrators and Viewers).
12. In the Viewers (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be part of to
be logged in as a viewer. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute for the specified
group to be granted Viewer access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Viewers (but can still be used for Administrators and Operators).
13. Click Apply.
When a user of the LDAP server next visits the admin or viewer page for the system, the system prompts for
use the username and password. For ActiveDirectory servers, the user needs to enter his fully qualified
username (i.e. username@domainname) in addition to his LDAP password.
Users are required to authenticate once to the system and one time per channel they view.
Therefore users see a prompt to log in to the system (the system name is shown) and a second
time to log in to the channel (the channel name is shown).
In one case, LDAP replaces the local viewer account instead of working side-by-side with it.
When LDAP is enabled and the viewer account has no password (either there is no global viewer
password or the channel overrides the global password with a blank password), the viewer must
authentication with LDAP, he may not alternatively use the viewer account with a blank
password.
Change the logged-in user
When you log in to the Admin panel as admin or operator, your browser remembers this configuration and
automatically logs you in as the same user when you go back to the site.
Sometimes you need to change from operator to admin, or vice versa.
64
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
To change the logged-in user:
1. Click the logout button at the top right of the screen (beside your user name); you are logged out.
Some browsers may require you click the button twice before the log out action executes.
Restrict viewers by IP address
Pearl-2 permits you to restrict which computers can access broadcasts by building a list of allowed and/or
denied IP addresses. You can do this at a global level for the system and can also override these settings on a
per-channel basis. Both global and per-channel configuration procedures are described below.
You cannot set per-channel passwords and IP restrictions if you stream using HTTP Live Streaming
(HLS).
If your viewer account has a password, your viewers must connect to the system from a computer (or
gateway) with a permitted IP address and must also supply the username (viewer) and password before they
can view the broadcast.
To restrict access by IP address, you need to know the IP addresses or range of addresses for your viewers. By
default, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the broadcast.
If you’re not familiar with creating allow/deny lists, refer to the examples below this procedure for assistance
with crafting your lists.
IP address restriction is valid for the viewer only and does not affect the Admin panel or the
mobile configuration interface.
To restrict viewers by IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
65
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
2. Select the Access passwords link in the Configuration menu; the password configuration page opens.
3. Type allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
4. Type denied IP addresses or address ranges in the Deny IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
5. Click Apply.
To restrict viewers of a specific channel by IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Streaming link for the desired channel; the streaming configuration page opens.
3. From the Access Control drop-down, select Use these Settings; local password and Allow/Deny IP
lists are enabled.
4. If desired, type a password for the viewer in the Viewer Password field.
5. Type allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
6. Type denied IP addresses or address ranges in the Deny IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
7. Click Apply.
If a user attempts to connect to the stream from a disallowed IP address, access is denied. If connecting by
internet browser, the message "IP address rejected." is displayed.
The following table describes the applicable fields.
Table 15 IP Based Restriction Fields
Label
Description/Options
Enter individual IP addresses or IP address ranges, separated by commas. To specify a
range, use a hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
Users connecting from addresses in this list are permitted to view broadcasts from the
Allow IP's
system, provided their IP address is not in the Deny IP’s list.
To allow all except IP addresses in the deny list, if any, leave the field blank.
You can use the Allow list by itself, or in conjunction with the Deny IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
Enter individual IP addresses or IP address ranges, separated by commas. To specify a
range, use a hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
Deny IP's
Users connecting from addresses in this list are not allowed to view broadcasts from the
system, unless their IP address is in the Allow IP’s list. If a specific IP address is in both lists,
access to the stream is denied.
You can use the Deny list by itself, or in conjunction with the Allow IP’s list as an exception
66
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
IP restriction examples
Description/Options
to a rule in the allow list.
IP restriction examples
Allow list with distinct IP addresses
The simplest allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to craft a list of allowed IP addresses. All
other addresses are denied access to the broadcast.
For example if your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and you want to make sure only the
CEO’s specific desktop, laptop and tablet computers (with IP Addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.165.1.75, respectively) can connect to the broadcast, construct the following allow list:
Allow: 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Allow list with a range of IP addresses
Sometimes you’ll want a range of computer IP addresses to connect to your system. This may happen when
you have one range of IP addresses assigned to desktop computers (i.e. in the range 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.100) and another range assigned to boardroom computers (i.e. the range 192.168.1.200 to
192.168.1.250). If you only want the boardroom computers to connect to broadcasts from the system you
can specify the range of boardroom IP addresses rather than needing to type in each individual address. The
allow list looks as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250
Note that we could have specified two of the IP addresses in the previous example as a range.
Allow list with a range of IP addresses and one or more specific IP addresses
Putting the first two examples together, we want to permit access to IP addresses in the range of boardroom
computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250) and also want to add the desktop, laptop and tablet computers
of the CEO (IP addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and 192.168.1.75, respectively). Note the first two IP
addresses are consecutive, so they can be added as a second range. Add these IP addresses to the list as
follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Your list can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses, provided they are separated by commas.
67
Pearl-2 User Guide
IP restriction examples
Deny list with distinct IP addresses
Another simple allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to list specific denied IP addresses. All
other addresses are allowed access to the broadcast.
For example imagine your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and you want to allow any
computer on the LAN can access the stream except your publicly-accessible boardroom (with IP address
192.168.1.211). You can use the following deny list (leave the allow list empty) to permit all computers except
the boardroom computer:
Deny: 192.168.1.211
As with allow lists, your deny list can specify a range of IP addresses, and can specify multiple ranges or distinct
IP addresses in a comma-separated list.
Allow list with a range of IP addresses, distinct IP addresses and an exception
Building on the previous examples, consider the situation where you want the CEO’s computers
(192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.75) and all boardroom computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250)
to access the broadcast, with the exception of the public boardroom computer (192.168.1.211). Use both
allow and deny lists to create the rule as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Deny: 192.168.1.211
Both lists can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses, provided they are separated by
commas.
Deny list with a range of IP addresses
Converse to the previous examples, consider the situation where you want every computer on the network to
access the broadcast, with the exception of the CEO’s desktop, laptop and tablet computers. Additionally,
boardroom computers should not be permitted with the exception of the cafeteria computer (IP address
192.168.1.222).
The deny list is an "exception" list for the allow list. So to craft the rule described above we need to allow all the
computers in the local subnet, then deny specific sub-ranges including two groups of boardroom computers
ensuring the cafeteria computer's IP address is not in the deny list:
Allow: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.250
68
Pearl-2 User Guide
IP restriction examples
Deny: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.221, 192.168.1.223-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
69
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2's touch screen
Pearl-2's touch screen
Pearl-2's front panel includes a touch screen display used for confidence monitoring, basic configuration and
streaming/recording operation.
Use the touch screen to view system information, configure network settings, load configuration presets, view
configured channels, review audio levels, and control channel streaming/recording.
By default, the screen and all its features are enabled. You can configure whether or not the touch screen is
active and which features are enabled. See Configure the touch screen.
Pearl-2's touch screen is capacitive. Use your finger or a specially designed soft-tipped capacitive
stylus with firm but gentle pressure. Pressing too hard or using something other than a fingertip
or capacitive stylus can result in damage to the screen.
This section describes how to use the touch screen and provides an overview of the functionality available
through the screen.
l Touchscreen overview
l View system information
l Channel monitoring
l Pearl-2's audio jack
l One Touch streaming and recording control
l Control recording of individual channels
l Control streaming of individual channels
l View AFU status
l Configure the touch screen
Touchscreen overview
While Pearl-2 is booting, the following image appears on the touch screen (if the screen is enabled).
70
Pearl-2 User Guide
Touchscreen overview
After boot up is complete, Pearl-2 displays a grid view providing an overview of all configured channels.
If you have no sources plugged in, or if no plugged in source is sending a signal, the grid view shows the two
auto channels with no signal (see Use the automatic channels Auto A and Auto B for more details on auto
channels):
With sources plugged into at least one input of row A and row B, the grid view looks more like this:
From this screen, touch either channel to go to the individual channel screen, or touch the gear symbol to go
to the system settings screen. From the single channel screen touch the gear to go to system settings or
touch the button with four squares to return to the grid.
71
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information
If you delete the automatic channels Auto A or Auto B, and have no other channels configured, Pearl-2
shows a no channels screen. Touch anywhere on this screen to go to the system settings screen.
If the touch screen is configured not to show channel previews, the screen shows the following preview
disabled message. Touch anywhere to on this screen to go to the system settings screen.
View system information
Useful when first setting up Pearl-2, for finding the system serial number or to check the installed firmware
version, the touch screen shows you basic information about your Pearl-2. If desired, you can choose to
disable this screen. See Configure the touch screen.
72
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information
Label
Description
Device Information
l Serial number
l video grabber number
l Firmware version
Network Information
l IP Address
l MAC Address
Device Status
l System date
l System time
l Uptime
l Temperature in degrees Celsius
Storage Information (when available)
l Disk space available
l Pictogram of available disk space To show system information on the touch screen:
1. If the system settings button (gear) is not on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the control
buttons.
2. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's Touch screen configuration.
73
Pearl-2 User Guide
Channel monitoring
See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
3. Touch the system settings button (gear) on the screen.
4. Touch System Status to see the System Status page.
To close the system information screen:
1. Touch Back to return to the System Settings screen, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
Channel monitoring
Use Pearl-2's front-panel screen to have complete confidence about what you're capturing. View audio levels
and a preview of the captured video for each channel. Change between individual channels or view a grid of all
channels using on-screen navigation buttons. You can also directly monitor audio quality using the 3.5 mm
audio jack located at the front of the device. Read more about Pearl-2's audio jack.
You may also be interested in learning about video switching from the touch screen, see Live video mixing /
switching.
74
Pearl-2 User Guide
Individual channel monitoring
Individual channel monitoring
Table 16 Parts of the touch screen in individual channel view
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
5
Channel name.
Streaming status (gray means streaming is stopped, flashing
blue means streaming is started).
Streaming timer (time since streaming was started).
Recording status (bright red and flashing means recording is
started).
Recording timer (time since recording was started).
Switch to the previous channel and next channel,
6 and 7
respectively. (Note that these arrow icons fade when the
touch screen is idle (i.e. untouched) for several seconds.
Touch the touch screen to make these icons reappear.)
8
9
Audio VU meter (see chart below for decibel ranges).
Audio monitoring volume control icon. Touch to change
volume level (see Pearl-2's audio jack for more information).
75
Pearl-2 User Guide
Grid-view channel monitoring
Item
Description
Live switching layout view icon. See Live video mixing /
10
switching for more information on live switching using this
view.
11
12
Grid view icon. See Grid-view channel monitoring for more
information.
Single touch control icon. See One Touch streaming and
recording control.
13
System settings icon. See View system information.
To switch between available channels:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
3. Touch the left or right controls on at the side of the channel display; the screen displays the next
channel.
To change from grid view to an individual channel view:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. Touch any channel in the grid view; the screen displays the selected channel.
The on-screen VU meter uses quasi-peak ballistics with samples averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average
in each 100 ms period is displayed as a series of colored bars. The following table describes the levels at which
the meter changes from green to yellow and red.
Table 17 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
Grid-view channel monitoring
Depending on the number of configured channels, the grid view will show 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 channels at once.
76
Pearl-2 User Guide
Grid-view channel monitoring
Table 18 Parts of the touch screen in grid view
Location
Top left of channel
Description
Channel name
Streaming (left) and recording (right) indicators:
(no dots)
Streaming is disabled and recording is stopped.
Streaming is stopped and recording is stopped.
Streaming is started and recording is stopped.
Streaming has an error and recording is stopped.
Top right of channel
Streaming is stopped and recording is started.
Streaming is started and recording is started.
Streaming has an error and recording is started.
Streaming is disabled and recording is started.
(Stop and start recording from the individual channel view.)
Bottom left of
channel
Lower right corner of
screen
Audio level indicator. See Audio VU meter for description of levels.
Gear icon. Used to access settings.
To change from individual channel view to grid view:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
3. Touch the grid view button; the screen displays the grid view
77
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pearl-2's audio jack
Pearl-2's audio jack
Pearl-2's front panel includes a 3.5 mm audio jack for audio monitoring.
Audio monitoring
To use the audio monitor, plug speakers or a microphone into the 3.5 mm audio jack.
Use the touch screen to select a channel, that channel's audio is played through the speakers or headphone.
The audio played is always the audio corresponding to the layout that is currently live.
Adjust audio monitoring volume
You can adjust audio monitoring volume by touching the headphones icon on the touch screen.
Each touch on the headphones icon increases the audio monitoring volume by 25% to a maximum volume of
100%. Touching the headphones icon when audio monitoring is at 100% mutes the volume. You can also
mute (and unmute) the audio monitoring volume by pressing and holding the headphones icon.
Volume is muted.
25%
50%
75%
100%
volume.
volume.
volume.
volume.
78
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control recording of individual channels
Audio VU meter
Whether or not you have speakers or headphones are plugged in, the touch screen also shows the audio
levels on a VU meter. The VU meter uses a quasi-peak sampling algorithm and shows the level in dBFS (decibels relative to full scale). It uses colored bars (from green to red) to represent the current level.
Table 19 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
Control recording of individual channels
Pearl-2's touch screen gives you freedom to start and stop recording your channels individually without
needing to log in to the Admin panel.
Simply scroll to the channel you wish to control and press the start or stop recording button.
79
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control recording of individual channels
Pearl-2 also features "One Touch" recording/streaming control which allows you to
control your recording and streaming across any number of specified channels and
recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button. See One Touch streaming and
recording control for more information.
To start recording a channel:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control recording; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. Touch the red record button (see above) at the top right of the screen; recording starts and a timer is
displayed to show the length of the recording.
To stop recording:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control recording; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. Touch the red record button (see above) at the top right of the screen; recording stops and the timer
disappears.
80
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control streaming of individual channels
Control streaming of individual channels
Pearl-2's touch screen gives you freedom to start and stop streaming without needing to log in to the Admin
panel.
Simply scroll to the channel you wish to control and press the start or stop streaming button on the
touchscreen.
Pearl also features "One Touch" recording/streaming control which allows you to
control your recording and streaming across any number of specified channels and
recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button. See One Touch streaming and
recording control for more information.
To start streaming a channel:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control streaming; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. If there is no grey or blue streaming button at the top left corner of the screen, streaming is disabled.
See Stream to a CDN to enable streaming.
5. Touch the grey streaming button (see above) at the top left of the screen; streaming starts and the
timer begins to show the time elapsed since streaming started. (If an error occurs, a yellow circle with an
exclamation mark will appear. Check your networking and streaming settings.)
81
Pearl-2 User Guide
One Touch streaming and recording control
To stop streaming:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control streaming; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. Touch the blue streaming button (see above) at the top left of the screen; streaming stops, the dot
turns grey and the timer returns to zero.
One Touch streaming and recording control
You can easily control your Pearl-2's streaming and recording operation with the simple press of a button on
Pearl-2's touch screen.
This topic covers:
l Understand and use One Touch control
l Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
l Specify channels for One Touch streaming
l Customize how One Touch control is displayed
82
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understand and use One Touch control
Understand and use One Touch control
You can access the One Touch control screen by touching the One Touch control icon at the bottom of
Pearl-2's touch screen, as shown below.
In the One Touch control screen, you can start/stop streaming and recording all specified channels and
recorders simultaneously with a single button.
The elements contained in the One Touch control screen are described in the table below.
Table 20 One Touch control touch screen components
Label Name
1
Description
Start/stop
Press to start or stop streaming and recording for all
button
specified channels and recorders.
83
Pearl-2 User Guide
Understand and use One Touch control
Label Name
Description
Displays the quantity of recorders and/or channels
2
Recording
that are currently recording (the first number) over
the total number of channels that are configured for
One Touch recording (the second number).
Displays the quantity of channels that are currently
3
Streaming
streaming (the first number) over the total number
of channels that are configured for One Touch
streaming (the second number).
When One Touch control is activated (i.e. the Start button is pressed), the Start button is replaced by a blue
Stop button, and the Streaming and Recording values update accordingly.
In the example above, One Touch control has been activated and all six out of the six total
channels and/or recorders are recording successfully. There is no streaming activity because
there are no channels configured for One Touch streaming.
If there is a problem with your streaming and/or recording settings, an error icon will display after pressing the
Start button. Note that recordings and streams without problems will continue to function normally.
84
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
In the example above, after pressing Start, all six recorders/channels are recording properly but
the one channel configured for streaming is not streaming correctly!
If you have multiple channels configured for streaming and more than one of these channels is
not streaming correctly, navigate to each channel's streaming configuration page in the Admin
panel to identify the channel(s) in question and correct streaming configuration errors.
If you encounter an error such as this one, we recommend you verify your streaming/recording settings for
your specified channels. See Specify channels for One Touch streaming and Specify channels and recorders
for One Touch recording for more information on configuring channels and recorders for One Touch control.
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
All channels and recorders are enabled for One Touch recording by default; however you can choose to
exclude individual channels and recorders.
Topics include:
l Specify channels for One Touch recording
l Specify recorders for One Touch recording
Specify channels for One Touch recording
You can use the Admin panel to enable or disable each channel for One Touch recording control. (See Record
to learn how to configure your channels for recording).
To specify channels for single touch recording:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of the selected channel to expand the channel menu.
85
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
3. Click the Recording link to open the channel's Recording page.
4. Click the change link next to the text "Excluded from Automatic File Upload" to display additional
recording setup options.
86
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
5. Select (or deselect) the Single touch control checkbox to enable or disable One Touch control for the
current channel.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
Specify recorders for One Touch recording
You can use the Admin panel to enable or disable each recorder for One Touch recording control. (See
Recorders to learn how to configure recorders for your Pearl-2.)
To specify recorders for One Touch recording:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of the selected recorder under the Recorders heading to display the Recorder Setup
page.
87
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
3. Click the change link next to the text "Excluded from Automatic File Upload" to display additional
recording setup options.
4. Select (or deselect) the Single touch control checkbox to enable or disable One Touch control for the
current channel.
5. Click Apply to save your changes.
88
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
One Touch control allows you to set channels for streaming, however channels are not enabled for One Touch
streaming by default. (See Stream to learn how to configure your channels for streaming.)
To specify channels for One Touch streaming:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of the selected channel to expand the channel menu.
3. Click the Streaming link to open the channel's Streaming page.
4. Click the New stream drop down menu and select your desired publish method.
89
Pearl-2 User Guide
Customize how One Touch control is displayed
5. Select (or deselect) the Single touch control checkbox to enable or disable One Touch control for the
current channel.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
Customize how One Touch control is displayed
Using Pearl-2's Admin panel, you can customize how the One Touch control screen displays. For example, you
can configure the One Touch control screen to display on system startup and/or lock the screen to prevent
Pearl-2 operators from navigating elsewhere using the touch screen.
90
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU status
You can customize how One Touch Control is displayed using the following settings:
Default: The One Touch control screen can be accessed by touching the One Touch control
icon at the bottom of Pearl-2's touch screen.
Start Screen: The One Touch control screen displays upon system startup. Operators are still
free to navigate to other screens (i.e. preview screen, settings).
Locked: The One Touch control screen is the only view available; operators are prevented from
navigating to different screens.
To select how Pearl-2 displays the One Touch control screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the Touch Screen link under the Configuration heading; the touch screen configuration opens.
3. Click the Single touch control dropdown menu and select Default, Start Screen or Locked.
4. Click Apply; your One Touch control display settings are now saved. If you chose to apply Start Screen
or Locked, your Pearl-2's touch screen will automatically refresh to display the One Touch control
screen.
View AFU status
You can view basic Automatic File Upload (AFU) information from your Pearl-2's touch screen.
91
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU status
See File and recording transfer to learn how to configure AFU settings in the Admin panel.
Table 21 AFU status touch screen components
Label Name
Description
Indicates the AFU status:
l Enabled
l Disabled
1
Status
l Waiting – files are in queue to be transmitted for upload
according to specified time interval – within the next 6,
12 or 24 hours. (See Enable AFU and set parameters)
l Error – an error has occurred with the AFU
Provides the configured AFU protocol:
l FTP
l RSYNC
l CIFS
2
Protocol
l SCP
l SFTP
l AWS S3 Client
l WebDav
l External USB drive
3
Queue
Displays the number of files currently in the AFU queue and
the total file size.
To access the Automatic File Upload status in the touch screen:
92
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU status
1. Touch the system settings button (the gear icon) in the lower right corner of the screen.
If the gear icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to activate the
control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's
touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system
information.
2. Touch the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to naviaget to the second Settings page.
3. Touch Automatic File Upload to display the AFU Status page.
93
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
To close the system information screen, touch Back (in the upper-left corner of the screen) to return to the
System Settings view, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
Configure the touch screen
By default, Pearl-2's touch screen is enabled and all its features are available. Depending on your
circumstances, you may wish to disable the screen, or disable just some of its features.
This section covers the following touch screen configuration items:
l Disable (or enable) the touch screen
l Hide (or show) channel previews on the touch screen
l Disable (or enable) system status on the touch screen
l Block (or allow) configuration functions from the touch screen
l Block (or allow) recording, streaming and switching from the touch screen
l Set touch screen timeout
l Configure touch screen PIN security code
Disable (or enable) the touch screen
You can prevent Pearl-2 from displaying anything on the touch screen, or you can re-instate this feature by
toggling the Enable display configuration option.
The display is always touch-sensitive. This control indicates whether or not the display is on
or off.
To disable (or enable) the touch screen display:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
94
Pearl-2 User Guide
Hide (or show) channel previews on the touch screen
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Enable display to disable the display (or check the box to enable the display).
4. Click Apply.
Hide (or show) channel previews on the touch screen
By default, Pearl-2 shows previews of each configured channel. If this isn't suitable for your needs, you may
disable channel preview. When channel previews are disabled, the touch screen shows the following image:
While preview is disabled, if system status or settings and configuration preset changes
are permitted, you can touch the screen anywhere to open the settings page.
To hide (or show) the channel previews on the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
95
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable (or enable) system status on the touch screen
3. Uncheck Show preview to disable channel previews (or check the box to enable previews).
4. Click Apply.
Disable (or enable) system status on the touch screen
Once you've configured, Pearl-2 it's possible you may no longer wish to show the system status screen on the
touch screen. .
To hide (or show) system information on the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Show system status to prevent the system status screen from being accessible on the
touch screen (or check the box to enable system information).
96
Pearl-2 User Guide
Block (or allow) configuration functions from the touch
screen
4. Click Apply.
Block (or allow) configuration functions from the touch screen
By default, Pearl-2 permits applying configuration presets and configuring network settings via the touch
screen. You can disable this ability.
If configuration is blocked and system status is permitted, touch screen users see an i icon instead
of the configuration gears icon in the lower right corner of the touch screen.
To block (or allow) the channel previews on the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Allow settings and configuration preset changes to disable configuration from the
touch screen (or check the box to enable configuration).
4. Click Apply.
Block (or allow) recording, streaming and switching from the touch
screen
By default, Pearl-2 permits recording, streaming and live switching control for individual channels. You can
disable this control to prevent unwanted interruptions in streaming, gaps in recordings or to stop users from
switching the layout used.
Channel preview must be on for recording, streaming and live switching control to work.
97
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set touch screen timeout
To block (or allow) the recording, streaming and live mixing / switching control via the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Allow start/stop recording and streaming to disable recording, streaming and live
switching control from the touch screen (or check the box to enable control).
4. Click Apply.
Set touch screen timeout
Initially, the touch screen is always on for easy monitoring. However, if you'd like, you can modify its
configuration to cause it to shut off after a given amount of time. To re-enable it after timeout, simply touch
anywhere on the screen.
To set a timeout for the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
98
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure touch screen PIN security code
3. Enter a value in the Timeout field. The value is in seconds. Use 0 to keep the screen on whenever the
system is on.
4. Click Apply.
Configure touch screen PIN security code
You can configure a 4-digit PIN code to protect your Pearl-2's touch screen from unauthorized access. By
default, the PIN is not set.
If a PIN is configured, the user is prompted to enter the code in the following scenarios:
l When Pearl-2 is powered on, or restarts,
l When Pearl-2 recovers from timeout mode (see Set touch screen timeout).
To configure a 4-digit PIN code:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu; the touch screen configuration page opens.
99
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure touch screen PIN security code
3. Enter your desired 4-digit PIN code in the PIN field
4. Click Apply to set your PIN.
100
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information
View system information
The system information page provides a great deal of useful information about your Pearl-2. Use the Info link
from the Configuration menu to view your current firmware level, system hardware version (if available) and
currently configured channels.
To view system information:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. From the Admin panel scroll to the Configuration menu option.
3. Click Info; the system information page opens.
3. Use the information displayed to get an overview of your system, troubleshoot problems or view
streams for configured channels.
101
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Feature add-ons
Pearl-2 hardware provides many useful new features and with more to come. A base model of Pearl-2 that
has similar functionality to Pearl and feature add-ons for extra functionality.
For an overview of add-ons, see:
l Add-ons overview
This section also covers the following related topics:
l Checking availability of add-ons
l Current list of add-ons
l Activate purchased add-ons
l Purchase and install add-ons
Throughout the manual, there is information that applies only when your system has the 4K
feature add-on, as indicated with this symbol: 4K . Wherever that symbol appears, it denotes that
the feature is available only if you have activated the 4K feature add-on for your Pearl-2.
Add-ons overview
Pearl-2 add-ons are found in the under the Firmware upgrade page in the Pearl-2 Admin panel.
The Feature add-ons section allows for several different functions.
102
Pearl-2 User Guide
Shop now
Shop now
The Shop now button leads to the epiphan.com add-ons store page, where you are able to select and
purchase any available add-on.
Install purchased add-ons
The Install purchased add-ons button searches for all purchased add-ons and begins the Activate
purchased add-ons installation process for each of them. Since rebooting the system is necessary for the
feature activation to occur, the Install purchased add-ons button gives you the option of restarting the
system immediately, or later.
List of features
The Current list of add-ons includes the name of each feature and a detailed description of the capability
gained by activating that feature.
103
Pearl-2 User Guide
Purchase button
Purchase button
The Purchase button next to a feature leads to the epiphan.com purchase page for that feature. The button
remains next to the feature, even after the feature is purchased, until the feature is activated.
Activation indicator
After a feature is purchased and installed, and the system is rebooted, the Activated indicator appears next to
the feature description. This indicates that the feature is active, and you are able to use all the functionality
described under that feature.
104
Pearl-2 User Guide
Checking availability of add-ons
Checking availability of add-ons
It is important to discover quickly and easily which add-ons on your Pearl-2 system are available for purchase,
activation or use.
Available for purchase
You can discover which add-ons are available for purchase by using this process:
1. Navigate to the Firmware upgrade page.
2. Look at all the current possible add-ons are listed on this page under Feature add-ons.
3. Any feature available for you to purchase has a button next to it that reads Purchase.
4. In order to purchase and activate the feature, follow the instructions at Purchase and install add-ons.
5. Even if you have already purchased a feature, the Purchase button remains next to the feature. To
determine if a feature with a Purchase button next to it has already been purchased, use the Install
purchased add-ons button.
105
Pearl-2 User Guide
Available for installation and activation
6. If there are available add-ons, that have already been purchased, they begin the installation and
activation process, detailed at Activate purchased add-ons.
7. If there are no available add-ons, the message box informs you. This indicates that all features with a
purchase button are available for purchase.
8. In order to purchase and activate the feature, follow the instructions at Purchase and install add-ons.
Available for installation and activation
You can discover which add-ons are available for installation and activation by using this process:
1. Navigate to the Firmware upgrade page.
2. Look at all the current possible add-ons listed on this page under Feature add-ons.
3. Even if you have already purchased a feature, the Purchase button remains next to the feature. Check
if you have any add-on available to install using the Install purchased add-ons button.
106
Pearl-2 User Guide
Available for use
4. If there are available add-ons, they begin the installation and activation process, detailed at Activate
purchased add-ons.
5. If there are no available add-ons, the message box informs you.
6. In order to purchase and activate a desired feature, follow the instructions at Purchase and install addons.
Available for use
You can discover which add-ons are available for use through this process:
1. Navigate to the Firmware upgrade page.
2. Look at all the current possible add-ons listed on this page under Feature add-ons.
107
Pearl-2 User Guide
Current list of add-ons
3. Any feature available for you to use has text next to it that reads Activated.
4. When this indicator appears, you can use all the abilities of that feature. You can learn what those are
by looking at our Current list of add-ons.
Current list of add-ons
This section lists all add-ons currently available for Pearl-2. As of firmware 4.0.1, there is only one available,
the 4K feature add-on.
4K feature add-on
The first add-on to be released is the 4K feature add-on.
The base version of the firmware gives you access to:
l Six simultaneous HD video inputs (4 x HDMI and 2 x 3G-SDI)
l 6 x 1080p 30 fps encoding (or equivalent)
l XLR and RCA audio inputs with built-in attenuation
The 4K feature add-on gives you access to all of those features, and in addition, provides:
l 4 x 4K video inputs (2 x 4K HDMI and 2 X 4K SDI)
l 4 x 4K hardware scaling (4K down to full HD)
l 2 x 4K video outputs (HDMI)
l 1 x 4K video encoding
If you have the base version of the firmware, you are able to upgrade your system at any time with the 4K
feature add-on through an online firmware add-on, which will update your Pearl-2 with all the 4K features.
108
Pearl-2 User Guide
Activate purchased add-ons
You can find more details on the add-on, along with installation instructions and the add-on itself, at
www.epiphan.com/add-ons.
Activating your 4K add-on might not be necessary, depending on the version of Pearl-2 you
purchased. As the first Feature Add-on, the 4K add-on was included automatically in some
systems. If you purchased the full version of Pearl-2 or an early copy with firmware 4.0.0, the 4K
add-on was included with your purchase and is automatically activated, so in those cases no
action is required.
Activate purchased add-ons
Pearl-2 add-ons must be purchased, installed and activated before their features can be used. If you have
already purchased an add-on either on our site at epiphan.com/add-ons or by purchasing the full version of
Pearl-2, follow these instructions to start using your add-on feature. If you have not purchased an add-on
that you wish to install, you may follow the process at Purchase and install add-ons.
1. Navigate to the Firmware upgrade page to start the process.
2. Under Feature add-ons, click the button Install purchased add-ons.
If you have multiple add-ons available to install, this button applies to all of them simultaneously.
3. After clicking on Install purchased add-ons, a message box appears. Click OK to install the add-on,
and automatically restart Pearl-2. When Pearl-2 reboots, the Add-on feature is activated.
109
Pearl-2 User Guide
Activate purchased add-ons
If you click Cancel in the message box, Pearl-2 installs the add-on, but does not reboot. The add-on is
not activated until Pearl-2 is rebooted. You can reboot normally, or by using the button in the red box
that appears at the top-left of the page.
4. After you have installed and rebooted your system, you can confirm that the process worked by
returning to the Firmware Upgrade page. All activated features indicate that they are activated next to
their name.
110
Pearl-2 User Guide
Purchase and install add-ons
If you click Cancel in the message box, Pearl-2 installs the add-on, but does not reboot. The add-on is
not activated until Pearl-2 is rebooted. You can reboot normally, or by using the button in the red box
that appears at the top-left of the page.
Purchase and install add-ons
Pearl-2 add-ons must be purchased, installed and activated before their features can be used. If you have
already purchased an add-on either on our site at epiphan.com/add-ons or by purchasing the full version of
Pearl-2, follow instructions at Activate purchased add-ons to start using your add-on feature. If you have not
purchased an add-on that you wish to install, follow the process outlined below.
1. Navigate to the Firmware upgrade page to start the process.
2. To select an add-on to purchase, you can navigate directly to the Epiphan site at epiphan.com/add-ons,
or use the Shop now button on the Pearl-2 Admin panel under the Feature add-ons section.
111
Pearl-2 User Guide
Purchase and install add-ons
Alternatively, you can use the Purchase button next to a specific add-on. This directs you to that
feature's purchase page on the epiphan.com site. Note that for Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin, you only
purchase one instance of the add-on, but you are required to complete the activation process for each
system in the Pearl Rackmount Twin.
3. Once you have purchased the Add-on, you must install and activate it before you can use its
functionality. Use the button at the top, Install purchased add-ons, to start the installation and
activation process.
If you have multiple add-ons to install, this button applies to all of them simultaneously.
4. After clicking on Install purchased add-ons, a message box appears. Click OK to install the add-on,
and automatically restart Pearl-2. When Pearl-2 reboots, the Add-on feature is activated.
112
Pearl-2 User Guide
Purchase and install add-ons
If you click Cancel in the message box, Pearl-2 installs the add-on, but does not reboot. The add-on is
not activated until Pearl-2 is rebooted. You can reboot normally, or by using the button in the red box
that appears at the top-left of the page.
5. After you have installed and rebooted your system, you can confirm that the process worked by
returning to the Firmware Upgrade page. All activated features indicate that they are activated next to
their name.
113
Pearl-2 User Guide
Purchase and install add-ons
If you have multiple add-ons available to install, this button applies to all of them simultaneously.
114
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure network settings
Configure network settings
By default Pearl-2 uses DHCP to obtain an IP Address via an Ethernet-based network. If you want to change
the network settings, or if you’re having network-related issues, this section covers the network-related topics.
l Verify IP Address and MAC address via the touch screen
l Verify IP address and MAC address via the Admin panel
l Configure a static IP address
l Configure DHCP
l Tether to a mobile network
l Network ports used by Pearl-2
l Perform network diagnostics
Verify IP Address and MAC address via the touch screen
Pearl-2's touch screen interface, if enabled, can quickly and easily show you the system's IP Address and
MAC address.
To show system information on the touch screen:
1. If the system settings button (gears) does not appear on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the
control buttons (from the "no channels" or "preview disabled" screen, this will go directly to the system
settings screen).
2. If the system settings button (gears) is still not visible and an i icon is visible instead, configuration by
touch screen is disabled in the system's settings. See Configure the touch screen to enable.
3. Touch the system settings button (gears) on the screen; the system settings screen appears.
115
Pearl-2 User Guide
Verify IP address and MAC address via the Admin panel
4. Touch System Status to see the system information page.
To close the system information screen:
1. Touch Back to return to the Systems Settings screen or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
Verify IP address and MAC address via the Admin panel
The Admin panel shows you the system’s MAC address and current IP Address via the Network configuration
page.
116
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure DHCP
To view settings on network configuration page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Network link in the Configuration menu; the network configuration page opens.
3. Note the MAC address and Current IP address listed at the top of the page.
Table 22 Network Information Fields
Label
Description/Options
A media access control address (MAC address) is a unique identifier for the
MAC Address
network interface. The value is read-only and cannot be changed. You may need
to share this value with your system administrator.
Reflects the current internet protocol address (IP address) of the system. This
Current IP Address
value is either obtained from the DHCP server (if using DHCP) or is the configured
static IP address. Pearl-2 supports IPv4 addresses. It does not support IPv6
addresses.
Configure DHCP
Occasionally, such as when moving your system to a new network, your Pearl-2 must switch from static IP
address allocation to dynamic allocation via DHCP. You can accomplish this in four ways:
l Restore factory settings, clearing all your custom settings. See Perform factory reset.
l Load a configuration preset file that uses DHCP networking. See Apply a configuration preset from the
Admin panel orApply a configuration preset using the touch screen.
l Change the network settings. See the procedure below.
For quick and easy setup of Pearl-2, you can configure network settings via the Admin panel or via touch
screen.
Using the touch screen, you can choose to apply a configuration preset that uses DHCP (see Configuration
presets).
117
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure DHCP
To configure network settings via the touch screen:
1. If the system settings button (gears) does not appear on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the
control buttons (from the "no channels" or "preview disabled" screen, this will go directly to the system
settings screen).
2. If the system settings button (gears) is still not visible and an i icon is visible instead, configuration by
touch screen is disabled in the system's settings. See Configure the touch screen to enable.
3. Touch the system settings button (gears) on the screen; the system settings screen appears.
4. Touch Network; the Network settings page appears. The currently enabled type of network setting
(DHCP or static) is highlighted green.
5. If not already using DHCP, touch DHCP to enable DHCP.
6. If DHCP was not the active network type, a confirmation message is displayed.
7. Touch OK; DHCP is enabled.
To configure use of DHCP for networking:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Network link in the Configuration menu; the network configuration page opens.
3. Select the radio button use DHCP, if not already selected.
4. Change the MTU Size value only if needed. See the table below for information on maximum
transmission unit (MTU) values.
5. Click Apply to save the changes; the changes are saved and a message appears asking you to reboot.
118
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
6. Select the Maintenance link under the Configuration menu; the maintenance page appears.
7. Click the Reboot Now button near the bottom of the page.
8. Wait for the system to reboot.
9. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
10. Log as admin and reload the Networking page to verify all changes were applied.
The following table describes the fields applicable when configuring DHCP on Pearl-2.
Table 23 DHCP Fields
Label
Description/Options
Use DHCP
Select this radio button to dynamically obtain an IP address at boot up.
Use static
address
Select this radio button to use the configured static IP address.
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) specifies the maximum packet size for transfer on
MTU Size
the network. The default value is 1500, which is the largest value allowed by Ethernet at
the network layer. It’s best if all nodes in your network use the same value, so only change
this value if you know other nodes use a different value.
Configure a static IP address
Your network administrator may require you to use a static IP address for your Pearl-2.
For quick and easy setup of Pearl-2, you can configure network settings via the Admin panel or via touch
screen.
Using the touch screen, you can choose to apply a configuration presets that contains a static network IP (see
Configuration presets).
To configure network settings via the touch screen:
1. If the system settings button (gears) does not appear on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the
control buttons (from the "no channels" or "preview disabled" screen, this will go directly to the system
settings screen).
119
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
2. If the system settings button (gears) is still not visible and an i icon is visible instead, configuration by
touch screen is disabled in the system's settings. See Configure the touch screen to enable.
3. Touch the system settings button (gears) on the screen; the system settings screen appears.
4. Touch Network ; the network settings page appears. The currently enabled type of network setting
(DHCP or static) is highlighted green.
5. Touch Static IP Address to configure a static IP address; the static IP configuration page appears.
6. Touch an IP Address section (e.g. 192) and type a new value using the keypad.
7. Repeat for all fields in the IP Address and Network Mask.
Only IPv4 addresses are supported.
8. Enter the Default Gateway address. If you do not have a default gateway for your network, enter the
same static IP address as in the previous step.
120
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
The default gateway cannot be left blank. If no default gateway is specified, unexpected
behavior occurs.
9. Enter the DNS Server address. If you do not have a DNS server, enter the new static IP address of the
system.
10. Touch Apply to apply the changes.
To configure a static IP address via the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Network link in the Configuration menu; the network configuration page opens.
3. Select the radio button use static address, if not already selected.
4. Enter the desired IP Address and Network Mask.
Only IPv4 addresses are supported.
5. Enter the Default Gateway address. If you do not have a default gateway for your network, enter the
same static IP address as in the previous step.
The default gateway cannot be left blank. If no default gateway is specified, unexpected
behavior occurs.
6. Enter the DNS Server address. If you do not have a DNS server, enter the new static IP address of the
system.
121
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
7. Change the MTU Size value only if needed. See the table below for information on maximum
transmission unit (MTU) values.
8. Click Apply to save the changes; the changes are saved and a message appears asking you to reboot.
9. Select the Maintenance link under the Configuration menu; the maintenance page appears.
10. Click the Reboot Now button near the bottom of the page.
11. Wait for the system to reboot.
12. Open the Admin panel using the new IP address.
13. Log as admin and reload the Networking page to verify all changes were applied.
The following table describes applicable fields when setting a static IP address.
Table 24 Static IP Address Fields
Label
Description/Options
Use DHCP
Select this radio button to dynamically obtain an IP address at boot up.
Use static address
Select this radio button to use the configured static IP address.
The internet protocol address (IP Address) to assign. This value is may be obtained
IP Address
from your system administrator. Pearl-2 supports IPv4 addresses. It does not
support IPv6 addresses.
Also called the subnet mask, this value denotes a range of IP addresses. This value
Network Mask
may be obtained from your system administrator, determined from another
computer on the same subnet, or calculated using an online subnet calculator.
The network node that serves as an access point to the rest of the network. This value
Default Gateway
cannot be blank unless you are using DCHP. Specify the system’s IP address if you
don’t have a default gateway on your network.
The domain name system server (DNS server) translates human-readable hostnames
DNS Server
into corresponding IP addresses. Specify the system’s IP address if you don’t have a
DNS server on your network. This value cannot be blank unless you are using DHCP.
MTU Size
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) specifies the maximum packet size for
transfer on the network. The default value is 1500, which is the largest value allowed
122
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
Tether to a mobile network
Description/Options
by Ethernet at the network layer. It’s best if all nodes in your network use the same
value, so only change this value if you know other nodes use a different value.
Tether to a mobile network
Pearl-2 supports tethering to a mobile device via USB. Tethered networking can work side-by-side with
Ethernet routing and either networking system can be a back-up for the other.
When the system falls over to the backup network type (i.e. from Ethernet to mobile, or vice
versa) all streaming sessions with clients or servers directly connected to the system are closed
and the clients will need to reconnect. You may need to provide a new stream URL (containing the
new IP address) to your viewers. See the channel information page to get the new stream URL.
By contrast, actively published streams are closed and reconnected via the secondary network
(mobile or Ethernet) automatically, permitted the required publishing server is accessible from the
new network.
To configure tethering to a mobile network:
1. Configure the mobile device to allow tethering via USB.
2. Connect the mobile device to Pearl-2 with a USB cable.
3. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
4. Select the Network link in the Configuration menu; the network configuration page opens.
5. Click the drop-down box next to Use phone/tablet connection in the USB phone/tablet section; the
following choices appear:
Table 25 Mobile Tethering Options
Label
Description/Options
Disabled
Specifies that no USB tethering is permitted.
No tethering
Specifies that USB tethering is available for connecting a mobile device as a
configuration utility (i.e. using the web browser), but no mobile data is used.
When chosen, the system tries to use the Ethernet network first. It switches to use
Prefer ethernet
the mobile network (tethering) when the Ethernet network is no longer available.
To prevent viewer interruptions, mobile data will continue to be used until the
mobile network is down or publishing is restarted.
123
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
Network ports used by Pearl-2
Description/Options
When chosen, the system tries to use the mobile network (tethering) first. It
switches to use Ethernet (hard-wired) when the mobile network is no longer
Prefer
available. To prevent viewer interruptions, Ethernet data will continue to be used
tethering
until the Ethernet network is down or publishing is restarted.
Select this setting if you only have a mobile network.
6. Select your choice based on the table above.
7. Click Apply.
Network ports used by Pearl-2
The following is a list of incoming network ports used by your Pearl-2 system. Depending on the services you
are using, you will need to make sure your firewall permits traffic over the relevant ports.
The port numbers listed below are the default faults for these services. In many cases, you can
use the Admin panel to change the port used for this service.
Port (or range)
Protocol
Description
21
TCP
FTP server, if enabled. See Local FTP server.
22
TCP
SSH for remote support. See Configure remote support.
80
TCP
123
TCP/UDP
319 and 320
UDP
443
TCP
HTTP for the Admin panel, HLS streaming if enabled. See Stream content
using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming).
NTP server, if enabled. See Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and
RDATE).
PTP server, if enabled. See Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and
RDATE).
HTTPS for the Admin panel, HLS streaming if enabled.
For RTSP/TCP and RTSP/HTTP streaming on your network (where x is the
number of channels configured). The number of ports used depends on
554 to 554+(x-1)
TCP
how many channels you have with RTSP streaming enabled. See Stream
content using HTTP or RTSP. (Note that client video players choose
whether they are using RTSP/TCP, RTSP/HTTP or RTSP/UDP).
124
Pearl-2 User Guide
Port (or range)
Perform network diagnostics
Protocol
Description
Ports 554 and 555 are also used for internal communications. If
streaming is disabled, these ports remain open but refuse all external
connection requests.
If the client video player chooses RTSP/UDP, it will negotiate 4 random
Random in range
32768 - 61000
UDP
UDP ports (two for audio and two for video). The port range is dependent
on the OS of the client video player and can change with updates to that
OS.
1900
Random in range
50000 to 65000
5353
UDP
UPnP server (for UPnP discovery), if enabled. See Stream content using
UPnP.
UPnP media server, if enabled. Each time the UPnP server is started, a
TCP
random TCP port in this range is used to enable connections with other
UPnP devices.
UDP
For multicast DNS discovery. Connect via DNS-based service discovery.
For Flash and MPEG-TS streaming on your network (where x is the
number of channels configured). The number of ports used depends on
how many channels you have with streaming enabled. See Stream
8000 to 8000+(x-1) TCP
content using HTTP or RTSP.
Ports 8000 and 8001 are also used for internal communications. If
streaming is disabled, these ports remain open but refuse all external
connection requests.
In addition to the ports listed above, there are also outgoing connections as follows:
l for publishing (Stream to a server) - actual ports used is dependant on the server and protocol
l for File and recording transfer - actual ports used is dependant on your configuration
l remote support (when in use) - port 30 see Configure remote support
l firmware update (checks and downloads) - port 80
Perform network diagnostics
If your Pearl-2 has network trouble, you can perform basic network troubleshooting tasks from the Network
configuration page. In addition to providing the system’s IP address and MAC address to your network
administrator, you can also ping an IP address or use traceroute to determine the path taken to an address.
125
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform network diagnostics
Not all networks support ping and traceroute.
To ping or traceroute an IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Network link in the Configuration menu; the network configuration page opens.
3. Enter your IP address into the Address field.
4. Click ping or traceroute; an animation appears to the left of the address to indicate processing is
underway.
5. Upon completion of the command, read the results from the console-like display is shown below the
Network Diagnostics setting.
126
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform network diagnostics
127
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration presets
Configuration presets
Configuration presets are the perfect solution for backing up your system configuration, for situations where
you have changing configuration requirements for your Pearl-2 or when you are managing a number of
systems and you want them to have similar configurations.
For an overview of configuration presets, see:
l Configuration presets overview
This section also covers the following related topics:
l Configuration groups
l Create a configuration preset
l Export and import configuration presets
l Apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel
l Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
l Apply the Factory default configuration preset
l Update a configuration preset
l Delete a configuration preset
There are also some very important configuration preset considerations to review:
l Configuration preset considerations
Configuration presets overview
Configuration presets make it easy to manage a group of Pearl-2 systems or to use your Pearl-2 in a variety of
situations without needing to reconfigure it.
Configuration presets divide the system's settings into the following configuration groups. (For a complete list
of what is included in each group see Configuration presets overview.)
System
Sources
Automatic file uploads
Network
Channels
EDID
128
Pearl-2 User Guide
Output ports
Configuration presets in action
Touch screen
Using the Configuration presets section of the Maintenance page, you can create and save configuration
presets using any number and combination of the configuration groups. Mix and match the settings groups
saved together to create sets of configuration settings needed for each situation. You also always have a
special Factory default configuration preset (which cannot be erased) to help you return to factory
configuration without destructively erasing files saved to the system hard drive (see Configuration presets
overview
When you are satisfied with the set of configuration items, you can save it, apply it again at a later date and
even download it, then log into another Pearl-2 system and apply it there. You can also apply already
uploaded configuration presets through the touch screen.
It's important to note that configuration presets are applied over existing settings. They affect only the
settings groups included in the preset; all other settings are unaffected. Read the Configuration presets
overview section carefully to understand caveats around using configuration presets.
Configuration presets in action
Here's an example of how configuration presets can make it easy to manage a fleet of systems.
Imagine a company is hired to do the following tasks at a big conference:
l Stream and record each conference session with a picture in picture layout that includes identifying
information about the presenter in the metadata and the background image for the stream.
l Stream and record the keynote with pre-show content, post-show content and live switching between a
number of different layouts during the show.
l Automatically upload backups of the keynote and session recordings.
The company will meet these goals with a fleet of Pearl-2 systems.
Before the show, they upload the required backgrounds and create channel configuration presets for the
keynote and each conference track. Each of these is saved as a named preset (for example Keynote, Session 1,
Session 2) with all the pieces needed for that session, including the background image(s), metadata, streaming
settings, etc.
They also create network and automatic file upload (AFU) presets for each of the home and remote locations.
Once at the conference, they upload these configuration files to the fleet of systems and apply the network
and AFU preset. Before each conference session they need only apply the appropriate preset to configure the
system correctly for the session. Note that once the presets are loaded on the system you can apply them via
the touch screen!
129
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration presets in action
Channel configuration includes background and other image files used. If these files aren't
present when the configuration preset is saved, the save function will fail. Be careful when
deleting background images and logo files.
Let's take a closer look at the types of presets they make:
Internal network and AFU preset
The company uses this preset when configuring and testing from their corporate network. It uses a static IP
address on their corporate network and AFU that uses ftp to upload to a local ftp server.
The internal network
is comprised of the
preset
internal network settings
and ftp settings on the
internal network.
Conference network and AFU preset
The company applies this preset to Pearl-2 systems when they arrive at the conference. It changes only the
network and AFU settings (using a conference-specific IP address and secure file transfer to an ftp server).
When applying this configuration preset, all other information including passwords, date/time, channels and
source configurations, remains the same.
The conference network
is comprised of the
and an ftp address on the
conference IP address
conference network.
preset
130
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration groups
Conference breakout session and keynote presets
The company creates one preset per session and one for the keynote. Each preset includes all the files and
everything needed to recreate a custom channel configured with the layouts and backgrounds needed for the
session.
They upload these presets at the beginning of the conference and apply the correct one prior to each
conference session starting. When they apply the preset, all other preset groups remain unchanged; the
preset only affects the channel(s) and their configuration. This preset includes a channel the background file
and has metadata specifying the speaker's name.
has the presenter data
and background image for
Session 1 preset
session 1.
has the presenter data
and background image for
Session 2 preset
session 2.
Note that after applying a preset, files from the previous session remain present on the system and continue
to upload via sftp (if not yet complete), but the channels reflect the newly loaded session's background file
name and presenter name.
Summary
Configuration presets are a versatile tool to help you use Pearl-2 in a variety of conditions. Try it yourself and
see!
Configuration groups
The following table describes what settings are saved with each configuration group.
131
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration groups
Table 26 Configuration group definitions
Group Name Symbol
Settings included in the configuration group
Date and time settings, serial port settings, remote support settings, custom
System
disk check schedule, access passwords, deny/allow lists and LDAP configuration
settings.
Network
Sources
Network settings and tethering configuration.
All audio and video source configuration settings (including no signal images)
except EDID settings, which are in their own group.
All channel configuration data and current recording state, all layouts, images
Channels
used in layouts, streaming state, all recorder configuration data and current
recording state, individual and global UPnP settings.
AFU
EDID
Automatic file upload type and parameters, including SCP/SFTP identity (stored
in an encrypted form).
EDID settings for sources. (Applying configuration presets with this group
automatically applies the included EDIDs. This process can take a while.)
Output ports
All configuration settings for the output ports.
Touch screen
Permitted touch screen use settings.
Note that SFTP/SCP private keys are included (in encrypted format) in the automatic file upload
preset.
132
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a configuration preset
Create a configuration preset
You can create as many configuration presets as you need, however there is a limit to the amount of space
you have for configuration presets (256 MB). For each configuration preset you create, you get to name the
preset and choose the groups of setting types to include. See Configuration groups for more information
about the groups of configuration items.
It's good practice, after completing configuration of your Pearl-2, to save a full backup (with all groups
selected) so you may restore it at a later date (i.e. after a change that wasn’t wanted or after a factory reset).
Note that configuration presets that include network or system settings require a system
reboot when applied.
To create a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Configuration presets section.
4. Type a description for your preset in the Name field.
5. Ensure only the desired configuration groups are selected from the Sections group. (For full system
backup, select all groups.)
6. Click Save; your configuration preset appears in the list.
133
Pearl-2 User Guide
Export and import configuration presets
If you try to save a configuration preset but one or more of the related image files is missing,
you'll see an error. You'll be unable to save the preset until the missing files are restored or the
layouts referencing the files are changed to remove the references.
If you try to save a configuration preset but there isn't enough space, you'll see an error
message. You'll need to delete some presets before proceeding.
There is a maximum amount of 256 MB available to save configuration presets and a maximum
size of 128 MB for a single configuration preset.
Export and import configuration presets
After creating your configuration presets (see Create a configuration preset), you can download the file to
your local computer. You can then choose to upload and apply this preset to other Pearl-2 systems or you can
store the preset as an offline backup of your current configuration.
Either way, it is a simple two-step process to download the preset from one system and upload it to another.
Uploading a preset does not apply immediately. You must still apply the preset using Apply a
configuration preset using the touch screen or Apply a configuration preset using the
touch screen.
Download a configuration preset
To download or export a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Configuration presets section.
4. Click the Download button next to the configuration preset you wish to export.
134
Pearl-2 User Guide
Import a configuration preset
5. The configuration preset file (with extension .preset) is saved to your admin workstation (in your
browser's download folder).
Import a configuration preset
To import a configuration a preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Import configuration preset section.
4. Click the Choose file button; a file picker window opens.
5. Select the file you wish to upload (with the extension .preset) and click OK.
6. Click Import.
7. If your system already has a configuration preset with the same name as the one you're loading, a
warning is shown. Choose OK to overwrite the existing preset or Cancel to cancel the upload.
135
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel
8. If the process is not canceled, the configuration preset file is uploaded (but not applied).
9. If desired, apply the configuration preset. See Apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel or
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen.
Apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel
When you apply a configuration preset, the system settings for all included configuration groups are updated.
Other settings on the system are not affected. For example if you apply a preset that includes the
configuration groups channels and automatic file upload, your network settings, passwords, time server,
source configurations, etc are not modified. Similarly, if you apply a configuration preset that has only
network settings included, only the network settings change.
If you apply a preset that has the network or system configuration group, a reboot is required. If you apply
a preset that has the EDID configuration group, the system may appear unresponsive for a short time while it
applies these EDIDs to the video grabbers.
You can verify which configuration groups are included in a preset by looking at the list to the right of the
configuration preset name. The term 'all' means all groups are included. Otherwise groups are listed
individually.
You may apply multiple presets one after another. If you apply two (or more) configuration
presets that include a particular configuration group, the settings (for that group) from the last
applied preset are the active settings. In short, last in wins.
To apply a configuration preset from the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Configuration presets section.
4. Click the Apply button next to the configuration preset you wish to apply.
136
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
5. The system asks for confirmation before proceeding.
If the configuration preset includes the network or system configuration groups, a
reboot is necessary.
6. Click OK to apply the configuration preset; the configuration preset is applied.
7. The system reboots if needed.
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
You can use Pearl-2's touch screen to apply configuration presets.
137
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
For configuration presets that only contain the network configuration group you can use either of the two
methods described below. For all other configuration presets, use the first method.
If you apply a preset that has the EDID configuration group, the system may appear unresponsive for a short
time while it applies these EDIDs to the video grabbers.
To apply a configuration preset via the touch screen:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on or to turn on the screen overlay.
2. If the system settings button (gear) is still not visible and an i icon is visible instead, configuration by
touch screen is disabled in the system's settings. See Configure the touch screen to enable.
3. Touch the gear icon at the bottom right of the screen; the settings page appears.
4. Touch Configuration Presets; an alphabetically sorted list of saved presets is presented (Factory
default is always listed first). Each preset shows the included preset configuration groups via a list of
icons to the right of the preset name.
5. If necessary touch the arrows at the bottom of the page to navigate to the desired preset.
138
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
6. Touch the name of the preset you wish to apply.
7. A confirmation message is displayed.
If the configuration preset includes the network or system configuration groups, a
reboot is necessary.
8. Click OK to apply the preset; the configuration preset is applied.
9. The system reboots, if required.
To apply a configuration preset that contains only the network configuration group you may use this process:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on or to turn on the screen overlay.
2. Touch the gear icon at the bottom right of the screen; the settings page appears.
139
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
3. Touch the Network line; the network configuration page opens.
4. Touch Network Presets; a list of saved configuration settings with only Network settings opens.
5. Touch the name of the preset you wish to apply; a confirmation message is displayed.
140
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply the Factory default configuration preset
6. Click OK to apply the network configuration preset and reboot the system.
Apply the Factory default configuration preset
Your Pearl-2 comes with a special factory default configuration preset. This configuration preset cannot be
erased and is always presented at the top of the configuration presets list. It contains all six possible
configuration settings groups.
Using the Factory default configuration setting is similar to using the Factory reset method (see Perform
factory reset) with a few important differences.
In short, the Factory default configuration preset is less destructive than Factory reset. This table
describes the exact differences.
Table 27 Factory default configuration preset vs Factory reset
Deletes all created channels
Factory default
configuration preset
ü
ü
ü
Deletes all recorded files in channels
Deletes all created recorders
Factory reset function
ü
ü
ü
Deletes all recorded files in recorders
Resets network configuration
ü
ü
Resets touch screen configuration
ü
ü
Resets user passwords
ü
ü
Deletes all created configuration presets
ü
141
Pearl-2 User Guide
Update a configuration preset
Factory default
configuration preset
Factory reset function
ü
Deletes all branding files
Resets all Source settings
ü
ü
Resets EDID to factory
ü
ü
Deletes all SCP/SFTP identities
ü
ü
Deletes all LDAP settings
ü
ü
Deletes all Automatic file upload settings
ü
ü
To apply the factory default configuration preset, follow the instructions in Apply the Factory default
configuration preset or Apply the Factory default configuration preset and select the Factory default preset.
A reboot is required.
Update a configuration preset
If you need to update a configuration preset to include different configuration groups, or simply new settings
for the same groups, you can do so easily via the Admin panel.
To update a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Configuration presets section.
142
Pearl-2 User Guide
Update a configuration preset
4. Find the preset you wish to change from the presets list.
5. Copy the name of the preset into the Name field.
6. Selected the desired configuration group(s) from the Sections group.
7. Click Save; a confirmation dialog asks you to confirm you want to overwrite the configuration preset.
8. Click OK; your configuration preset is updated in the list.
143
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a configuration preset
Delete a configuration preset
You may want to trim the list of configuration presets to only those that are needed for your ongoing needs.
You can delete all configuration presets at once by doing a factory reset, or you can delete individual
configuration presets from the Maintenance page.
To delete a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Scroll to the Configuration presets section.
4. Click the Delete button for the configuration preset; a confirmation message appears.
144
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration preset considerations
5. Click OK to confirm you want to delete the preset; the preset is deleted.
Configuration preset considerations
Configuration presets are groups of settings applied to the system, leaving other settings intact. The following
considerations will help you get the most from your configuration presets.
Channel and recorder index number behavior
Each channel and recorder has an index number. The first channel created on a system is channel 1,
subsequently channel 2, 3, 4, etc. Recorders are also created starting at index 1 with numbers incrementing as
new recorders are created. The channel (or recorder) index number is found to the left of the channel or
recorder name in the Admin panel:
Configuration presets that contain the channels configuration group specify the channels in the preset by
their index number. This means if you have channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 when you save your preset, applying that
preset will overwrite the configuration of your current channels with indexes 1, 2, 3 and 4. If prior to applying
that preset you also had channels with indexes 5 and 6, the configuration settings for those two channels are
erased when the preset is applied (because the preset only has 4 channels).
There are three areas where channel (and recorder) index numbers affect what happens when applying
configuration presets. Read Recording and streaming statesRecorded files (in channels and recorders) and
Deleting channels for more information.
145
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recording and streaming states
Recording and streaming states
The Configuration groups section of this chapter shows that each channel and recorder's recording and
streaming state is included in the channels configuration group. This means that if a channel is streaming or
a channel (or recorder) is recording at the time you create a configuration preset, it will immediately start
recording (or streaming) when you apply that preset. Similarly, if a configuration preset is saved when
channels or recorders are not recording (or streaming), those channels and recorders will not be recording
(streaming) when the preset is applied
This means a channel or recorder may stop recording or streaming as a result of applying the
preset.
For example, when applying a preset with channel 3 set to record (the same example applies for streaming):
l If channel 3 exists prior to applying the preset and is already recording, the file will continue recording
uninterrupted unless the recording file type is different in the preset (in which case a new file is started).
l If channel 3 exists prior to applying the preset and is not already recording, it immediately begins
recording.
l If no channel with index 3 exists prior to applying the preset, the channel is created and it immediately
begins recording.
Recorded files (in channels and recorders)
Channels and recorders keep a list of files recorded in their Recordings section of the Admin panel. These
files remain on the system even if the channel or recorder configuration is changed or removed as a result of
applying a configuration preset.
For example, prior to applying your configuration preset, you have channels with indexes 1, 2 and 3; each of
these has five recording files. When you apply a configuration preset that has channels with index 1 and 2
only, you'll notice those channels each still have the same 5 recording files. Channel with index 3 is no longer
present, but the files are not lost!
Overwritten channel files are still available. To access and download/delete these recorded files, enter the
following into the address bar: http://<deviceIP>/admin/channelN/archive or
http://<deviceIP>/admin/recorderN/archive, where N is the index of the removed channel/recorder.
For example, if a Channel with index 3 is no longer present, its corresponding files can be accessed by
entering the following into the address bar:
l http://192.168.0.183/admin/channel3/archive
146
Pearl-2 User Guide
Deleting channels
If you now create a new channel with index 3 (or load a preset that contains a channel with index 3), you'll find
it starts with five recorded files in the Recordings section. These are the same recorded files that existed at
the start of this example.
Furthermore, if you delete any of the recordings, you are deleting the only instance of those files. Using our
previous example, if you delete one of the five recordings from channel index 1, you'll find that even after
applying different presets channel 1 will have only four recorded files.
Deleting channels
Recorded files are stored on the system based on their channel or recorder number. All files saved for channel
index 1 are in one folder, and all files for recorder index 2 are in another. When you delete a channel (or
recorder), you permanently delete all recordings for that channel (or recorder) even if those recordings were
made while a different preset is applied.
Applying a configuration preset with a different set of channels or recorders is not the same as
deleting a channel.
When deleting a channel or recorder that has recorded files, the Admin panel warns you of other
configuration presets that use the same channel or recorder index numbers. When you see this prompt, we
recommend you take a moment to look through the Recordings list to make sure you're OK to proceed with
permanently deleting all the recorded files.
Branding content
Branding content files (logos, background images, etc) are included in your configuration presets and must be
present on the system when creating a preset that includes the Channels group, otherwise a failure is
reported.
147
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration presets are not user profiles
Configuration presets are not user profiles
Configuration presets should not be confused with the concept of user profiles. Specifically, the following
issues arise from trying to use configuration presets as user profiles:
l recorded files are not removed between application of configuration presets (users could see each
other's files)
l configuration presets can be overwritten and deleted with no password (users could affect each other's
presets)
l branding and recorded files can be deleted, affecting more than just the currently applied configuration
presets (users could erase branding or recordings belonging to other users)
l applying a configuration presets does not clear the settings from groups not part of the preset (user
information is not private)
Touch screen considerations
The touch screen configuration group includes all the security settings for the touch screen. One such
setting is the ability to use the touch screen. It is therefore possible to apply a preset via the touch screen that
effectively locks out any further use of the touch screen. If this happens accidentally, use the Admin panel to
re-enable the touch screen (see Configure the touch screen).
148
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
Configure date and time
Pearl-2 uses the current date and time in naming recorded files and when synchronizing and timestamping
inputs from multiple sources (i.e. when synchronizing an audio and a video source). The Admin panel lets you
specify date and time settings to ensure they are correctly configured for your time zone and your network.
This section covers the following date and time-related topics:
l Verify date and time via the touch screen
l Verify date and time settings
l Change the time zone
l Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and RDATE)
l Configure a local NTP server
l Configure the date and time manually
Verify date and time via the touch screen
Pearl-2's touch screen interface, if enabled, can quickly and easily show you the system's date and time
settings.
To show system information (including date and time) on the touch screen:
1. If the system information button (i) does not appear on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the
control buttons.
2. If the system information button (i) is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's Touch screen
configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
3. Touch the system information button (i) on the screen; the system information screen appears.
To close the system information screen:
1. Touch anywhere on the screen to return to the previous screen.
149
Pearl-2 User Guide
Verify date and time settings
Verify date and time settings
The current date, time, time zone, and synchronized time protocol settings are shown when the Date and
Time configuration page is loaded in the Pearl-2 Admin panel.
To view settings on the date and time configuration page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Date and Time link in the Configuration menu; the date and time configuration page opens
and the following information is displayed:
The date and time configuration page also indicates whether the system is currently using synchronized or
manually set time, and whether or not a local network time protocol (ntp) server is running.
The following table describes the date and time configuration fields.
Table 28 Date and Time Options
Label
Description/Options
Time Zone
The currently selected time zone.
Enable time
Whether or not a time synchronization protocol is being used for setting time. (If not
synchronization
selected, time is set manually.)
Protocol
The time synchronization protocol.
Service IP Address The time synchronization server address.
Set time manually
Date
Whether or not time is set manually. (If time is not being set manually, a time
synchronization protocol is used.)
The current date. (This is the current date even if the radio button Set time manually is
150
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and RDATE)
Description/Options
not selected.)
The current time. (This is the current time even if the radio button Set time manually is
Time
not selected.)
Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and RDATE)
By default Pearl-2 uses the network time protocol server (NTP server) protocol and a time server from
National Research Council Canada. You can continue to use this time server or configure a new server that is
more appropriate for your network and location. Your system administrator can provide the correct time
synchronization server settings.
To set the time synchronization method:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Date and Time link in the Configuration menu; the date and time configuration page
opens.
3. Click the Enable time synchronization radio button if it is not already selected.
4. Choose one of the following choices from the Protocols drop down:
Table 29 Synchronized Time Options
Label
Description/Options
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used for clock synchronization over the internet.
NTP
There are many publicly available NTP servers you can use, or your company may
have its own NTP server. For more information about NTP and to find
NTP servers, refer to http://support.ntp.org/bin/view/Servers/WebHome.
RDATE is a tool for querying the current time from the network. It is generally
RDATE
considered obsolete and has been replaced by NTP. It's offered here for
backwards compatibility with older timekeeping systems.
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is used for clock synchronization over the
PTP v1
internet. It has clock accuracy in the sub-microsecond range, making it more
granular than NTP.
5. Tailor the synchronization protocol with the required parameters as described below.
6. If NTP is selected:
a. Enter the IP address or server name for the NTP server in the Server IP Address field.
151
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the date and time manually
NTP uses UDP packets and port 123. If the system is behind a firewall and accessing an
external NTP server, UDP packets must be permitted on port 123.
7. If RDATE is selected:
a. Enter the IP address or server name for the RDATE server in the Server IP Address field.
b. Select an update interval from the drop down box.
8. If PTP v1 is selected:
a. Select the multicast address of PTP v1 server from the PTP domain drop-down.
PTP Domain
Description
Default
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.129
Alternative 1
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.130
Alternative 2
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.131
Alternative 3
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.132
PTP uses UDP packets and ports 319 and 320 . If the system is behind a firewall and
accessing an external PTP server, UDP packets must be permitted on ports 319 and 320.
9. Click Apply.
Configure the date and time manually
By default Pearl-2 uses NTP for time synchronization. If your system does not have access to a time
synchronization server, or if you do not wish to use one, you can choose to manually set the date and time.
To manually set the date and time:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Date and Time link in the Configuration menu; the date and time configuration page
opens.
3. Type the desired date in the Date field. Use the format yyyy-mm-dd.
4. Type the desired time in the Time field. Use the format hh:mm:ss.
5. Click Apply.
152
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the time zone
Change the time zone
By default the system has the Canada/Eastern time zone set. Configuration of the time zone is necessary to
ensure synchronized time servers provide the correct time to the system.
To select another time zone:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Date and Time link in the Configuration menu; the date and time configuration page
opens.
3. Select the new time zone from the Time Zone drop down box.
4. Click Apply.
Configure a local NTP server
Pearl-2 can run a local NTP server.
To configure a local NTP server:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Date and Time link in the Configuration menu; the date and time configuration page
opens.
3. Select the check box Enable local NTP server.
153
Pearl-2 User Guide
Video output ports
Video output ports
Pearl-2's rear panel includes two HDMI video output ports.
By default, HDMI 1 is set to show Auto A and HDMI 2 is set to show Auto B. Both are configured to maintain
aspect ratio, use the display's default resolution, include audio at 100% but do not include the audio meter.
Using the Admin panel, you can choose to change the defaults and send any video source or channel through
the video ports. For channels with audio, audio is also sent through the output ports (unless configured
differently). To learn how to set and configure the video output port settings using the Admin panel, see
Preview the video output port. To learn how to set and configure video output port settings using Epiphan
Live, see Configuring and monitoring video outputs.
Using the video output ports takes CPU cycles and adds to the overall load on your Pearl-2. As a
result, when using the video output ports you may not have enough CPU cycles left to encode
and stream as many channels as you can when not using the HDMI video output ports. For best
results, keep displays disconnected from the video output ports if you're not planning to use
them.
When changing encoding parameters for a channel that is displayed on the video output port, it
may revert to the display's default resolution if the output resolution is set to "Same as source".
To resolve, change the video output to a different resolution then back to "Same as source".
This section covers the following video output configuration topics:
l Show a channel on the video output port
l Show a source on the video output port
l Select a resolution for the video output port
l View the video output port status
154
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a channel on the video output port
l Preview the video output port
l Disable the video output port
l Disable or enable the audio on the video output port
l Configure the audio meter
l Rename a video output port
Show a channel on the video output port
You can choose to send any video source or channel through the HDMI video ports. You can adjust the
output's video resolution and aspect ratio.
For channels with audio, you can configure whether or not audio is present and at what volume and can
choose to include the audio meter to make the video output a replica of the confidence monitoring available
on Pearl's front screen.
To configure a channel to be displayed on the video output port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
Settings page with a channel as the source.
3. From the Source drop down, select the channel (prefixed by the word Channel) you'd like to view on
the video output port.
155
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a channel on the video output port
4. From the Resolution drop down, select the desired resolution to display on the video output port.
Value
Description
Set the output to the same resolution as the channel. If
that resolution is not supported by the display, the video
Same as source
output port will negotiate a new resolution with the display
(generally this ends up being the display's default
resolution).
This is the default value. Each display has a preferred
Destination default
resolution, and when you choose this setting, the video
output port will use the display's default resolution.
640×360, 640×480, 960×540,
1024×768, 1280×720, 1280×960,
Choose a specific resolution for the output port. For an
1360×768, 1400×1050, 1920×1080,
explanation of the different choices, see Show a channel on
1920×1200, 2560×1440,
the video output port.
3840×2160 4K , 4096×2160 4K
5. Check the Keep aspect ratio check box to have the system maintain the correct aspect ratio by
adding black bars at the top and bottom or left and right sides of the video if the aspect ratio is
different between the source and the chosen display aspect ratio. Uncheck to have the system stretch
the source to fit the aspect ratio of the display.
6. Check the Enable audio check box to include audio in the output. (If you uncheck this box, silence is
generated and output with the video.)
7. If needed, tweak the audio volume by entering a percent between 0 and 100 percent in the Audio
volume field.
8. To add the audio meter to the output, select a position from the Audio meter drop down. To hide the
audio meter, select do not display. The audio meter is set to a fixed size of 15% of the width (or height
if displayed horizontally) of the display.
Note the audio meter can be displayed even if you are not playing audio over the video
output port (i.e. even when the Enable audio check box is not checked).
9. If displaying the audio meter, select horizontal or vertical from the Audio meter orientation drop
down to change the orientation of the displayed audio meter.
10. Click Apply.
Your channel is now configured for display via the video output port. Note that the video output port frame
rate is set automatically to the channel's configured frame rate.
156
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a source on the video output port
You can also set your channels for display via the video output ports using the Epiphan Live
control interface. See Configuring and monitoring video outputs for more information.
Show a source on the video output port
You can choose to send any video source through the video ports. You can adjust the output's video
resolution, aspect ratio and frame rate.
To configure a source to be displayed on the video output port using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
Settings page with a video source (HDMI-A) as the source.
3. From the Source drop down, select the source (prefixed by the word Source) you'd like to view on the
video output port.
4. From the Resolution drop down, select the desired resolution to display on the video output port.
Value
Same as source
Description
Set the output to the same resolution as the source. If that
resolution is not supported by the display, the video
157
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select a resolution for the video output port
Value
Description
output port will negotiate a new resolution with the display
(generally this ends up being the display's default
resolution).
This is the default value. Each display has a preferred
Destination default
resolution, and when you choose this setting, the video
output port will use the display's default resolution.
640×360, 640×480, 960×540,
1024×768, 1280×720, 1280×960,
Choose a specific resolution for the output port. For an
1360×768, 1400×1050, 1920×1080,
explanation of the different choices, see Show a source on
1920×1200, 2560×1440,
the video output port.
3840×2160 4K , 4096×2160 4K
5. Check the Keep aspect ratio check box to have the system maintain the correct aspect ratio by
adding black bars at the top and bottom or left and right sides of the video if the aspect ratio is
different between the source and the chosen display aspect ratio. Uncheck to have the system stretch
the source to fit the aspect ratio of the display.
6. Configure the Frame rate field to specify the number of frames per second sent out over the video
output port.
7. Click Apply.
You can also set your sources to display via the video output ports using the Epiphan Live control
interface. See Configuring and monitoring video outputs for more information.
Select a resolution for the video output port
The video output port's resolution (also known as frame size or display mode) is a count of the number of
pixels displayed horizontally and vertically. For example, the resolution 1920×1080 (1080p) creates an image
that is 1920 pixels wide and 1080 pixels tall.
Pearl-2 always assumes that the output display uses square pixels.
The aspect ratio of an image (eg. 4:3 or 16:9) describes the proportional relationship between its pixel width
and height. The resolution 1920×1080 (1080p) is quite a bit wider than it is tall. The ratio of its width to height
is 16 to 9, represented as an aspect ratio 16:9.
158
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview the video output port
By default you can choose from the following output resolutions for your video output ports, but you can
also change settings to allow a variety of other resolutions through.
Aspect ratio legend
Aspect Ratio
4:3
16:9
16:10 (8:5)
5:4
1.90:1
Common Use
Standard TV (NTSC/PAL) display and non-widescreen computer displays
Widescreen (HD) TV displays (1080p, 1080i, 720p etc), and 4K-capable displays
Widescreen computer displays, and 4K-capable displays
Sometimes used in larger format computer monitors
Digital Cinema Initiatives standard resolution for 4K or 2K video projection
Resolutions
640×360
640×480
960×540
1024×768
1280×720
1280×1024
1600×1200
1920×1080
1920×1200
2560×1440
3840×2160
4K
4096×2160
4K
Preview the video output port
You can preview the video signal that is shared over your video output port by looking at the preview window
at the bottom of the video output configuration page in the Admin panel.
The preview is updated every few seconds and always maintains the same aspect ratio as the
source it is copying. It doesn't reflect black bars, the audio meter or actual aspect ratio/resolution
on the display.
159
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the video output port status
If the video output port is showing a source and that source has no signal, the source's no signal image is
displayed.
If the video output port is showing a channel and that channel is unavailable or has no signal, a no signal
message is shown for 2.5 seconds, then the display output is changed to a black screen.
You can also preview video output ports using the Epiphan Live control interface. See
Configuring and monitoring video outputs for more information.
View the video output port status
At the top of the video output port configuration page is a status section that displays the actual settings used
with the attached video display device.
To view the video output status in the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
3. See the Status section at the top of the page; possible status messages are described in the table
below.
160
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable the video output port
Table 30 Possible video output status messages
Message
Disabled
Display is not connected
Source is currently unavailable
Starting ...
Running at w×h
Description
This video output port is disabled in the configuration. See View the video
output port status.
There is no display connected to the video output port or the connected
display is not powered on or not functioning.
The video output port is configured to display a channel that no longer
exists. Change the source. See View the video output port status.
The video output port is configuring the display and will shortly output the
first frame.
The video output port is functioning at the specified resolution.
You can also view video output status using the Epiphan Live control interface. See Configuring
and monitoring video outputs for more information.
Disable the video output port
You can choose to disable a video output port, so even if a display is connected, nothing is shown.
To disable the video output port using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
161
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable or enable the audio on the video output port
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
3. From the Source select none to disable the video output port.
4. Click Apply; the video output port is disabled and status is changed to Disabled.
You can also disable video output ports using the Epiphan Live control interface. See Configuring
and monitoring video outputs for more information.
Disable or enable the audio on the video output port
If you're displaying a channel as the source for your video output port, audio for that channel is also encoded
and sent over the port. You can choose to disable audio, in which case Pearl-2 will generate silence as the
audio output. (Note: audio pass-through functionality is only supported with a channel as the source.)
To disable the audio on the video output port using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
162
Pearl-2 User Guide
Audio disabled for the video output port
Configure the audio meter
Audio enabled for the video output port
3. To disable audio, uncheck the Enable audio check box. To enable audio, check it.
4. When audio is enabled, a second field appears for Audio volume. Configure with a value between 0
and 100 to moderate the volume of audio output over the video output port.
5. Click Apply.
You can also disable or enable video output port audio volume using the Epiphan Live control
interface. See Configuring and monitoring video outputs for more information.
Configure the audio meter
When outputting a channel over a video output port, you can choose to output audio and whether or not to
include the audio meter. You can control the position and orientation of the audio meter.
To configure the audio meter for the video output port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of your Output Port (by default called HDMI 1 and HDMI 2); the video output port
configuration page opens.
163
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a video output port
3. Ensure a channel is selected as the source for the video output port. (Audio output and audio meter
display are only supported for channels.)
4. From the Audio meter drop box select one of the following options.
Value
Description
do not display
No audio meter is displayed.
left top corner
Audio meter is displayed at the top left side of the display.
right top corner
Audio meter is displayed at the top right side of the display.
left bottom corner
right bottom corner
Audio meter is displayed at the bottom left side of the
display.
Audio meter is displayed at the bottom right side of the
display.
5. If you've selected a location for the audio meter, you can also select orientation (horizontal or vertical)
from the Audio meter orientation drop down.
6. Click Apply.
Rename a video output port
By default Pearl-2's video output ports are named HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. Like channel and source names, you
can change a video output port's name to better indicate its use. For example you might want to name one
Projector Output and the other Confidence Monitor.
To change a video output port name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Output ports menu option.
4. Click the desired video output port link; the video output port configuration page opens.
5. Click the video output port name at the top of the page; the name turns red.
6. Highlight and delete the existing source name.
164
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a video output port
7. Type a new name.
8. Press Enter (on your keyboard) to save the new name.
You must press Enter to save the new name. The Apply button will not save the source
name change.
165
PART 2: Capture
Capturing is the process of taking the signals from your video and audio sources and encoding them in a
format that is ready for streaming and recording.
If you followed the quick start guide, you're already capturing, streaming and possibly recording your sources.
The section of the guide helps you fine tune and troubleshoot the capturing process.
When using Pearl-2, you can stick to all the default capture and encoding settings, or you tweak them to set
the up exactly as you like.
You can capture a single source at once, capture multiple sources in a custom channel or even switch between
sources or groups of sources (layouts) while streaming and recording.
Techniques for creating channels to capture, stream and record a single source; to create custom channels
with multiple sources and multiple layouts; and how to switch layouts while capturing are all described in this
section.
The chapters in this section include:
l Channels
l Live video mixing / switching
l Sources
l Troubleshooting
166
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is a channel?
What is a channel?
Pearl-2 uses Channels to organize and display yourHDMI, DVI, SDI, USB video content.
Channels take your video content from the input ports (HDMI, SDI, USB video) and make it available for
streaming and recording. You have many creative options available to customize channels. For example, you
can apply effects to your sources like a transparent logo or lower third. Easily combine multiple sources in
picture in picture layouts and add text overlays. You can even apply chroma key effects to either one or to all
your input video sources at the same time.
Pearl-2 gives you a lot of control over how your sources are streamed. You are not limited to creating a
Channel list that is a one-to-one reflection of your Sources list. You can make channels from some or all of
your sources and you can add the same source to multiple single-source or multi-source layout channels.
For example, you could use the same source in all three of these situations, concurrently:
- as the only source in Channel 1 at 1080p, 30fps, 10,000 kbps;
- as the only source in Channel 2 at 720p, 15 fps, 2,000 kbps;
- in Channel 3 as part of a multi-source layout with picture in picture.
All channels can be streamed and recorded simultaneously. Following the example above, you could record
any combination of those three channels, and stream one, two or all three of them using any available
streaming methods.
In addition to creating multi-source channels, you can customize your channels by adding images, company
information, corporate colors and time stamps. Pearl-2 has a visual layout editor to help you create exactly
the layout you want to stream.
For each channel you create, you can use the custom layout editor to create one or more custom layouts.
Then you can switch live between different layouts while recording or streaming. To create custom layouts,
read Create a custom channel and Custom channel layout editor. To learn how to do live video mixing and live
video switching, see Live video mixing / switching.
You can also view channels and perform live switching using the Epiphan Live control
interface. See Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring and
Switching while live streaming and recording for more information.
You can create and upload customized “No Signal” images for use in your channels. These images are assigned
to a specific source and display in any channel where the source is used but has no input detected. For more
information on how to create a "No Signal" image, see Add a No Signal image to a source .
167
Pearl-2 User Guide
Channels
Channels
Through channel configuration and fine-tuning you can maximize your stream quality, minimize your
processing requirements and bandwidth. You can also specify how the video is presented and streamed to
sharing destinations and viewers. Topics in this section include:
l Use the automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
l Create a simple channel
l Configure encoding
l Create a custom channel
l Custom channel examples
l Custom channel layout editor
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Configure chroma keying
l Live video mixing / switching
l Preview a channel
l Duplicate a channel
l Delete a channel
l Rename a channel
Use the automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
To get you started as quickly as possible, Pearl-2 comes pre-configured with two channels: Auto A and Auto B.
To use these channels, simply plug a source into one of the Row A inputs and, if desired, a second source into
one of the Row B inputs. The system automatically configures the channel's frame size to match the source
resolution and configures a frame rate and bit rate. Audio, if present, is automatically added to the channel.
168
Pearl-2 User Guide
Know which signal is used for Auto-A or Auto-B
Default audio setup for the auto channels is always as follows:
Video Source
Audio Source
SDI
SDI Audio
HDMI (DVI)
HDMI Audio (no audio for DVI)
USB video
USB audio
You can start viewing the channel immediately on the touch screen display (if enabled) or by using an internet
browser on the same LAN or network. Browse to the following URL:
For Auto A: http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=1
For Auto B: http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=2
For example:http://d560515f.local/preview.cgi?channel=2
Or, if Bonjour services (which permit browsing by serial number) are not installed on the computer you can
obtain the IP address from the touch screen display, if enabled, and browse to:
For Auto A: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=1
You find alternate connection streams (i.e. RTSP or MPEG-TS) and can further configure these channels by
logging into the Admin panel and accessing Auto A and Auto B using the links under the Channels menu.
You can delete the Auto A and Auto B channels, but they will re-appear upon factory reset or
when loading the default configuration profile.
Know which signal is used for Auto-A or Auto-B
Pearl-2 has video input sensing, meaning it knows when there is a video signal coming through from an
attached source.
If you attach more than one source to a row while Pearl-2 is turned on, the first source to be attached has the
highest priority. However, if you attach more than one source to a row prior to powering on Pearl-2, the
following priority is used:
169
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure auto channels
Priority
Connector Type
1
HDMI (with HDMI Audio)
2
HDMI 4K4K (with HDMI Audio)
3
SDI (with SDI Audio)
4
USB video (with USB audio)
The auto channel uses a source until the source has no signal, then switches to the highest priority signal
found.
For example, if you attach SDI into the "A" slot, then HDMI into the "A" slot as well, then Auto A will
show HDMI and use HDMI audio until such time as the SDI video signal is lost or you use the audio
input selection option in the sources section. At that time Auto A will switch to SDI video with XLR
audio.
If all the connected sources lose signal at the same time (i.e. for the example above when SDI loses video
signal, and no other video signal is found on the HDMI source) no change is made and the auto channel
continues to use the current source. In this case, a no signal image is displayed for viewers. See Add a No
Signal image to a source for more information on setting no signal images.
Configure auto channels
Auto channels are included with Pearl-2 to make setup quick and simple. However if you want to set custom
encoding or streaming configuration for the channel, you can configure it like any other channel.
To further configure automatic channels Auto A and Auto B:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Scroll to the Channels section.
4. Click Auto A or Auto B from the Channels section; the channel's status page opens.
170
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a simple channel
5. Configure the channel as you would any other channel. See below.
You can change the source used for the two auto channels by selecting a different source from
the layout editor in the Sources page. When you do this, the channel name changes to reflect the
new source (if that is the only source is used for the channel). No auto switching is performed.
This is desirable if you know, for example, that you will always use SDI video with XLR audio and
you never need the automatic switching capabilities of the auto channels.
Create a simple channel
Channels arrange the output from sources into a viewable and recordable stream. Although there are may
ways you customize a channel, this procedure walks you through the most basic channel setup with a
single source. For multiple-source channels and advanced layout editing see Add channel metadata. (You
can always update this channel later to use multiple sources or multiple layouts.)
After creating this channel you'll be ready to stream it using the system default settings. Instructions to
configure encoding, branding and CDN streaming are described in separate procedures.
To create a simple channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
171
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a simple channel
3. Ensure that your choice of HDMI, DVI, SDI, USB video sources and your audio are connected to the
device, and you know the name of the source it is connected to. If you're not sure, see What is a
source?.
4. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels menu option. A list of existing channels, if any is
displayed.
5. Click Add channel located at the bottom of the list; the Sources page opens.
6. You're automatically editing the Default layout in the channel layout editor. (By default a 16:9 visual
layout editor with a no-signal image is shown.)
7. Click Add new item to add a layer to the layout; a drop down appears allowing you to choose the kind
of item to add to your layout.
172
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a simple channel
8. Select Video Source from the drop down; the new item is added to the layout and the Source settings
box appears on the right side of the page.
9. Click the Source drop down and select your source; your source appears in the visual layout editor
above.
173
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a simple channel
10. For best results, keep the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox checked in the Source
settings box.
11. Click and drag the red and white source handles in the visual editor or type in the percentage text boxes
at the side to re-size the image as you wish. For a single source channel, using the full layout is usually
best.
174
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a simple channel
12. If audio is desired, scroll down and choose an audio source from the displayed list.
If an Auto channel is selected as a video source, then Auto A or Auto B audio is selected by
default.
13. Click Save at the lower right corner of the page; the layout changes are saved.
Because this is a single-source channel with only one layout, the channel's name is updated
to display the source’s name next time you view the channel. Click the channel name to
refresh and view this, if desired. If you wish to change a channel's name directly, see
Rename a channel.
Your channel is ready for basic streaming and recording.
By default (on a new channel), when the source doesn't have a 16:9 aspect ratio, the system
automatically detects the correct aspect ratio and updates the layout after you leave and return
to the layout editor screen. This happens because the encoding page has the Use current signal
resolution as frame size setting selected by default. If you want to change the aspect ratio for
your channel, see Configure encoding .
175
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a custom channel
There are a lot of creative things you can do next with your channel, including creating more layouts and
editing this layout to add images and more sources. See Create a custom channel for more information.
Create a custom channel
Pearl-2 has two styles of channels:
1. Simple channels with a single source that fits the full screen, as discussed in Create a simple channel.
2. Custom channels with one or more layouts, sources, background matte color and images.
You set up simple and custom channels using the same user interface.
Simple and custom channels do essentially the same thing. The main difference is that custom channels have
multiple sources, image elements, multiple layouts or any combination of those items added. So the only
distinction between simple channels and custom channels is the you've added extra elements to the channel.
A simple channel has one source that fills the whole screen, but with custom channels, you can arrange and
resize multiple video sources, add pictures and even add text overlays using custom layouts. Each custom
channel you create can have multiple custom layouts.
To do video switching (or video mixing) while you're streaming live, create a custom layout for each view that
you want to switch between. You can switch live between the custom layouts using the Admin panel or Pearl2's touch screen.
If you're planning to do live switching with your channel, we recommend you set the frame size to
a fixed size instead of using the default automatic detection of source frame size. Setting the
frame size to a fixed value ensures you don't experience any stream interruptions if the source
frame size changes due to layouts that contain a single source that has a different frame size than
those in other layouts.
As you saw when creating a simple channel, the first thing you need to do is create your (first) layout. Before
getting started with custom channel layouts, we recommend you review the Custom channel layout editor
and get some inspiration from our Custom channel examples. Then use the remaining topics in this section to
help you create and configure your perfect custom channel layouts!
l Create a custom channel or layout
l To upload an image
l Delete an uploaded image
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
176
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom channel layout editor
l Custom crop a source
l Configure chroma keying
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
After your custom layouts are created, read about Live video mixing / switching to learn how to switch layouts
while streaming and/or recording.
Each layout you add to your channel adds overhead on Pearl-2- and more complex layouts take
more resources. So it's a good idea to delete any layouts you're not using.
Custom channel layout editor
The visual channel layout editor gives you full control on size and position of the pictures, sources and text
overlays you add to your channel.
You can edit existing channel layouts (even ones you initially created as simple channels) or you can create a
new channel or a new layout within a channel to work with. To add a new layout, see Create a custom channel
or layout.
To select a layout for editing:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select your channel from the channels menu and click Sources for the channel.
3. Select the layout you want to edit by clicking anywhere in the layout row; the layout editor shows the
current state of the selected layout for your channel and the row for the layout you're editing is
highlighted green.
177
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom channel layout editor
4. If this is a new layout, you are presented with an empty layout area and a black background matte.
The Sources page and channel layout editor is broken into a few pieces.
Layout selector
First there is the layout selector. From here you can pick which layout to preview/edit, create a new layout,
delete a layout or select which layout is active.
Visual channel layout editor
Next is the channel layout editor where you can add pictures, sources and text overlays to your layout. You
can also choose the background matte.
178
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom channel layout editor
The heart of the channel layout editor is the layout area, which has the same frame size and aspect ratio as
your stream. As you add items to the layout, they appear in the layout area. The currently selected item is
presented in full color while other items appear transparent.
To position the items you can use the mouse to click and drag, or you can use the manual positioning values
to set a location as a percent of the screen (by typing a value followed by the percent sign, e.g. 4%) or in pixels
(by typing a value followed by px, e.g. 16px).
You can resize items by clicking and dragging the red and white circles at the corners of the items or by using
the manual positioning values. For example, entering 0% in all four of the outside boxes will stretch the item
to the full size of the layout area.
You can modify the settings for each item by clicking the row. The item's settings box appears. See Add an
image (custom channel), Add a video source (custom channel) and Add a text overlay (custom channel) for
more details on item settings.
Audio source selector and save button
The last section of the Sources page is the audio selector and the (very important) Save button.
179
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom channel layout editor
Select the audio source(s) you want to add to your channel.
If an Auto channel is selected as a video source, then Auto A or Auto B audio is selected by default.
Audio sources are mixed together at the same volume level as one another.
When you're done all your changes, use the Save button to save the changes to your layout.
If you leave the layout without saving, Pearl-2 reminds you to save before leaving. Ensure that your brwoser
settings allow for the Pearl-2 Admin panel to create pop-up boxes.
Ready to make some layouts of your own? Try these topics:
180
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom channel examples
l Create a custom channel or layout
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
Custom channel examples
Here are a few examples of what you can do with just two sources and two picture files. Use your imagination
to create the layouts you want!
Layout example
Description
One source (a slideshow presentation in this case),
at the full size of the channel.
(Simple channel)
To get this look: Add one source to the layout,
select keep aspect ratio and stretch to fit the full
layout size.
One source (a slideshow presentation in this case),
with a green background matte.
To get this look: Select a background color. Add
a source to the layout and size appropriately,
leaving the background matte visible.
181
Pearl-2 User Guide
Layout example
Custom channel examples
Description
One source with a logo (.png with transparency) in
the bottom left corner.
To get this look: Upload an image with
transparency through the Branding Content page.
Follow the steps from the first example to add the
source, then add a picture item and place it where
desired.
One source with a text overlay in the bottom right
corner.
To get this look: Follow the steps from the first
example to add the source, then add a text overlay
item to the layout. Enter your text in the settings
box and place it where desired.
One source with a background image.
To get this look: Upload your background image
(must have the right aspect ratio) through the
Branding Content page. When creating the layout,
first add the picture and stretch it to the full
screen. Next, follow the steps from the first
example to add the source.
182
Pearl-2 User Guide
Layout example
Custom channel examples
Description
Two sources with a background image.
To get this look: Follow the steps for the
example above, then add and position a second
source.
Two sources (one cropped to a new aspect
ratioCustom crop a source), a background image
and a logo.
To get this look: Upload your background and
logo images through the Branding Content page.
When creating the layout, first pick the
background, then the sources, and lastly the logo.
Size and position each. For the second source, use
the Crop tool to set the video to a specific aspect
ratio or size, and crop until you achieve the desired
result.
A few more examples, this time including a 4x3 source.
Layout example
Description
One source, at the full size of the channel.
(Simple channel)
To get this look: Add one source to the
layout, select keep aspect ratio and
stretch to fit the full layout size. (Note the
channel broadcasts in 4x3 if you have
Use current signal resolution as
frame size selected on the encoding
page.)
183
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a custom channel or layout
Layout example
Description
One 4x3 source in a 16x9 frame, with a
green background matte.
To get this look: Make sure your
encoding page has a 16x9 frame size.
From the sources page, select a
background color. Add a source to the
layout and stretch to the full height of the
screen, leaving the background matte
visible.
A 4x3 source and a cropped 16x9 source
together with a background image.
To get this look: Upload an image
through the Branding Content page.
Follow the steps from the first 4x3
example (two rows up) to add the sources
then use the Crop tool to crop the second
source to a square aspect ratio.
Time to get started on your own layouts! See:
l Create a custom channel or layout
l Custom crop a source
l Custom channel layout editor
Create a custom channel or layout
We call a channel a custom channel (or custom layout channel) when is has multiple sources, image elements,
multiple layouts, or any combination of those items. Custom layouts give you full control on size and position
of the pictures, sources and text overlays you add to your channel.
Use this procedure to help you create a new channel or layout, then use the related procedures to add
elements to your layout.
If you're planning to use live switching, we strongly recommend you rename the channel rather
than using the default channel name (Rename a channel). See the note at the bottom of this
184
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a custom channel or layout
topic to avoid streaming and recording issues resulting from adding or deleting layouts when live
switching.
To create a new custom channel (with default layout) or add a layout to an existing channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Do one of the following to make the Sources page appear:
a. select your channel from the channels menu and click Sources for the channel; or
b. select the Add channel link to create a new channel.
3. Next, pick one of the following actions to create or select a layout to edit:
a. select the layout you want to edit by clicking anywhere in the layout row; or
b. click Add Layout to create a new layout.
4. The layout editor shows the current state of the selected layout for your channel and the row for the
layout you're editing is highlighted green.
5. If this is a new channel or layout, you are presented with an empty layout area with a black background
matte.
Now that you've created your layout, you can start adding items to it. See these topics:
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
l Configure chroma keying
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
185
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a video source (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
Important note for channels with multiple layouts
By default (and historically), Pearl-2's channels are named automatically based on the content in the channel.
When a channel has only one layout, and that layout has only one source (regardless of whether or not there
are pictures or overlays in the layout), the channel name is the same as the source name.
For example: By default, a channel with one layout that has HDMI-A in it will be named HDMI-A.
When you add a second layout to a channel, the channel name changes to a generic name Channel X (where
X is the channel index number). Normally this wouldn't pose any problem, but the changing name does have
some side effects: the stream is stopped and restarted, and the channel's recorder (if recording) is stopped
and a new file is started.
Furthermore, when you delete layouts in a channel until there is only one layout (with one source) left, the
channel name reverts to the source name.
To avoid any issue with changing channel names on channels where you'll have more than one layout, we
strongly recommend you rename the channel to a custom name (Rename a channel. This will ensure no
automatic channel name changes.
Add a video source (custom channel)
A source needs to be added to a channel before the channel is ready to stream. In the case of custom
channels with layouts, you can add one or more sources to the layout area.
When adding more than one source to a custom channel, we recommend configuring the
channel to use a fixed resolution instead of using the current signal resolution as the frame
size (see Configure encoding ). A fixed channel resolution ensures that your channel will
display properly in all preview modes (touch screen, Epiphan Live and Admin panel).
You can add a source to a layout on an existing channel or you can create a new channel. If you're not sure
how to create a channel or a layout, start by reviewing the first few steps in the topic Custom channel layout
editor or start with Create a simple channel.
To add a source to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
186
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a video source (custom channel)
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. From the channel layout editor, click Add item; a drop down box appears. (If you have any other items
already in your layout, the new item appears at the top of the list.)
4. Select Video Source from the drop down; the new item is added to the layout and the Source settings
box appears on the right side of the page.
5. Click the Source drop down and select your source; your source appears in the visual layout editor
above.
187
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a video source (custom channel)
6. For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source settings
box.
7. If desired, select Crop from the Source settings box, and follow the instructions to Custom crop a
source; your cropped selection changes in the layout area.
8. Moving back to the layout area, use the mouse, the keyboard or the manual position value fields to
position and resize your source. You can click and drag, stretch using the handles in the layout area, or
type values into the fields. See the note below for more information.
9. If needed, re-order the items in your layout by clicking and dragging items in the item list (under the
Add new item link).
For example, if you added your video source over a text overlay, the video source could conceal
the overlay. To fix it, drag the video source item below the text item in the list, or vice-versa.
10. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
Other things you may want to add to your layout:
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
188
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
189
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an audio source (custom channel)
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
Add an audio source (custom channel)
To stream the audio for a source you need to add it to a channel and make sure audio is enabled in the
channel's encoding page. (Audio is enabled in the encoding page by default.)
There is no need to manually add RTSP audio sources to your channel. When an RTSP stream is
connected to your Pearl-2 as an input source, a corresponding audio source is automatically
added to the list of audio sources for your channels, even if there is no audio in the RTSP stream.
Audio must be added to each layout for your channel. You can use the same audio for each layout, or if you
desire, you can have different layouts use different audio. If you're not sure how to create a channel or a
layout, start by reviewing the first few steps in the topic Custom channel layout editor or start with Create a
simple channel.
To add an audio source to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. Select the audio source(s) you want to add to your channel. Audio sources are mixed together at the
same volume level as one another.
190
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an audio source (custom channel)
4. When your layout changes are complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your
work.
5. Follow the steps in Configure audio codec to ensure audio is enabled for your channel and to select
your audio settings.
The right-most XLR audio input and the RCA audio input are linked within Pearl-2. This means that
if you use both simultaneously, their audio will become mixed, and their input is mixed with
unpredictable gain levels for each. To avoid this, when you are using RCA, you can only use the
left-most XLR audio pair and the SDI and HDMI audio inputs.
For analog audio signals, you may want to check audio levels on your channel and adjust audio gain, if
needed. See Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay.
Other things you may want to add to your layout:
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
191
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom crop a source
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
Custom crop a source
You can change the size and shape of your video using the crop tool on the Sources page. Cropping a source
gives you a lot of advantages. You can capture a 1080p section from a 4K source, a specific aspect ratio or size
from a source, or select a crop that fits into your layout better than the full area of your video.
To crop a source in your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. From the channel layout editor, click Add new item; a drop down box appears. (If you have any other
items already in your layout, the new item appears at the top of the list.)
4. Select Video Source from the drop down; the new item is added to the layout and the Source settings
box appears on the right side of the page.
192
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom crop a source
5. Click the Crop button; your source appears in a pop-up crop editing window.
6. The Crop window has several tools for creating the best crop possible.
l Free form mode is the default crop mode, which you can selected at any time. In this mode, you
can change the size, aspect ratio, and position of the crop with minimal restrictions.
l The red box with circular click-and-drag points indicates what your crop shows in the final layout.
The channel only shows the part of the source within the box. In Free form mode, you can click
and drag the red circles to change the size and ratio of the box, and you can click and drag the
box itself to change its position. When you have selected an aspect ratio, you can alter the size
by dragging the red circles. When you have selected a size, you can change its position by
dragging the box.
l The number boxes allow you to make precise crops. Click the text boxes and change the number
to determine how many pixels distant from the edge that line is drawn. If you wish, you may also
erase the "px" after the number and type in "%" to manipulate the box using percentages. For
more details on how these boxes work, look at Resize and position layout items using percents
or pixels (custom channel).
l To create a crop with a specific resolution, choose a Size from the available list. This creates a
box with that exact resolution. Click and drag this box to move it to the desired position. Its size
cannot be altered except by selecting a different size, or by selecting Free form or Aspect
Ratio.
193
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
l Selecting an aspect ratio allows you to create a crop box of almost any size in a particular ratio.
After selecting a ratio, you can manipulate the crop area's size and position without changing its
shape.
l At any time, click Cancel, and all changes made to the crop are undone and you are returned to
the layout customization screen.
l At any time, click OK, and all changes made to the crop are confirmed and you are returned to
the layout customization screen.
7. When you have used the tools as outlined above to achieve the desired crop and clicked OK to finalize
the changes and return to the main layout page, you can use the tools outlined in Add a video source
(custom channel) to further customize the cropped source. You can change the style of your crop at
any time by returning to the Crop tool.
You can also manipulate the crop-box using keyboard controls. You can move the crop box using
the arrow keys, and holding Ctrl or Shift while resizing the box keeps the aspect ratio of the box
constant. Hold Shift and use the arrow keys to move one side of the box while leaving the other
in the same location.
Configure chroma keying
Pearl-2 supports chroma keying so you can add special effects to any video source in a custom channel. Add
great looking effects such as animated lower thirds using a titler software or add a custom background using
green screen. It's easy to get creative.
With chroma keying, you can choose a specific color in your video scene and replace everything of that color
with a different image or video.
The most common color used for chroma keying is green. In this example, the original video source shows
someone standing in front of a green screen. Using chroma key in Pearl-2, an image of an office space
replaces the green background.
194
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
White, grey, and black are not recommended colors for chroma keying. Those are treated
as the same color with a different luminance value. The result in Pearl-2 is that the chroma
keying affect gets applied to all shades ranging from white to black.
Performance considerations
Chroma keying can impact the performance of Pearl-2 depending on factors such as how many chroma key
sources you add, if you scale the chroma key video source using the custom layout editor, and your frame
rate.
For best performance, avoid excessive scaling of video sources that have chroma keying enabled. Cropping
video sources that have chroma keying enabled helps reduce processing and optimizes the performance of
Pearl-2.
You can monitor the performance of Pearl-2 from the Info tab using the Admin panel for the custom channel
that has chroma keying enabled. For more information about performance monitoring, see Using Pearl-2
effectively.
Observe the following:
l For Pearl-2, the maximum resolution is 1920×1080 at 30 fps for chroma keying.
l Avoid scaling a video source that has chroma key enabled.
l Where possible, crop the video source that has the chroma key enabled to minimize the area that Pearl2 must process for the chroma key effect.
l Overloading the Pearl-2 processor can cause frame drops.
What is upstream chroma keying?
Upstream chroma keying applies the chroma key effect to a specific video source before it's processed,
switched, and broadcast.
For example, you could display the name of a guest using titler software on only the camera that is dedicated
for close ups of that person but not on any of your other video sources.
195
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
To get an upstream key effect using Pearl-2, you can create custom layouts for each video source using the
custom layout editor. Then set up chroma keying on just one custom layout. Only the video source that
appears in the custom layout with chroma key enabled has the chroma key effect applied to it.
If you want to apply the chroma key effect to a video source that appears in several different
custom layouts, you must enable the chroma key effect in each custom layout where that
particular video source appears.
What is downstream chroma keying?
Downstream chroma keying applies the chroma key effect to all video sources you broadcast after they're
processed and switched.
A common use of downstream keying is to display a persistent image, like a company logo, so that it always
appears on screen.
196
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
To get a downstream key effect using Pearl-2, you can enable the same chroma key effect on all your custom
layouts. This way, the same chroma key effect gets applied to everything you stream or record.
The following topics appear in this section:
l Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
l Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
l Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft Powerpoint slides
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
A common use of chroma keying is to use a green screen and then replace the green background with another
video or still image.
197
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
Your chroma key source can come from a video camera or an effects computer connected to Pearl-2. The
background you use can be from another video source, a still image that you've uploaded to Pearl-2, or from
an effects computer.
This example shows two camera sources connected to Pearl-2. The green screen appears in the video source
connected to HDMI-A and the office background is from HDMI-B.
To configure chroma keying for a green screen video source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Create a custom channel or layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add item; a drop down box appears.
198
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing through the background of your
chroma key colored areas. For detailed steps, see Add a video source (custom channel).
5. In the layout area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for positioning
techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source that has the green screen image.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your green screen video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Custom crop a source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout
editor.
199
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
Cropping the green screen video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl-2.
8. In the layout area, position the green screen video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the green screen video source if you can.
9. With the green screen video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout
editor; the chroma keying options appear.
200
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
White, grey, and black are not recommended colors for chroma keying. Pearl-2 treats them
as the same color with different luminance values. As such, chroma keying affects all
shades ranging from white to black.
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
201
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
12. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft Powerpoint slides
You can use the chroma key feature on Pearl-2 with Microsoft Powerpoint slides to add animated titles and
other Powerpoint effects. The setup is really the same as using a dedicated titling software on an effects
202
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
computer with Pearl-2.
This example shows an HDMI camera connected to the HDMI-A port on Pearl-2 and an effects computer that
has a Powerpoint presentation loaded on it connected to the HDMI-B port. To the computer, Pearl-2 is
treated just like an external display.
You can connect the effects computer with the Powerpoint file to any supported port that is
available on Pearl-2.
To apply the chroma key effect to a single video source using Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Create a custom channel or layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add new item and select Video Source from the drop down box.
203
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing in the background. For detailed steps,
see Add a video source (custom channel).
5. In the layout area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for positioning
techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source from your effects computer.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your Powerpoint video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Custom crop a source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout
editor.
204
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
Cropping the Powerpoint computer video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl2.
8. In the layout area, position the Powerpoint video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the Powerpoint video source if you can.
205
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
9. With the Powerpoint video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout editor;
the chroma keying options appear.
206
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
12. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
207
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
You can use Pearl-2 with titling software that provides chroma key output to add effects like animated lower
thirds.
208
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
This example shows an HDMI camera connected to the HDMI-A port on Pearl-2 and an effects computer with
titler software connected to the HDMI-B port. To the computer, Pearl-2 is treated just like an external display.
You can connect the effects computer with the titling software to any supported port that is
available on Pearl-2.
To apply the chroma key effect to a single video source using Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Create a custom channel or layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add new item and select Video Source from the drop down box.
209
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing in the background. For detailed steps,
see Add a video source (custom channel).
5. In the layout area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for positioning
techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source from your effects computer.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your effects video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Custom crop a source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout
editor.
210
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
Cropping the effects computer video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl-2.
8. In the layout area, position the effects video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the effects video source if you can.
211
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
9. With the effects video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout editor; the
chroma keying options appear.
212
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
12. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
213
Pearl-2 User Guide
To upload an image
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
To upload an image
You can customize your channels by adding pictures as backgrounds, overlays or information. Collectively the
images you upload to the system are known as branding images.
214
Pearl-2 User Guide
To upload an image
For best results always upload images that are already the correct size needed in your layout.
Background images should match the frame size of your channel (frame size is set in the
Encoding configuration page).
There are two ways to upload branding images. You can upload images to the branding page, as described in
this procedure, or you can drag and drop images using the procedure described in Add an image (custom
channel). Note that using the procedure below is the only way to see whether or not you'll be overwriting an
existing image.
To upload a branding image to the branding page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Click Branding Content under the Configuration menu; the configuration page opens.
4. Click Choose File; a browser page opens.
5. Navigate to the folder on your admin computer that contains the logo.
6. Select the file, the following file formats are supported: PNG and JPEG.
215
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image (custom channel)
The maximum supported file size is 3840×2160. No warning or error message is displayed
if your image is too large. Files that exceed the maximum size do not appear in the dropdown list when selecting an image.
7. Click Open; the file is added to the File/template to upload field.
8. Click Upload; the file is uploaded and displayed in the Other files section.
See the following topics to learn how to apply the logo, background, overlay text or other images to a channel:
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
Add an image (custom channel)
You can use images in your custom channel layouts to create a background for your source, to add your
corporate logo, or to add relevant information about the event you're streaming.
216
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image (custom channel)
Pearl-2 supports png (PNG) and .jpg (JPEG) images. You can upload any image from 16×16 pixels to a
maximum resolution size of 4096×4096, however it's strongly recommended that you upload exactly the size
you need to avoid having your image scaled.
In earlier releases, there were separate procedures for adding backgrounds and logos to a channel. These
actions are now both considered adding an image to a custom channel layout and can be accomplished with
the steps below.
You can add a picture to a layout on an existing channel or you can create a new channel. If you're not sure
how to create a channel or a layout, start by reviewing the first few steps in the topic Custom channel layout
editor or start with Create a simple channel.
To add a picture to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in To upload an image or Create a custom channel or layout to upload your image, if
not already uploaded. If you like, you can also use the drag and drop technique described below.
3. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor to get to the channel layout editor.
4. From the channel layout editor, click Add item; a drop down box appears. (If you have any other items
already in your layout, the new item appears at the top of the list.)
5. Select Picture; the Picture Settings section appears on the right side of the page.
217
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image (custom channel)
6. If you haven't already uploaded your image, you can drag and drop it from your desktop to the gray
Please select picture box. (Note: no warning is displayed if the image is too large or will replace
another file).
7. If you have already uploaded the image, click the Use image drop down to select an image you have
uploaded to the system;
8. Your picture appears in the Picture settings preview and is added to the layout area. It is selected for
sizing and positioning.
If your uploaded image does not appear in the list, ensure it doesn't exceed the maximum
resolution size of 4096×4096.
9. For best results, keep the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox selected in the Picture
settings box. (This is selected by default.)
218
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image (custom channel)
10. In the layout area, use the mouse, the keyboard or the manual position value fields to position and
resize your image. For background images, click and drag to fill the full layout area. See the note below
for more information on positioning techniques.
11. If needed, re-order the items in your layout by clicking and dragging items in the item list (under the
Add new item link).
For example, if you added your background image after adding a video source, the background
image conceals the video source. To fix it, drag the video source item above the background
image item in the list, or vice-versa.
12. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
Other things you may want to add to your layout:
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Add a text overlay (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
219
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
Adding a static or dynamic text overlay to your custom channel is an easy way to customize your stream.
This topic covers:
l Custom overlay text (static)
l Custom overlay text (dynamic)
You can add an overlay to a layout on an existing channel or you can create a new channel. If you're not sure
how to create a channel or a layout, start by reviewing the first few steps in the topic Custom channel layout
editor or start with Create a simple channel.
220
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
Custom overlay text (static)
In a custom layout, you can manually input your overlay text, such as date and time, channel name or other
personalized text. This text remains static and requires manually editing within the custom layout to change.
To add custom overlay text to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. From the channel layout editor, click Add item; a drop down box appears. (If you have any other items
already in your layout, the new item appears at the top of the list.)
4. Use the item type drop down box to select Text; the Text settings box appears and the layout area is
updated with the text overlay.
221
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
5. In the Text field, specify the overlay text you want to add to the layout. Use your own text and see the
Overlay text shortcut codes table provided at the end of this procedure to add any combination of the
shortcut codes.
For example: Use this string:
%A %B %d, %G. Live streaming channel Auto A.
to obtain these results (Friday June 23, 2017. Live streaming channel Auto A.):
6. Select the Font, Font size, and Text color. You can also change the default Line spacing in
percentages. For a mono-spaced font, use Droid Sans Mono.
7.
Limitations: The maximum supported text size is 500 px. Padding values must not
exceed the frame size. Do not enter negative padding values.
222
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
8. Resize the overlay text box using the padding settings.
9.
The handles on the corner of the overlay text box are not click-and-drag and do not
resize the text box. To resize the text box, use the padding fields to add space above,
below, and on either side of the text.
10. In the layout area, click and drag the overlay text box using a mouse to move the text box or enter
values in the manual position value fields along the side and bottom of the layout area. See the note at
the end of this procedure for more information on positioning techniques.
11. If needed, re-order the items in your layout by clicking and dragging items in the item list (under the
Add new item link).
For example, if you added your overlay text before adding a video source, the video source
conceals the overlay text. To fix it, drag the overlay text item above the video source item in the
list, or vice-versa.
12. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
223
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
Table 31 Overlay text shortcut codes
Field
Value
Example
date
%F
2012-01-26
year
%G
2012
month (01)
%m
01
month (Jan)
%b
Jan
month (January)
%B
January
day of the month
%d
26
weekday (Thu)
%a
Thu
weekday (Thursday)
%A
Thursday
time
%T
08:40:45
hour
%k
08
minute
%M
40
second
%S
45
millisecond
%#m
378
channel name
%c
Camera Feed 1
Custom overlay text (dynamic)
If you intend your overlay text to change throughout the course of your streaming and/or recording program,
you can use Pearl-2's HTTP API to insert and update system-wide variables in your dynamic text field as
required. For example, you may insert a system variable into your layout to represent GPS co-ordinates and
then use a script to continuously update the co-ordinates contained in your variable as the exact physical
location in your stream changes over time.
System variable commands can be issued at a frequency of 5 per second, and up to 6 variables may be set in
a single command. After issuing a set command, all channels using the specified variable(s) are updated.
See Control with HTTP commands to learn how to configure system variables for custom overlay text.
To insert a system variable into your overlay text:
1. Access the overlay text feature in your custom layout by following steps 1–5 in Custom overlay text
(static) above.
224
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay (custom channel)
For example, in the layout below, "gpsvar1" (variable name) contains the text "N103 68201
W765 29712". Inserting the variable name in the text overlay field displays the variable's value
in the custom layout.
To insert the "gpsvar1" variable into your custom layout, simple type %(gpsvar1) into the Text
field under the Text settings header.
If you use a non-monospaced font, the size of the text overlay changes depending on the
characters in the content and the number of characters. To maintain a consistent size for the text
overlay in the layout area, use a monospaced font and make sure the number of characters
doesn't change.
Other things you may want to add to your layout:
l Add a video source (custom channel)
l Add an audio source (custom channel)
l Custom crop a source
l Add an image (custom channel)
l Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
l Set the background color (custom channel)
l Rename a layout (custom channel)
225
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set the background color (custom channel)
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1. using the mouse
2. using the keyboard
3. using the manual positioning values with percents
4. using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom channel) for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels
(custom channel) for more information.
Set the background color (custom channel)
When you create a custom channel layout, you can select the background color to fill any unused space. For
example you can add a color from your corporate color scheme.
226
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
To add a picture to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. From the channel layout editor, click the drop down arrow next to the existing (by default black)
background color; the color picker opens.
4. Pick a new color or type in an RGB value in the field; the color is updated in the layout area.
5. Click anywhere off the color picker to close the picker.
6. When your layout is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save to save your work.
Resize and position layout items using percents or pixels (custom
channel)
You can position and resize layout items (images, overlay text, sources) using the percent/pixel adjustment
boxes in a channel's custom layout. See Resize layout items and Position layout items.
There are 3 adjustment boxes along your layout's horizontal axis and another 3 boxes along the vertical axis.
You can enter percent or pixel values into checked adjustment boxes (bordered with red) to position and
resize your item(s).
Percent values are used in adjustment boxes by default, and can be converted to pixels by simply overwriting
the percent value in a given adjustment box and replacing it with a pixel value.
227
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
When entering percent values, ensure the suffix "%" is added to your value (i.e. "20%").
When entering pixel values, ensure the suffix "px" is added to your value (i.e. "200px"). A
layout item's total pixel dimensions are a reflection of your channel's frame size, as
configured in your encoding settings (see Configure encoding ).
Unchecked boxes are grayed-out in color and are not directly editable but dynamically change their values to
reflect a 100% total of either the horizontal or vertical axis, depending on values entered in adjacent
adjustment boxes. See the Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning table below for more
information.
The values contained in checked boxes (bordered with red) are anchored and do not dynamically adjust their
values.
228
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
Table 32 Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning
Item
Description
The area of your layout item. The 4 red/white dots represent the boundaries of your layout item.
1
There may be some black space between your item and its boundaries if Keep aspect ratio
when scaling is enabled (see Add an image (custom channel)).
2
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from left to right on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 20%, or 200px, to the right).
If using percents, this value is the item's percentage of total width on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item takes up 60% of the layout's width – represented by a thin red bar above the
3
percent box).
If using pixels, this value is the item's width, in pixels, with a maximum pixel width (i.e. frame
size) identified in your channel's encoding settings Configure encoding .
4
5
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from right to left on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 20%, or 200px, to the left).
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from the bottom upward on the layout's
horizontal axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 10%, or 100px, from the bottom up).
If using percents, this is the items percentage of total height on the layout's vertical axis.
(I.e. the item takes up 80% of the layout's height – represented by a thin red bar to the left of the
6
percent box).
If using pixels, this value is the item's height, in pixels, with a maximum pixel width (i.e. frame
size) identified in your channel's encoding settings Configure encoding .
7
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from the top downward on the layout's
vertical axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 10%, or 200px, from the top down).
Resize layout items
The easiest way to resize a layout item is to use the center adjustment boxes (annotated as #3 and #6 in
the image above) on each of the horizontal and vertical axes to set your item's width and height respectively.
You can also use your mouse cursor to select the corners and manipulate them into the size you want. Hold
the shift key while doing so to keep the frame size constant. If you need to crop your image, see Custom crop
a source.
229
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
In the example above, the presenter video source is resized to 60% of the layout's width and 70% of the
layout's height (with aspect ratio maintained). (Alternatively, pixels could be used to resize the layout item in a
similar fashion.)
An important consideration when resizing layout items
Your item will resize automatically if both left and right (or top and bottom) adjustment boxes contain values
(percents or pixels) that exceed the total of 100% (if using percents), or maximum pixel count (if using pixels)
for the corresponding horizontal (or vertical) axis.
For example, if you originally set the width of an item to 50% of the layout area (or 960 pixels, assuming your
item has a maximum width of 1920 pixels in this example) with no values entered in the left and right
adjustment boxes (i.e. the left and right boxes are deselected), the item automatically centers itself in the
layout area with the left and right percents at 25% each (remember – percents are used by default in the
layout editor, even if pixels are used in adjacent boxes). Combined with the 50% (960px) width of the image,
these two 25% (480px) values total 100% (1920px) of the layout's horizontal axis.
If you instead decide to enable the left and right percent boxes and change their values to 30% each (instead
of the current 25%), then the image's width shrinks from 50% (960px) to 40% (750px) to accommodate the
change and maintain a total layout width of 100% (1920px).
230
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
Setting the left and right (or top and bottom) percent values so the axis total among the
three percent boxes exceeds 100% will always result in the center percent box value
automatically reducing itself to maintain the 100% total, shrinking your selected layout
item in the process.
Position layout items
Items are positioned in a custom layout by entering values into the left/right and top/bottom adjustment
boxes (identified as #2/4 and #5/7 respectively in the Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning
table above). The values entered into these boxes represent a portion of the total percentage (or pixels) of the
layout's width or height.
Alternatively, you can position your layout items using the keyboard by selecting the item
with your mouse cursor, and pressing the arrow keys to move the selected item by 5% in
any direction.
You can also position your item with additional keyboard precision by holding Ctrl and
pressing the arrow keys to nudge your item by a very small fraction in the direction of
your choice.
Note that there is no one way to move and resize your layout items. The examples below are simply
descriptions of one or two ways one might resize and/or position layout items.
Example 1: horizontal positioning using percents
To position your item along the horizontal axis, first resize your items if desired (as described in Resize layout
items), then enter a percent or pixel value into either the left or the right adjustment box to shift your layout
item.
231
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
For example, using percents to move a layout item with a 60% width as far to the right of the
layout area as possible, you would need to enter 40% into the left percent box to push the item
to the right. The layout item originally takes up 60% of the layout width, so this added 40% shift
pushes the item as far to the right as possible (I.e. 100% of the horizontal axis).
The right adjustment box automatically sets itself to 0% to reflect that there is more no room remaining to
maneuver the image along the horizontal axis any further. (Alternatively, you could reposition the image in
the exact same way by instead setting the right percent box to 0%).
Example 2: vertical positioning using pixels
To position your layout item along the vertical axis, enter a percent or pixel value into either the top or the
bottom adjustment box to shift your layout item downward or upward, respectively.
For example, using pixels to move a layout item that is set to 756px in height to the top of the
layout while leaving a small margin of background (say 25px), you could either enter "25px" into
the top percent box (to specify the small margin from the top down) or enter 27% into the
bottom percent box (to specify a 27% margin from the bottom up – added to the item's 70%
height this leaves a 3% margin above your layout item.)
232
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position layout items using percents or
pixels (custom channel)
As mentioned above, there is no one particular way to use the adjustment boxes for resizing and positioning
of your layout items. The layout editor interface is flexible enough to allow you to manipulate your layout
items any way you see fit. Create the perfect layout for your audience– using percents, pixels, your keyboard
or any combination thereof!
233
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a layout (custom channel)
Figure 1-1 An example of using pixels and percents to created a fully configured custom layout with two sources and a
background image.
Rename a layout (custom channel)
Layouts you create are automatically given a default name (the first one is Default!). You can keep these
names, or you can edit them to something more descriptive.
If you're using the touch screen for Live video mixing / switching
You can rename any layout, even the currently active layout.
To rename a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. From the layout picker, click on the row of the desired layout; the layout appears in the editor below.
234
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
4. From the editor, click the name of the layout; it turns red.
5. Type in your new layout name and press Enter to save the new name. (Note if you click somewhere
else without pressing Enter, your changes are discarded.)
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
Your custom channel can have multiple layouts. The order they are listed in the Admin panel is also the order
they are presented on the touch screen. It's simple to re-order layouts, remove layouts you're not using any
more, and to duplicate layouts.
Reorder layouts
To move a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. In the layout selector, click and drag the icon with the three horizontal bars at the left side of the row to
rearrange the order of your layouts.
You can delete any layout except the currently active layout.
If you're planning to use live switching, we strongly recommend you rename the channel rather
than using the default channel name (Rename a channel). See the note at the bottom of this
235
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout (custom channel)
topic to avoid streaming and recording issues resulting from adding or deleting layouts when live
switching.
Delete layouts
To delete a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor to get to the channel layout editor.
3. Click the X at the right side of the row for the layout you want to delete; the system prompts you to
make sure you want to delete the layout.
4. Click OK to proceed; the layout is deleted.
When using the switcher on Epiphan Live, refresh your browser if you still see a layout that was
deleted. The deleted layout should disappear.
Duplicate layouts
To duplicate a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor to get to the channel layout editor.
3. Click the double folder icon at the right side of the row for the layout you want to duplicate; a duplicate
of the layout is added at the bottom of the list.
Important note for channels with multiple layouts
By default (and historically), Pearl-2's channels are named automatically based on the content in the channel.
When a channel has only one layout, and that layout has only one source (regardless of whether or not there
are pictures or overlays in the layout), the channel name is the same as the source name.
236
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete an uploaded image
For example: By default, a channel with one layout that has HDMI-A in it will be named HDMI-A.
When you add a second layout to a channel, the channel name changes to a generic name Channel X (where
X is the channel index number). Normally this wouldn't pose any problem, but the changing name does have
some side effects: the stream is stopped and restarted, and the channel's recorder (if recording) is stopped
and a new file is started.
Furthermore, when you delete layouts in a channel until there is only one layout (with one source) left, the
channel name reverts to the source name.
To avoid any issue with changing channel names on channels where you'll have more than one layout, we
strongly recommend you rename the channel to a custom name (Rename a channel. This will ensure no
automatic channel name changes.
Delete an uploaded image
Images used in custom channel layouts are stored on the system hard drive. You can delete an image after
you are done using it, or to when performing general housekeeping duties on the system.
To delete an uploaded image:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
If the image is used as part of the layout for any channel, select a different image or no
image by using the drop-down list in the Picture settings box within that channel's layout
before deleting the file using the steps below.
3. Click Branding Content under the Configuration menu; the configuration page opens.
237
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure encoding
4. Click Remove; a confirmation dialog box opens.
5. Click OK; the dialog box closes and the image file is removed from the configuration page.
Configure encoding
You can modify the encoding settings for each channel you create. These settings let you perfect your stream
by selecting the right frame size, bit rate, audio/video codecs and more.
This section covers the following encoding topics:
l Configure video codec
l Configure frame size
l Fine tune stream settings
l Configure audio codec
l Codec and file format compatibility
l Multi-Encoding
Configure video codec
To configure encoding:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the Encoding link for your channel; the encoding configuration page opens.
238
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure video codec
3. Click the Codec drop-down menu to change the size and speed of the compression and decompression
and the quality of the image. Choose one of the following options from the Codec drop-down menu.
Value
H.264
Motion JPEG
Description
H.264 is the default value and provides high quality video while using low
bandwidth. This is the preferred codec for the system.
This is suitable for live streaming and video, however may have low quality
images while using high bandwidth. Motion JPEG does not support audio.
4. If the selected codec is Motion JPEG, you can configure the Page refresh time. Specify a time in a
seconds.
5. If the selected codec is H.264 (default), click Video encoding preset to define how the video stream is
encoded. Choose one of the following:
Value
Description
Hardware
This is the default H.264 encoding preset. Choose this setting for best
Accelerated
performance.
This matches the default from previous generations of Epiphan products. Choose
Software
this only if you need software encoding or X.264 encoding to match results
created with previous generations of Epiphan products or firmware.
6. If the selected codec is H.264 (default), click Video encoding profile to limit or include video formats
that are supported. Choose one of the following:
Value
Baseline
Main
Description
Choose this option when streaming to an application that requires robustness
and cannot tolerate data loss, for example video-conferencing.
Choose this option for standard-definition broadcasts. This is the default.
Choose this option when video is viewed for broadcast and disk storage
High
applications, particularly for high definition television application such as Blu-ray
disk storage format and HDTV broadcast service.
Video encoding profile and preset can be set only when the H.264 codec is selected.
7. If all your changes are complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Apply.
239
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure frame size
Configure frame size
By default, for channels with only one layout and when that layout has only one video source, your Pearl-2
automatically uses the incoming source frame size as the stream frame size. Frame size greatly affects the
amount of bandwidth needed to transmit your stream. The larger the frame size, the more bandwidth you
need to stream it. So you may want to keep the frame size the same as your source, or you may want to apply
upscaling, downscaling, stretching, or black bar framing, depending on your needs.
For example:
l if the input signal resolution is 1920×1080 (a 16:9 aspect ratio)
l and stream frame size is set to another 16:9 frame size such as 1280×720,
the smaller stream frame size causes the system to downscale the image and use less bandwidth to
transmit.
Or if you have a widescreen/HD format source but need a 4:3 output frame size, you can add black bars to
the top and bottom of the frame.
The system is designed to provide scaling, however for the best overall system performance
(particualrly when reaching maximum system capacity), configure your source to provide the
correct frame size and avoid scaling.
To configure your stream's frame size:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click Encoding for the your channel; the encoding configuration page opens.
3. Scroll to the Frame size section.
4. Perform one of the following steps:
Using current signal resolution as the frame size only works for channel layouts with a
single source. If you're using multiple sources, follow the steps below to set your frame
size.
a. Check the Use current signal resolution as the frame size check box. Enabling this feature
greys out the other frame-size configuration fields. The system automatically streams at the
frame size of the input signal. 240
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure frame size
If you change the frame size (resolution) of the input signal after streaming (or
recording) begins your may see interrupted streaming and recording. Enabling this
feature is not recommended for systems where input resolution is changed
frequently.
b. Change the frame size, follow the steps below.
5. Set the Frame size values to reflect the dimensions required for your stream. Some suggested values
cover popular resolutions of cameras and display devices such as monitors, but you may also specify
something custom:
a. Uncheck Use current signal resolution as frame size.
b. Type a frame size in the field; or
c. Select an option from the sizes shown, the dimensions will appear in the frame size field.
Scaling occurs automatically (no extra configuration needed) when you make the
dimensions larger, smaller, or a different aspect ratio than the source.
If you have unchecked all the manual resizing and positioning boxes in the custom layout
editor and you downscale the video source using the frame size setting on the Encoding
tab (for example, select 1280×720 frame size for a full HD video source), then the source
appears cropped within the frame instead of scaling to fit the frame.
241
Pearl-2 User Guide
Fine tune stream settings
If your channel has a layout with only one source and your source and stream aspect ratios
differ, when viewing that layout, your source is centered in the frame and matte bars are
added to the top and bottom or left and right sides to make up the difference. See
Remove black bars (matte) from the video.
6. If all your changes are complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Apply.
If you plan to use layout switching during a live stream, it's best to choose a fixed layout size. This
avoids causing the stream restart due to frame size change when you switch between singlesource layouts that use frame sizes.
Fine tune stream settings
Along with video/audio codecs and frame size, there are other configurable stream settings that affect quality
and bandwidth. Like with frame size selection, values for these settings can be a tradeoff between bandwidth
available and quality for stream viewers.
A table at the end of this section provides additional guidance for the settings
To fine tune your stream's settings :
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click Encoding for your channel; the encoding configuration page opens.
3. Scroll to the Key frame interval setting.
4. Click the Key frame interval drop-down box to choose how often a key frame (a frame that contains
all the pixels) is sent when streaming the video. The longer the key frame interval the smaller the video
file size, and vice versa.
5. If desired, change the Limit frame rate. The default should be adequate in most applications. While
decreasing the limit may improve system performance, you may need to test different values to
balance video smoothness and processing power.
6. If using H.264 video codec, you can increase or decrease image quality by increasing or decreasing the
target Bitrate value. Video with a high level of motion and high resolution, such as a sporting event,
requires a high bitrate.
7. If all your changes are complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Apply.
Table 33 Stream settings guidance
Setting
Description
Key frame interval
The key frame interval feature specifies how often a key frame (a frame
242
Pearl-2 User Guide
Setting
Fine tune stream settings
Description
that contains all the pixels) is sent when streaming the video. This setting
also impacts how quickly a video moves through the frames when a
viewer uses the search function of their media player.
Increasing the number of seconds between key frames can significantly
reduce your bandwidth and system resource usage with minor impact to
your video quality. A good rule of thumb is to keep the interval between 2
to 3 seconds and decrease the key frame interval as the motion increases.
Try different settings and note changes in the video quality. If your video
quality is poor and jittery you may need to decrease the interval between
key frames. If you have unlimited bandwidth and system resources you
can choose an option to stream key frames only.
Frame rate reflects the number of images captured by the device per
second. Reducing the frame rate reduces bandwidth usage, and vice versa.
The system's ability to maintain a set frame rate is based on several
factors, for example:
l overall system load affects the ability for the device to process
pixels;
Frame rate
l available network bandwidth;
l the source and stream frame size (resolution);
l the type of motion that is captured; and
l number of users accessing the stream.
When adjusting the frame rate, you may need to try different values to
achieve the best outcome.
In general, higher bitrate mean higher image quality in the stream, at the
cost of higher bandwidth needed to transmit it.
For comparison against something you are likely familiar with, an HD Blu-
Bitrate
ray video is typically in the range of 20 mbps, standard-definition DVD is
usually 6 mbps.
If you don't know what value to use, a good place to start is 5000 kbps (slightly less than a typical DVD). Test to see how this works for your
viewers and adjust.
243
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure audio codec
Configure audio codec
If your channel sources included audio (see Create a simple channel or Create a custom channel), your stream
will by default use the AAC audio codec at 48 kHz. You can modify this setting to best match your streaming
or post-processing needs.
To configure your stream's audio codec :
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click Encoding for the your channel; the encoding configuration page opens.
3. Scroll to the Audio settings section.
4. Ensure the Enable audio checkbox is checked.
5. If the default audio format AAC 44KHz, stereo, 320 Kbps is not desired, click the Audio format dropdown menu to select an audio codec. A table at the end of this procedure gives details about each
option.
6. Click the Audio channels drop-down menu to choose mono (1 channel) or stereo (2 channels).
If desired, you can choose Mono to have left and right stereo channels combined and
streamed together (i.e. when listening to the streamed audio, the same blended sound will
come through both the left and right channels).
If you have only one mono analog input, use the left XLR / RCA jack and select mono
encoding to have the same sound come from both the left and right channels. (If stereo
sound is chosen, the sound will only come through on the left channel.)
7. Select an Audio bitrate from the drop-down menu. The table at the end of this procedure gives some
guidance on audio bitrates.
244
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure audio codec
For stereo audio, we recommend 256 kbps or 320 kbps.
8. If all your changes are complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Apply.
Table 34 Audio codecs and bitrate guidance
Value
Description
AAC is the default audio codec.
This codec is comparable to MP3, and may have better sound quality with a similar
bit rate. Supported values are 16, 22, 44 and 48K kHz. Most digital signals (HDMI
or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio.
AAC
Matching the encoded level with the source level provides the best sound quality
by avoiding audio resampling. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides higher sampling.
The maximum bitrate for mono encoding of a 44 kHz signal is 264 kbps. For stereo,
320 kbps is supported. Note that lower bitrates (e.g. 32 kbps) with a 44 kHz signal
may result in distorted audio.
MP3 provides a common audio format for audio storage.
Supported values are 22 kHz, 44 kHz and 48 kHz. Most digital signals (HDMI
or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio. Matching the encoded level with the source level
MP3
provides the best sound quality by avoiding audio resampling. For analog signals,
44 kHz provides higher sampling.
Flash (FLV) doesn't support 48 kHz MP3 audio. When selecting this
value you'll need to use a media player to preview your channel.
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is a standard for digital audio in computer and other
devices such as, digital telephone systems.
Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio. Matching the encoded
PCM
level with the source level provides the best sound quality by avoiding audio
resampling. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides higher sampling.
Flash (FLV) doesn't support 48 kHz PCM audio. When selecting this
value you'll need to use a media player to preview your channel.
245
Pearl-2 User Guide
Codec and file format compatibility
Codec and file format compatibility
Not all streaming and recording protocols support all combinations of video and audio codecs. Use the tables
below to determine what settings work for your streaming and recording needs.
The following table displays the compatibility between the video/audio codecs and formats supported for
streaming.
Table 35 Video/audio codecs and formats for streaming
Video Codec selected
Audio Codec selected
RTSP
FLV
MPEG-TS
MJPEG
H.264
No audio codec
ü
ü
ü
H.264
PCM
ü
ü
H.264
MP3
ü
ü
ü
H.264
AAC
ü
ü
ü
MJPEG
No audio codec
ü
The following table displays the compatibility between the video/audio codecs and formats supported for
recording.
Table 36 Video/audio codecs and formats for recording
Video Codec
Audio Codec selec-
selected
ted
H.264
No audio codec
H.264
MP4 and
MP4-Frag-
AVI
MOV
MPEG-TS
ü
ü
ü
ü
PCM
ü
ü
ü
H.264
MP3
ü
ü
ü
ü
H.264
AAC
ü
ü
ü
ü
MJPEG
No audio codec
ü
ü
ü
ü
mented
Multi-Encoding
Pearl-2, in addition to multi-publishing, allows for a process called multi-encoding. Use it if you wish to:
l Record a video at a high bitrate and frame size while streaming the same video online at a lower
encoding settings,
246
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multi-Encoding
l Record channel while also sending two or more streams of the same channel at different encoding
settings for CDNs that don't use adaptive bitrate,
l Or record the same channel simultaneously in 4K and HD.
Multi-encoding has versatile and broad-use functionality.
As an example, take a scenario where you want to record a video at 1080p and 8 Mbps, while simultaneously
streaming the same video online 720p and 1 Mbps. Follow these steps:
1. Create Channel 1 with your video and audio inputs. Add all your live switching layouts.
2. Configure a video output port to display your channel.
3. Connect an HDMI cable from the video output port into an available HDMI port on Pearl-2.
4. Create Channel 2 with just one layout and add the new HDMI source you connected in step 3.
5. For Channel 2's audio source, choose the HDMI source you connected in step 3.
6. Set encoding and streaming settings for channel 2.
You can also do this using RTSP sources. Set up your first channel to record, same as in the example above,
then follow the instructions to . You can use your Pearl-2’s IP address as the RTSP source, and select that as
the source on your second channel. Follow these steps:
1. Create Channel 1 with your video and audio inputs. Add all your live switching layouts.
2. Copy the RTSP stream link from Channel 1's status page. (See image below)
3. Add a new RTSP source using the link copied in step 2.
4. Create Channel 2 with just one layout and add the new RTSP source you created in step 3. (See image
below.)
5. For Channel 2's audio source, choose the RTSP source you created in step 3.
6. Set encoding and streaming settings for channel 2.
247
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add channel metadata
Using this process, you can again use the same video you’re recording on Channel 2, and stream it at a
different bitrate and frame size.
For a different process that helps you accomplish similar goals, you can learn about a multi-publishing Stream
Add channel metadata
Adding company information to metadata is an easy way to identify and copy protect your broadcast or
recording.
This section describes the following topics for customizing your channel:
l Add channel metadata
l Remove metadata from a channel
Previous firmware versions gave the ability to configure "No Signal" images per channel. "No
Signal" images are now done on a per-source basis instead . See Add a No Signal image to a
source .
Add channel metadata
Using the Branding feature, you can apply a logo to your channel and specify the following meta data that the
media player displays for your viewers:
l title of the presentation;
l company website;
248
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove metadata from a channel
l presenter’s name;
l copyright date or other labels such as proprietary information, preliminary etc; and
l additional information about the broadcast, such as time of the broadcast, or change to the schedule.
To apply channel metadata:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, select a channel; the menu expands.
4. Click the Branding link for your channel; the Branding configuration page opens.
5. Enter metadata such as: presentation title, presenter name(s), any copyright dates and additional
information about the broadcast that you want the viewer to know. How metadata is displayed
depends on the media player. For example VLC stores the metadata in a media information file, while
other media players scroll the text horizontally from right to left along the bottom of the media player
window, similar to a ticker message bar.
6. Click Apply.
Remove metadata from a channel
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, select a channel; the menu expands.
4. Click the Branding menu option; the Branding configuration page opens.
5. Scroll to the Content metadata section.
6. Click the Author, Copyright or Comments field.
7. Highlight the text and press delete on the keyboard. The field is empty.
8. Click Apply.
249
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview a channel
Preview a channel
While configuring a channel in the Admin panel, you may want to open a live preview of the channel in
another tab or browser window so you can see the changes as they are applied. Choose one of the following
options to preview your channel:
l Preview a channel from the Info page
l Preview a channel from the Status page
l Preview all channels at once
You can also preview channels using the Epiphan Live control interface. See Configuring
Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring for more information.
Preview a channel from the Info page
The system's Info page displays links for previewing your channel(s). This fast and simple method allows you
to see link for all the streams in a single location.
To preview a channel from the Info page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. From the Admin panel, click Info from the Configuration menu option; the information window opens .
250
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview a channel from the Status page
3. Scroll to the channel you want to preview.
4. Click View; the corresponding channel is displayed in the window.
Preview a channel from the Status page
The channel's status page gives a wealth of information about the channel, including bit rate, frame size, a
snapshot of the channel and links to preview the channel.
To preview a channel from the Status page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the link for Channel you want to preview, the menu expands.
3. Click Status; the channel's Status page opens.
4. Scroll down to see the snapshot.
5. Right-click the Live Broadcast link and select Open in a new Tab or Open in a new Window; a tab
or window opens displaying a preview of the channel.
251
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview all channels at once
Preview all channels at once
Pearl-2 has a special preview mode that lets you see all configured channels at once.
The resulting web page can be very large. You may wish to be aware of your web browser's zoom
hot keys. Many browsers will zoom out with Ctrl-- (control minus) and zoom in with Ctrl-= (control
equals).
To preview all channels at the same time:
1. Open a new browser window.
2. Type the following string into the address bar of your web browser on your admin computer (ipaddress
is the IP address of your Pearl-2).
http://<ip address of Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?
For example: http://172.20.1.33/preview.cgi?
3. Press Enter, the preview web page appears displaying the content of all active channels.
Rename a channel
By default, channels are created with the same name as their source - until a second layout or a second source
is added to the channel, at which time the channel is renamed Channel X where X is the index of the channel.
However there may be circumstances when you want to create a distinct name for the channel to reflect the
source(s) it contains.
Auto channels initially have the channel name Auto A and Auto B, but if you change the source to
something other than an automatic source, the name of the channel changes to reflect the new
source.
To rename a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels menu option.
4. Click on the channel you want to rename; the menu expands.
5. Click any link for the channel; the corresponding channel status or configuration page opens.
You can change a channel's name from any of it's configuration pages.
252
Pearl-2 User Guide
Duplicate a channel
3. Click the channel name at the top of the channel configuration page; the name text becomes red to
indicate that it is editable.
4. Highlight the old name and press backspace or delete on the keyboard.
5. Type the new name, using alphanumeric characters. It's recommended (but not mandatory) that you
use underscores to separate words, if needed.
6. Press Enter on the keyboard. The name is updated at the top of the screen and in the list of Channels in
the navigation menu.
You must press the Enter key on the keyboard for the change to take effect.
Duplicate a channel
You can duplicate any channel you've created. All settings in the channel you duplicate are recreated.
To duplicate a channel, follow the steps below.
1. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels menu option.
2. Click the channel you want to delete; the menu expands.
3. Click Status; the Status page opens displaying the service state and stream info for the channel.
253
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a channel
4. Click Duplicate this channel. The duplicate channel is created and assigned the next channel number
in your list of channels.
Delete a channel
From time to time you may want to clean up the list of channels, and remove channels that are no longer
used. The following steps describe how to delete a channel. Deleting a channel does not delete the input
source configuration, however it deletes any recorded files for the channel.
To delete a channel, follow the steps below.
1. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels menu option.
2. Click the channel you want to delete; the menu expands.
3. Click Status; the Status page opens displaying the service state and stream info for the channel.
4. Click Delete this channel; a confirmation dialog box appears to remind you that all recorded files for
this channel will be removed.
You cannot undo this command.
5. Click OK to continue or Cancel to stop. If you proceed, a message indicating that the channel was
successfully deleted appears at the top of the page.
254
Pearl-2 User Guide
Live video mixing / switching
Live video mixing / switching
Pearl-2 supports live video mixing (also known as live video switching) while you are capturing, streaming and
recording. Video mixing is a great way to create dynamic content for your viewers and recordings. With Pearl2, switching happens in less than half a second ( < 500 ms)!
This means you can start your stream with a video source showing a countdown, move to a single-camera
view, then switch between multiple cameras or multiple layouts with more than one source, and end again
with a thank you message for attendees. (Layout switches made in your channel are reflected in both the live
stream and recording. )
For example, your stream could look like this:
Before you can switch between layouts, make sure you have your custom channel with layouts created. See
Create a custom channel or layout.
Now on to the fun part! There are three ways to perform live switching. You can use the Admin panel, the touch screen or the Epiphan
Live control interface.
Performing live switching in one interface (e.g. Epiphan Live) does not dynamically update
the visuals in the other interfaces (e.g. the Admin panel and Pearl-2's touch screen).
Allother interfaces must be manually refreshed to accurately reflect the current live
switching layout information.
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
Switching live video inputs, or video mixing, is simple and intuitive using Pearl-2's touch screen. Simply scroll to
the channel you want to work on, select the layout switching mode and apply the layout you want to use.
By default layout control is enabled for the touch screen, but it's possible your touch screen has been
configured by the administrator to prevent layout switching, or even channel monitoring. If the instructions
below don't work for you, see Block (or allow) recording, streaming and switching from the touch screen for
details on enabling layout control by the touch screen.
To switch video using the touch screen:
255
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
1. If needed, touch the screen once to turn it on.
2. If needed, touch your channel in the grid view to change it to individual view.
3. If needed, touch the screen once to enable controls on the screen.
4. Touch the button to start layout switching mode; the screen changes to display your layouts.
256
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
5. Initially, your live layout (which is displayed on the right side) is the same as your preview, or on deck,
layout. It appears in the list at the bottom with a green bar on the frame to show it is in preview. Touch
any other layout; the touchscreen updates to show your new layout in preview.
257
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
6. Both the live layout and the preview layouts update at a reduced frame rate to the live stream, but fast
enough that you can see what is happening.
7. When ready, touch Apply to cause the layout currently in preview to become live; the switch happens
and your screen is updated.
8. Continue to switch layouts as needed for the duration of your event or recording.
9. Touch Back to return to the individual view screen at any time or when you are done video mixing.
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
Switching live video inputs, or video mixing, is fast and easy using the Admin panel. For best results, you may
wish to be in a location where you can see the live action, and have a solid understanding idea of what is in
each of your layouts. Good layout names can help with this. See Rename a layout (custom channel).
To do live video mixing:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Custom channel layout editor or Create a custom channel or layout to get to the
channel layout editor.
3. The currently active layout has a red button in the right-most column.
4. Touch the empty circle for another layout to make it the active layout; the layout changes in the live
stream (and recording), and the new row gets the red button.
5. Continue to switch layouts as needed for the duration of your event or recording.
258
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
Epiphan Live is a simple and easy to use interface which is used for confidence monitoring,
streaming/recording control and live switching. (See Epiphan Live for more information.)
Within Epiphan Live, the Switcher view allows you to seamlessly switch between a channel's custom layouts
while live streaming and/or recording.
To switch a layout while live streaming and/or recording using Epiphan Live:
1. Log in to Epiphan Live; the Dashboard view opens by default. See Accessing Epiphan Live.
2. Click the Menu icon in the upper-right corner of the Dashboard screen and click Switcher to navigate
to the Switcher interface.
3. Click the text box next to the "Switcher" header and select your desired channel from the dropdown
list (the text box will appear blank if this is your first time configuring the Switcher interface). Note that
in the channel dropdown list, channels containing only a single layout are grayed-out and are not
selectable.
259
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
After selecting your channel from the dropdown, the Switcher interface appears with all of your
channel's layouts displayed along the bottom of the page.
The layout currently being streaming and/or recorded is displayed in the Live view panel on the right
side of the interface (see Understanding the Switcher interface).
4. Click on your desired layout at the bottom of the page to dock it in the Preview panel. This is the
layout that will be switched into your live stream/recording.
260
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
5. Click the Switch button in the center of the screen to switch your layout in the Preview panel into
your live stream/recording.
261
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is a source?
What is a source?
A source can be an image, video, or audio from a camera, a computer screen or any device that provides any
HDMI, DVI, SDI, USB video signal and audio signal output.
You can also connect RTSP sources such as IP cameras and other Pearl-2 systems to your Pearl-2 over a
network using the Admin panel. See Connect an RTSP source.
Video sources
The Admin panel automatically discovers all video source ports and displays them in the Sources section of
the Admin panel. RTSP sources need to be added manually to display in the Sources section (see Connect an
RTSP source). When an RTSP source is added, a corresponding audio sources is always added to your custom
layout editor (regardless of whether or not the RTSP stream actually contains any audio). See Add an audio
source (custom channel).
Video sources are also displayed on the Epiphan Live control interface. See Monitoring
video and audio sources for more information.
Each video input on the back of the system is identified by an A or B and input type (HDMI, SDI, USB video).
For example the SDI input labeled A appears as SDI-A in the Web UI. Input sources display their captured
images on their respective source page. It is a good practice to view the images from each source to confirm
what is captured. See below.
When a source is connected, the system automatically detects and adjusts the image capture settings at start
up and continues to adjust every 60 seconds during operation (interval is configurable). The system’s goal is to
produce the best quality captured image given the source equipment used. Generally no further
configuration is needed.
If there is no source connected to a specific port or no input stream being transmitted from a connected RTSP
source, then the default "No Signal" image will display in any channel where the source is used. You can use
Pearl-2.'s default "No Signal" image for your sources, or you can create your own custom "No Signal" image for
your channels to enhance branding and add professionalism to your display. See Add a No Signal image to a
source .
262
Pearl-2 User Guide
Audio sources
Audio sources
Pearl-2's Admin panel also automatically discovers all audio sources displays them in the same section, with
the exception of RTSP audio sources. When an RTSP input stream is connected to your Pearl-2, a
corresponding audio source is automatically added to the list of audio sources for your channels, even if there
is no audio in the RTSP stream (see Add an audio source (custom channel) for more information).
Audio input devices such as a microphone and portable music players can send audio signals to Pearl-2 using
the XLR or RCA audio input ports at the back of the system. Audio is also supported via HDMI and SDI.
This chapter covers the following sections:
l Connect a source
l Connect an RTSP source
l List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras
l Connect an AV.io video grabber
l Preview a source
263
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect a source
l Rename a source
l Configure a source
l Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay
l Add a No Signal image to a source
Connect a source
You can physically connect HDMI, DVI, SDI, USB video sources to Pearl-2 at any time, either before or after the
system is powered on. Similarly you can disconnect a source from a port and even connect a different source
at any time.
You can also connect wireless RTSP sources to your Pearl-2 over a network. Both the RTSP source device and
your Pearl-2 need to be powered on to establish a connection. See Connect an RTSP source for more
information.
Changing the source that is being streamed or recorded can result in the recording stopping or the
stream frame size changing depending on how your channel is configured.
If the frame size changes, viewers may be disconnected and need to re-connect to the stream.
Connect sources to the following input ports on your system:
Table 37 Cable and port connections
Source type
Input port
SDI
SDI port
HDMI (HDCP-protected) or DVI
HDMI port
USB video
USB 3.0 port (rear)
No input port. RTSP sources are connected to your Pearl-2
RTSP
wirelessly over a network and are configured using the
Admin panel. See Connect an RTSP source to learn how to
connect an RTSP source.
Audio
Audio input port (XLR or RCA)
264
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
Connect an RTSP source
You can connect RTSP sources such as IP cameras and other Pearl-2 systems to your Pearl-2 over a network
using the Admin panel.
RTSP video encoding is supported with H.264 video codec and MP3 or AAC audio formats.
Decoding a 1080p RTSP signal at 30 fps consumes approximately 10% of your Pearl-2's
CPU power. If an RTSP source is connected but unused in any channel, Pearl-2 decodes
only key frames to preserve CPU resources.
To synchronize timestamps between your RTSP source and your Pearl-2, the same time synchronization
server should be used for both devices. It is recommended that you configure an NTP server on your Pearl-2
and use Pearl-2 as a time synchronization server for your RTSP source. See Configure synchronized time (NTP,
PTP v1 and RDATE).
Due to the nature of external encoding devices such as RTSP sources, it is possible for the timestamps
between your Pearl-2 and your RTSP source to gradually become out of sync. If there is a 2500 –3000 ms
timestamp difference between your RTSP source and your Pearl-2, then a "no signal" image will display and
your RTSP source will not stream any audio. Re-connecting your RTSP source resets any time synchronization
issues.
To connect an RTSP source to your Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Under the Source header, click Add source to open the IP sources page.
265
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
3. Click Add RTSP source to open the source configuration page.
266
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
You can rename the source by clicking on the default source name at the top of the page
("RTSP 1" in the screenshot above). See Rename a source for more information.
4. Under the Settings header, fill out the Source URL, Username and Password fields with information
configured from your source RTSP device (see List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras for source URL
syntax and credentials specific to IP cameras we at Epiphan have tested), and select either UDP or TCP
from the Preferred transport dropdown menu.
Optionally, you can also fill out the "No signal" image settings, if desired. See Add a No Signal image to a
source for more information.
See Stream content using HTTP or RTSP if using another Pearl-2 as an RTSP source.
267
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
5. Click Apply to save your settings and connect your RTSP source.
Once your RTSP source is connected, you can view its basic video and audio signal information and packet loss
statistics under the Status header at the top of the page. If there are any warnings or errors associated with
your RTSP stream, they are also displayed here.
268
Pearl-2 User Guide
List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras
Alternatively, you can view stream connection information by clicking the check link under the Stream info
header at the bottom of the page.
List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras
The table below describes cameras tested to work with your Pearl-2 and includes helpful information such as
URL syntax, default credentials and audio streaming capability specific to each camera.
Your Pearl-2 is compatible with all ethernet-based IP cameras and other RTSP sources. The
cameras listed in the table below are a sample of common third-party cameras that have
been tested to work with Pearl-2.
The URL syntax in the table below refers to the additional piece of text that needs to be included in the source
URL to connect your IP camera to your Pearl-2. (See Connect an RTSP source to learn how to connect an RTSP
source (like an IP camera) using the Admin panel.)
269
Pearl-2 User Guide
List of tested RTSP-based IP cameras
For example, to connect a Sony SRG300SE camera with an IP address of "192.168.0.160", your source
URL needs to be entered as:
"rtsp://192.168.0.160/video1"
Or, if using a Q-See QCN8029Z camera, your source URL needs to be entered as:
"rtsp://192.168.0.160/"
Table 38 List of tested IP cameras
Default
Brand
Model
Image
URL syntax
Audio?
username
and
password
admin
Q-See
QCN8029Z
/
No
admin
admin
Sony
SRG300SE
/video1
Yes
admin
/MediaInput/h264/stream_
1
Panasonic
AWHE40HPK⁑
(To add a second URL, use:
admin
Yes
12345
"/MediaInput/h264/stream_
2")
root
Axis
P1428-E
/axis-media/media.amp
No
root
root
Axis
M1034-W
/axis-media/media.amp
Yes
admin
⁑
Note that in our testing, the Panasonic AW-HE40
does not always seem to sync its time with Pearl-2.
270
Pearl-2 User Guide
List of fully supported Web cameras
List of fully supported Web cameras
Pearl-2 is expected to support any web camera or USB audio source (such as a USB microphone) on the
market, and have full functionality regardless of the brand and model. The web cameras listed below are fully
supported and tested. Web cameras not on the list are still likely to work, but if you experience difficulties with
one of them, try one of these models.
Table 39 List of tested Web cameras
l Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920 (Max video mode: 1920x1080@30)
l Logitech C925e (Max video mode: 1920x1080@30)
l Microsoft LifeCam Studio (Max video mode: 1280x720@30)
l Microsoft LifeCam HD-3000 (Max video mode: 1280x720@30)
l IPEVO Ziggi-HD Plus
For the Ziggi-HD Plus web camera, enable the power line frequency setting in the web camera
before connecting the camera to Pearl-2.
When you Configure a source, Pearl-2 the Default video mode is not necessarily achievable
for that web camera. For instance, a camera might have a Default mode of 1080p but have a
Maximum video mode of 720p. If no settings are changed, the camera simply outputs video at
720p.
Not all settings are used for all cameras. Any settings not used are greyed out in the menu and
unavailable to change.
Connect an AV.io video grabber
You can connect an Epiphan AV.io frame grabber to a USB input port just the same as you would connect a
web camera.
Pearl-2 treats the video source from the frame grabber just like any other video source.
271
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview a source
Use AV.io frame grabbers to connect extra HDMI, DVI, or SDI sources. Using AV.io HD, you can add up to two
VGA sources to Pearl-2.
You can set up and operate frame grabbers using the same Configure a source
l AV.io HD: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-hd/Content/Home-AVioHD.htm
l AV.io SDI: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-sdi/Content/Home-AVioSDI.htm
l AV.io 4K: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-4k/Content/Home-AVio4K.htm
Preview a source
You can preview the images captured from your sources in the Admin panel. No extra configuration is
needed.
You can also preview your sources using the Epiphan Live control interface. See
Monitoring video and audio sources for more information.
To preview the captured stream/images in the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Ensure a source is connected to the input port, see Connect a source.
4. From the Admin panel, click the source name from the Sources menu; the source configuration page
opens.
272
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a source
5. Scroll to the bottom of the source configuration page to see the preview.
Configure a source
Generally the captured stream doesn't require any additional configuration, but if needed, you can log into
the Admin panel to make configuration changes.
To configure a source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Ensure a source is connected to the input port, see Connect a source.
4. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Sources menu option.
273
Pearl-2 User Guide
DVI and HDMI signals
5. Click the source link for your source (HDMI, SDI, USB video or RTSP); the source configuration page
opens
6. If desired, scroll to the bottom of the source configuration page to see the video Snapshot.
7. Make note of the name of the source, or optionally, change the source name to reflect the data it is
capturing. You'll need to know this name to add the source to a channel. See Create a simple channel.
8. In most cases the video is ready to add to a channel and broadcast. If fine adjustments are required,
refer to the table below to make minor configuration changes.
DVI and HDMI signals
The following options are available for DVI and HDMI signals via the HDMI port:
274
Pearl-2 User Guide
SDI signals
Value
Description
Enable
Enable this feature to convert an interlaced source signal to a non-interlaced
deinterlacing
signal.
Enable 4K
Selecting this option means that your 4K UHD source will be automatically
downscaling4K
downscaled to 1080p using Pearl-2's hardware.
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a No Signal image to a source
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
SDI signals
The following options are available for signals via the SDI port.
275
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB signals
Description
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a No Signal image to a source
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
USB signals
The following options are all potentially available for signals via the USB port. However, some apply only to
certain types or brands of camera, and not all options are available or needed for all cameras.
276
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB signals
Description
This feature is useful for simultaneously dictating the resolution and fps at which
Capture mode
the camera is captured. The drop down list of available resolutions and frame
rates changes depending on the attributes of the connected device.
The brightness of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
Brightness
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
is achieved.
277
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB signals
Description
The contrast of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0 to
Contrast
100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result is
achieved.
The vertical positioning of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical
Vertical shift
value from -64 to 64. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until
desired result is achieved.
The horizontal positioning of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical
Horizontal shift
value from -64 to 64. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until
desired result is achieved.
The saturation of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
Saturation
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
is achieved.
The sharpness of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
Sharpness
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
is achieved.
Powerline
The powerline frequency of the video can be adjusted by selecting the desired
frequency
output from a drop-down list of frequencies available to your source.
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a No Signal image to a source
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
You can add audio gain to your source from this page by selecting the % gain
Audio input gain
from the drop-down list. Estimate values and check the result in the preview area
until desired result is achieved.
If your audio is not synchronized with your video, it can be adjusted from -300 to
Audio delay
300 ms. Estimate values and check the result in the preview area until desired
result is achieved.
278
Pearl-2 User Guide
RTSP sources
RTSP sources
RTSP sources are configured for connection to your Pearl-2 using the Source URL, Username and
Password specific to your selected RTSP source. (See Connect an RTSP source for more information).
RTSP sources can be further configured with a Preferred transport protocol (either UDP or TCP) and a
custom "No signal" image. (See Add a No Signal image to a source ).
Add a No Signal image to a source
By default the system displays a No Signal image when there is no video signal coming in to a source. You can
customize this image to display a different message to your viewers. For example if a viewer logs in early, or if
you are experiencing delays you could indicate the start time (or expected resolution time) using the no signal
image.
Before you can specify a custom no signal image for a source, you must upload it following the procedure To
upload an image.
To set the no signal image for a source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Follow the instructions above (To upload a logo to a channel) to upload an image via the Branding
Content page.
4. From the Admin panel, select your desired source under the Source header; the source configuration
page opens.
5. Select a “No signal” image. This image displays in the channel when the source's signal is not detected.
(If your uploaded image does not appear in the list, ensure it doesn't exceed the maximum file size of
either 1080p or 2160p4K .)
Alternatively, to select an image you can simply drag and drop your chosen picture file to the blank
space below the Image field.
279
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a source
6. In the Timeout field, enter the number of seconds before the "No signal" image is displayed. If no
manual value is entered, the default time to display is 5 seconds.
7. Click Apply.
8. Test that the No Signal image is correctly applied by disconnecting your source and previewing the
channel(s) containing said source. See Preview a channel for more information.
Rename a source
Source names are used when adding sources to channels, therefore it is important that you know the name of
the source you wish to use. If a channel has only one source, the channel name will by default be the same as
its source name and will update automatically when the source name changes.
Sometimes it's helpful to configure the source name to match the data it's capturing so it's clear what the
channel is capturing too. Alternately you can change the channel's name. See Rename a channel.
To change a source name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
280
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay
3. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Sources menu option.
4. Click the desired source link; the source configuration page opens.
5. Click the source name at the top of the page; the name turns red.
6. Highlight and delete the existing source name.
7. Type a new source name.
8. Press Enter (on your keyboard) to save the new name.
You must press Enter to save the new name. The Apply button will not save the source
name change.
Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay
The audio ports on the portable Pearl-2 model are calibrated for + 4.0 dBu XLR or - 10.0 dBV RCA, and provide
moderate to significant signal headroom.
281
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust audio gain (analog audio) and delay
The audio page also allows you to set audio delay. By default, it is set to have 0 ms of delay, but you can
change that number to anywhere between -300 and +300 ms of offset from the original synchronization.
Microphones typically have very low audio signals (less than -30 dBu) and are not supported
directly as inputs to Pearl-2. Use an audio mixing board to amplify microphones to appropriate
levels.
If your audio signals need further adjustment, try checking audio levels through the audio monitor or
VU meter and adjusting as needed. As a rule of thumb, each 10 dB of increased gain doubles perceived
loudness of the audio signal.
To adjust audio settings for gain and delay:
1. Ensure an audio input source is connected to an analog audio input port.
2. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, scroll the Sources section.
4. Select an audio source; the audio configuration page opens.
Both balanced and unbalanced signals are supported - adjust the gain as needed for
unbalanced signals.
"Passive" microphones requiring phantom power are not supported. Supported
microphones require their own external power source, such as a battery.
5. To adjust the relative volume of the audio, click the Input Gain drop-down menu. Select your required
input gain (which, in general terms, increases the perceived volume of your signal). Fine tune as needed
282
Pearl-2 User Guide
Confirm audio levels (via the touch screen)
for your audio levels.
Adjusting the Input Gain adjusts audio levels in the recorded and streamed output as well
as the headphone monitor and through the video output ports (if displaying this channel).
6. You may also make adjustments to Audio delay by clicking on the text box. There, you can type any
number between 300 and -300. After clicking Apply, the timing of the audio is adjusted by that many
milliseconds. Entering a positive value adjusts the audio by shifting the audio to start later in the video,
while entering a negative value adjusts the audio to start earlier. Fine tune as needed to ensure that it's
synchronized with the video.
Pearl-2 does not cause audio delay, and has near-zero latency in capturing. However, many
different external factors can cause audio to become de-synchronized, notably the length
of the audio cables or the configuration of the equipment used. The audio delay features
can help adjust the audio coming from external sources and ensure that your sources are
captured and recorded with proper synchronicity.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm audio levels (via the touch screen)
The touch screen includes an audio meter that indicates audio levels (if any) for each channel. This meter is
visible in both the grid and individual channel view, at the lower left corner of the channel preview. The audio
meter can also be added to the video output ports. See Disable or enable the audio on the video output port.
If you can't see the audio meter on the touch screen, you may need to touch the screen once to turn on
decorations.
283
Pearl-2 User Guide
Confirm audio levels (via the touch screen)
If the channel has stereo audio, the meter is split horizontally into two bars. The top bar is the left channel and
the bottom bar is the right channel.
VU Meter (mono audio)
VU Meter (stereo audio)
To confirm audio signal through the touch screen:
1. If needed, touch the screen once to turn it on.
2. View, from either the grid view or the individual channel view, the colored VU audio meter in the lower
left quadrant of each channel preview.
Table 40 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
284
Pearl-2 User Guide
Troubleshoot capture
Troubleshoot capture
In addition to fine tuning channel settings such as frame rate, resolution and bit rate to ensure optimal use of
resources while streaming a quality video, there may be circumstance when you must fine tune the video
input source.
It's good practice to backup your configuration settings so that you can revert back to a good
configuration if the changes you made are not desirable. See Configuration presets.
The following topics are covered in this section:
l Remove black bars (matte) from the video
l Force the capture card to use a specific EDID
l Unstretch the output video
l Remove the combing effect on images
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
By default, for channels with only one layout and only one source, Pearl-2 makes sure that the aspect ratio of
input signals is preserved when the output is streamed. If an input video signal doesn't match the encoded
frame aspect ratio, bars are added to the sides or top and bottom of the encoded stream when the output is
streamed and recorded. The color of the bars (matte) is defined by the Background color selected on the
Channel sources page. See Create a custom channel.
For example:
l Input signal resolution is 720×480 (a 3:2 aspect ratio)
l encoded resolution is 640×480 (a 4:3 aspect ratio that is narrower than the input resolution)
Borders are added to the top and bottom of the image to preserve the wider ratio of the input.
285
Pearl-2 User Guide
Match the output frame size to the aspect ratio of the
source signal
For example:
l Input signal resolution is 720×480 (a 3:2 aspect ratio)
l encoded resolution is 1280×800 (a 16:10 aspect ratio that is wider than the input resolution)
Borders are added to the left and right of the image to preserve the narrower ratio of the input.
If you are seeing bars on your image but would rather have the image fill the whole screen you have to
options:
1. Change the output frame size to match the aspect ratio of the input.
2. Stretch the image to fit the output frame size aspect ratio.
These two options are described below.
Match the output frame size to the aspect ratio of the source
signal
The frame size is matched only for layouts that have only one source. Note that if you have
layouts with different frame sizes, switching them while live streaming will cause an interruption
and restart of the stream. The same thing happens if you change the resolution of your source
while streaming.
To change the output frame size on channels to match the aspect ratio of the source:
1. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
286
Pearl-2 User Guide
Match the output frame size to the aspect ratio of the
source signal
2. Login as admin.
3. Select a channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Sources; the Sources page opens.
5. Find the name of the media source used for the channel.
6. Click this source under the Sources menu.
7. Make note of the input signal resolution.
8. Click the channel's Encoding; the Encoding page opens.
9. Scroll to the frame size parameter.
10. The simplest option is to select Use current signal resolution as frame size and click Apply. You can
alternatively select it briefly to note the current video signal resolution, then deselect it and follow the
steps below.
11. Look for the source aspect ratio in the list of aspect ratios provided.
a. If the source resolution is on the list, choose another resolution on the same line (i.e. with the
same aspect ratio).
b. If the source resolution is not on the list, use a calculator to get a factor of the source resolution
and enter it in the Frame size fields.
12. Click Apply.
287
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stretch the image
Stretch the image
To remove the matte (black bars) by stretching the image to fit your output frame size:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select a channel; the channel menu expands.
3. Click Sources; the Sources page opens.
4. Click the row for your layout; the layout appears in the layout editor.
5. Select the gear for your Item with your video source; the Source Settings box appears.
6. Deselect Keep aspect ratio when scaling in the Source Settings box.
7. Click and drag the source in the layout editor to stretch as desired to fill the frame.
8. Click Save.
Force the capture card to use a specific EDID
Extended display identification data (EDID) is data provided by a video display device (usually a monitor) to
describe its capabilities to a video source (usually a graphics or video output card in a PC or another device).
The video source uses the EDID to determine the capabilities of the monitor in regards to the resolutions,
color depth and other settings that the monitor can support.
EDID is crucial for DVI sources.
Like monitors, each video capture card in Pearl-2 contains an EDID. When you connect a DVI video source
(such as a laptop or video camera), this source sees Pearl-2's capture card as a monitor and uses its EDID to
negotiate which video signal to send.
Generally capture card's DVI input correctly emulates a monitor that supports your video source. However
sometimes, particularly if your source uses a custom set of display properties, you need to help Pearl-2's by
uploading a custom EDID to force the capture card to report that it emulates a resolution, color depth, etc
needed by your laptop, camera or other video source.
Upload a new EDID
In most circumstances the factory installed default EDID, is sufficient. However, there may be some cases
where a video source uses resolutions that you do not want to use. In that case you can choose an EDID that
forces Pearl-2's capture card to use a specific set of attributes.
The uploaded EDID is permanently installed on your system and this capture card (a "Source" in the Admin
panel) will always share the uploaded EDID with the connected video input source.
288
Pearl-2 User Guide
Upload a new EDID
EDID changes are permanent until you replace them with another EDID or specifically choose to
restore the facotry EDID for a given source. Not even a system-level factory reset removes the
configured EDIDs.
1. To download a new EDID file, go to the Epiphan support web page. The support page opens.
2. Select the support page for Pearl-2.
3. Scroll to the EDID section.
4. Click on an EDID from the list. The file is saved to your downloads folder on your hard drive.
5. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
6. Login as admin.
7. From the Admin panel, Scroll to the Sources section.
8. Click the name of the HDMI capture card (source) for which you want to upload an EDID; the
Source Configuration page opens.
9. Scroll to the EDID upload section.
10. Click Choose File; a file browser opens.
11. Browse to the location where the custom EDID file was saved and select the file.
12. Click open; the EDID filename is displayed on the screen.
13. Click upload, the EDID upload begins; the screen shows a progress inidicator.
289
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restore factory default EDID
14. When the upload is complete the page changes to reflect success or failure.
Restore factory default EDID
When you have finished with a custom EDID, you can restore the capture card (in the Sources list) to the
default EDID. Currently there is no way to tell if your capture card is using a custom EDID. If you are unsure,
restoring to factory default is the best approach.
To restore the default EDID:.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Sources section.
4. Click the capture card (source) for which you wish to restore the EDID; the source configuration page
opens.
5. Scroll to the EDID section.
6. Click the restore button.
7. The screen updates with a status indicator.
290
Pearl-2 User Guide
Unstretch the output video
8. When the EDID restoration is complete, the page updates to reflect the action is completed.
Unstretch the output video
By default, Pearl-2 makes sure that the aspect ratio of input signals is preserved when the output is streamed.
If this default was overridden the image is stretched to match the output frame size. The effect may be subtle
and may not be problematic for you, but if you want to resolve this it is very simple to do.
To preserve the source aspect ratio:
1. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
2. Login as admin.
3. Click on your channel, then select Sources; the Sources page opens.
4. At the top of the page, click the row for the layout you want to edit, then click on the relevant layout
item; the Source settings box appears.
5. From the Source settings box, make sure Keep aspect ratio when scaling is selected.
291
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove the combing effect on images
6. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Save.
Unstretching the image causes a matte (black bars) to appear on the sides or top and bottom of
the output. To remove these see Remove black bars (matte) from the video.
Remove the combing effect on images
When frames are interlaced, artifacts from one frame may appear on the next frame. This occurs when a fast
motion video is interlaced. Since each frame is captured from a different point in time, the action captured in
one frame is carried over to the next frame. The result is a blurred image and horizontal lines running across
the video.
292
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove the combing effect on images
To convert an interlaced source signal to a non-interlaced signal.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Sources menu option.
4. Click on the desired video source ; the source configuration page opens.
5. Enable the Enable deinterlace setting.
6. Click Apply. View the output in the Snapshot preview below.
293
PART 3: Stream
Streaming provides powerful and flexible approaches to delivering to your users. Offering an easy to use
interface, users can stream video using multiple formats to multiple users and devices such as web browsers,
media players, set-top-boxes, Smart TVs and Content Distribution Networks.
The system is flexible and supports standard codecs used by most sharing destinations and media players.
This section discusses the following topics related to publishing your content:
l What is streaming?
l Stream to viewers
l Stream to a server
l Stream to a media player or smart TV
l Samples of stream settings
294
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is streaming?
What is streaming?
After you have configured your media and channels, decided on the content and layout of your broadcast, it’s
time to share your stream.
Pearl-2 provides a number of options for streaming. Choose from methods for unicast, multicast, CDN, SAP,
UPnP and more.
When streaming to a server, you can use Pearl-2's touch screen (see Specify channels for One Touch
streaming) or Admin panel to control when streaming starts and stops.
The following sections provide a description of the available streaming options, insight into why you would
choose each option, and procedures to stream your content using each option.
o Choose a streaming option
o Supported streaming formats
Streams for viewers:
o Stream to viewers
o Disable (and enable) streams for viewers
o Restrict access to streams for viewers
o Stream content using HTTP or RTSP
o Configure HTTP and RTSP streaming ports
o Stream content using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming)
o Stream content using UPnP
Stream to a server:
o Stream to a server
o Stream to a CDN
o Stream content using multicast
Stream to a media player:
o Stream to a media player or smart TV
Choose a streaming option
Each method of streaming media has strengths and weaknesses depending on your audience location,
hardware resources and bandwidth. To help you decide how to publish your content, you must first identify
295
Pearl-2 User Guide
Supported streaming formats
the number of viewers and how viewers will access your content. Are you streaming live video, or recorded
video. Do you need to stream the content to one client (peer-to-peer), deliver a single stream to multiple
clients (multicast), or provide web-based streaming where multiple clients can access the broadcast (Content
Distribution Network).
Your Pearl-2 can stream to individual viewers through HTTP, HTTP Live Streaming, UPnP and RTSP and can
also simultaneously stream to a server such as a multicast server or CDN.
Supported streaming formats
When you set up your channel the system generates and displays a list of available video formats and
standards specific to the selected audio and video codecs used by your channel.
To view the video formats and standards specific to your selected codec:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Status; the following page opens displaying the stream protocol that is supported based on the
selected codecs.
296
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to viewers
Stream to viewers
Streaming to viewers allows people to connect directly to your Pearl-2 via their web browser or media player
to view the live stream.
You can configure whether or not streaming is enabled for viewers. See Disable (and enable) streams for
viewers.
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Quickly stream content to viewers simultaneously. No set up is required.
Pearl-2 is ready to stream content as soon as it is has power and a
configured channel. No other settings are required. Your audience need only
HTTP
access the URL of the broadcast and they are instantly connected. This
viewing method is ideal for a small number of viewers. For each viewer, you
are using the full stream bandwidth and a small amount of system overhead
on the Pearl-2. For more information about using a HTTP streaming, refer to
Stream content using HTTP or RTSP.
Quickly stream content to viewers. No set up is required. Pearl-2 is ready to
stream content as soon as it has power and a configured channel. No other
RTSP
settings are required. Your audience need only copy and paste the URL of
the stream into a media player. For more information about using a RTSP
and HTTP streaming, refer to Stream content using HTTP or RTSP.
Stream live over the standard HTTP port 80, making it possible to cross
firewalls and proxies that are normally accessible to other HTTP traffic and
HTTP Live Streaming
facilitates content delivery to CDNs. See Stream content using HLS (HTTP
(HLS)
Live Streaming).
There is approximately a 30 second delay when streaming using HLS.
To stream video outside of your LAN, configure port forwarding on your router. Work with your
Network Administrator on this task. Network configuration is beyond the scope of this guide.
Stream content using HTTP or RTSP
The quickest and simplest way to deliver your content is to send the broadcast's URL to your viewers. You can
provide separate URLs for each channel being streamed.
297
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream content using HTTP or RTSP
The format of the URL provided to you by the Admin panel depends on the method you used to access the
system, either through network discovery using the serial number or IP address.
The system must be accessible on the viewer's LAN for the viewer to use access by serial
discovery.
If your system is behind a firewall and you wish to share with remote viewers, you will need to set
up port forwarding on your network. See your IT administrator.
Table 41 URL options
Access Method
URL Format
http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=<channel number>
rtsp://<serial>.local:<port>/stream.sdp
serial discovery
Where serial is the serial number of the system and channel number is the
provided from the GUI (see below).
http://<IP Address of Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=2
rtsp://<IP Address of Pearl-2>:<port>/stream.sdp
IP address
Where the IP address is the IP address of the system and the port and channel
number informationis provided on the channel's status page.
To retrieve the stream URL for your viewers:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Status; the following page opens displaying the stream protocol that is supported based on the
selected codecs.
298
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure HTTP and RTSP streaming ports
1. Jot down the either the Live Broadcast , RTSP stream or other web streaming address. This is the
address you can send to viewers or to create a link to your broadcast.
Users must install Bonjour Print Services on their Windows or Mac computer to access the live
Preview using the serial number.
If you're seeing URLs with serial numbers instead of IP addresses and want to change this, log into
the Admin panel by IP address (instead of by Serial number/Bonjour Print Services) to see
URLs with the IP address. (See Connect to the Admin panel.)
Configure HTTP and RTSP streaming ports
For RTSP streaming directly to users on your LAN the only information required to view the broadcast is the
URL and the port number used to stream the broadcast.
Port numbers are also used for HTTP streaming methods such as FLV and MPEG-TS. By default, each channel
has a unique HTTP and RTSP port number. If needed, you can modify these port numbers. Be sure to always
use unique numbers for each channel.
To set the HTTP and RTSP streaming ports for streaming to viewers on the same network, follow the steps
below.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
3. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
299
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream content using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming)
4. Set the HTTP Streaming port to specify the port used to stream the HTTP broadcast. This value along
with the URL is used by viewers to access the FLV and MPEG-TS streams.
The port number must be higher than 500 for HTTP. In the case of RTSP streaming this
value is ignored.
5. Set the RTSP Streaming port to specify which port to use when you are streaming live video via RTSP.
This value along with the URL is used by viewers to access the broadcast. The default for channel one is
554.
6. Click Apply.
Stream content using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming)
Stream live over the standard HTTP port 80, making it possible to cross firewalls and proxies that are normally
accessible to other HTTP traffic .
HLS is supported with the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding. When streaming using
HLS there is approximately a 30 second delay.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, select the channel containing video you want to stream; the menu expands.
4. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming configuration page opens.
5. Enable HTTP Live Streaming by selecting the HTTP Live Streaming checkbox.
300
Pearl-2 User Guide
Send stream URLs to viewers
6. Click Apply.
7. Click Status for the channel. The status page opens.
8. Provide the HLS stream link to your viewers.
Send stream URLs to viewers
For participants to log in and view a stream, you must provide a stream URL. The URL that you send depends
on the device the participant uses to view the stream. You can provide separate URLs for the stream coming
from each channel, or one URL that includes all the streams for the channel.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click the channel that you want to view; the menu expands.
4. Click Status; the Status page opens displaying the stream protocols supported based on the selected
codecs. For more information on compatibility between codec and file formats, see Supported
streaming formats.
301
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the Flash stream
5. Copy the URL and provide to viewers. Viewers may now view the stream using a digital media player or browser. See Viewing with a web browser and
Viewing with a media player (RTSP).
View the Flash stream
There are two methods to view the retrieve the flash stream URL:
l Live broadcast link on the channel's status page.
l Info page from the configuration menu
View your broadcast using the View link on the Info menu
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
302
Pearl-2 User Guide
View your broadcast using the View link on the Info
menu
3. From the Admin panel, click Info menu option; the info window opens with a list of all configured
channels.
4. Click on the channel you want to preview. A page opens displaying the live broadcast and broadcast
URL.
303
Pearl-2 User Guide
View your broadcast using the Live broadcast link on
the Status page
5. Copy the URL and provide to viewers.
View your broadcast using the Live broadcast link on the Status
page
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click the channel that you want to view; the menu expands.
4. Click Status; the status page opens displaying the live broadcast and stream URL.
304
Pearl-2 User Guide
View your broadcast using the Live broadcast link on
the Status page
5. When HTTP live streaming for the channel is enabled the status page also shows the HTTP Live
Streaming link. See, Stream content using HLS (HTTP Live Streaming).
When HLS is enabled and with no viewer password set, viewers can access the stream using a
tablet or smart phone device. If the viewer passwords is set, HLS connections are not possible.
6. Click on the Live broadcast or HTTP Live Stream link, if it configured. The window opens displaying the
live broadcast and broadcast URL.
305
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with a web browser
Previewing the broadcast with FLV player results in moderate buffering delay (15-30
seconds).
7. Copy the URL and provide to viewers. Viewing with a web browser
If a viewer password is configured, provide participants with the password to log in, along with the IP address
or the URL to be used by the participant's browser.
If your channel is configured with 48 kHz audio, flash streaming that is used for browser viewing
may not work. In this case, we recommend you view the channel with a media player instead. (See
below.)
1. Open a web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the broadcast stream, refer to the example below. To locate the IP address for
the broadcast, refer to Send stream URLs to viewers.
If the IP address of the broadcast is 172.20.1.33, then browse to:
http:// 172.20.1.33/preview.cgi?channel=<channel number>
3. Enter the user name and password at the prompt:
306
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with a media player (RTSP)
User Name: viewer
Password: (enter the viewer password)
4. Press Enter. The stream is played in the browser window.
Viewing with a media player (RTSP)
If a viewer password is configured, provide participants with the password to log in, along with the IP address
or the URL to be copied to the media player. For example purposes the following procedure describes the
steps using a VLC media player.
1. Launch a media player.
2. Click the Media tab, a drop-down menu opens.
3. Choose Open Network Stream; a dialog box opens.
4. Enter the stream URL (using either the IP address or the network discovery serial number method).
307
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable (and enable) streams for viewers
rtsp://49E7B8E4.local:554/stream.sdp
5. Press Play; the stream is played in the media player window.
Disable (and enable) streams for viewers
When you create a channel, it's available by default for viewing by stream viewers who have the stream URL.
You can choose to disable streaming to viewers through the channel's streaming configuration.
Disabling streams for viewers disables all viewer formats including HTTP, RTSP, HLS and UPnP.
To disable (or enable) streams for viewers:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click Streaming for the desired channel; the streaming page opens.
308
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict access to streams for viewers
3. Uncheck Enabled to disable streaming to viewers (or check to enable).
4. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
Restrict access to streams for viewers
Pearl-2 can restrict access to all viewer streams using global viewer passwords and IP allow/deny lists. See Set
or change user passwords and Restrict viewers by IP address.
If LDAP is configured for viewer authentication, the viewer must pass global autentication using
LDAP credentials (or the viewer global password, if there is one) and must meet the local channel
settings (come from an allowed IP address). See Configure LDAP for more information on LDAP
configuration.
To restrict viewers for a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click Streaming for the desired channel; the streaming page opens.
4. Scroll to the Stream access control section of the page.
309
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
5. Select Use these settings from the drop down list; the configuration fields are enabled.
Global LDAP settings are always enforced. Any local settings are in addition to LDAP sign on.
6. If desired, specify a password for viewers of this channel; the password appears masked as you type it.
If you have global allow/deny lists or a global user password, you can override the global
settings and remove all access control for a channel by selecting Use these settings and
leaving all the fields blank.
7. If desired, specify allow and deny IPs for viewers of this channel. See Restrict viewers by IP address for
more information about allow and deny lists.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
To return a channel to the default (global) access control settings:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click Streaming for the desired channel; the streaming page opens.
4. Scroll to the Stream access control section of the page.
5. Select Use global settings from the drop down list; the configuration fields are disabled (any changes
to the configuration fields are not saved).
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
Restrict viewers by IP address
Pearl-2 permits you to restrict which computers can access broadcasts by building a list of allowed and/or
denied IP addresses. You can do this at a global level for the system and can also override these settings on a
310
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
per-channel basis. Both global and per-channel configuration procedures are described below.
You cannot set per-channel passwords and IP restrictions if you stream using HTTP Live Streaming
(HLS).
If your viewer account has a password, your viewers must connect to the system from a computer (or
gateway) with a permitted IP address and must also supply the username (viewer) and password before they
can view the broadcast.
To restrict access by IP address, you need to know the IP addresses or range of addresses for your viewers. By
default, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the broadcast.
If you’re not familiar with creating allow/deny lists, refer to the examples below this procedure for assistance
with crafting your lists.
IP address restriction is valid for the viewer only and does not affect the Admin panel or the
mobile configuration interface.
To restrict viewers by IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Access passwords link in the Configuration menu; the password configuration page opens.
3. Type allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
4. Type denied IP addresses or address ranges in the Deny IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
5. Click Apply.
To restrict viewers of a specific channel by IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Streaming link for the desired channel; the streaming configuration page opens.
3. From the Access Control drop-down, select Use these Settings; local password and Allow/Deny IP
lists are enabled.
4. If desired, type a password for the viewer in the Viewer Password field.
5. Type allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
6. Type denied IP addresses or address ranges in the Deny IP’s field. Separate addresses with a comma.
7. Click Apply.
If a user attempts to connect to the stream from a disallowed IP address, access is denied. If connecting by
internet browser, the message "IP address rejected." is displayed.
The following table describes the applicable fields.
311
Pearl-2 User Guide
IP restriction examples
Table 42 IP Based Restriction Fields
Label
Description/Options
Enter individual IP addresses or IP address ranges, separated by commas. To specify a
range, use a hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
Users connecting from addresses in this list are permitted to view broadcasts from the
Allow IP's
system, provided their IP address is not in the Deny IP’s list.
To allow all except IP addresses in the deny list, if any, leave the field blank.
You can use the Allow list by itself, or in conjunction with the Deny IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
Enter individual IP addresses or IP address ranges, separated by commas. To specify a
range, use a hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
Users connecting from addresses in this list are not allowed to view broadcasts from the
Deny IP's
system, unless their IP address is in the Allow IP’s list. If a specific IP address is in both lists,
access to the stream is denied.
You can use the Deny list by itself, or in conjunction with the Allow IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
IP restriction examples
Allow list with distinct IP addresses
The simplest allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to craft a list of allowed IP addresses. All
other addresses are denied access to the broadcast.
For example if your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and you want to make sure only the
CEO’s specific desktop, laptop and tablet computers (with IP Addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.165.1.75, respectively) can connect to the broadcast, construct the following allow list:
Allow: 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Allow list with a range of IP addresses
Sometimes you’ll want a range of computer IP addresses to connect to your system. This may happen when
you have one range of IP addresses assigned to desktop computers (i.e. in the range 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.100) and another range assigned to boardroom computers (i.e. the range 192.168.1.200 to
312
Pearl-2 User Guide
Allow list with a range of IP addresses and one or more
specific IP addresses
192.168.1.250). If you only want the boardroom computers to connect to broadcasts from the system you
can specify the range of boardroom IP addresses rather than needing to type in each individual address. The
allow list looks as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250
Note that we could have specified two of the IP addresses in the previous example as a range.
Allow list with a range of IP addresses and one or more specific IP
addresses
Putting the first two examples together, we want to permit access to IP addresses in the range of boardroom
computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250) and also want to add the desktop, laptop and tablet computers
of the CEO (IP addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and 192.168.1.75, respectively). Note the first two IP
addresses are consecutive, so they can be added as a second range. Add these IP addresses to the list as
follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Your list can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses, provided they are separated by commas.
Deny list with distinct IP addresses
Another simple allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to list specific denied IP addresses. All
other addresses are allowed access to the broadcast.
For example imagine your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and you want to allow any
computer on the LAN can access the stream except your publicly-accessible boardroom (with IP address
192.168.1.211). You can use the following deny list (leave the allow list empty) to permit all computers except
the boardroom computer:
Deny: 192.168.1.211
As with allow lists, your deny list can specify a range of IP addresses, and can specify multiple ranges or distinct
IP addresses in a comma-separated list.
313
Pearl-2 User Guide
Allow list with a range of IP addresses, distinct IP
addresses and an exception
Allow list with a range of IP addresses, distinct IP addresses and an
exception
Building on the previous examples, consider the situation where you want the CEO’s computers
(192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.75) and all boardroom computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250)
to access the broadcast, with the exception of the public boardroom computer (192.168.1.211). Use both
allow and deny lists to create the rule as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Deny: 192.168.1.211
Both lists can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses, provided they are separated by
commas.
Deny list with a range of IP addresses
Converse to the previous examples, consider the situation where you want every computer on the network to
access the broadcast, with the exception of the CEO’s desktop, laptop and tablet computers. Additionally,
boardroom computers should not be permitted with the exception of the cafeteria computer (IP address
192.168.1.222).
The deny list is an "exception" list for the allow list. So to craft the rule described above we need to allow all the
computers in the local subnet, then deny specific sub-ranges including two groups of boardroom computers
ensuring the cafeteria computer's IP address is not in the deny list:
Allow: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.250
Deny: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.221, 192.168.1.223-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
314
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to a server
Stream to a server
Your Pearl-2 streams to a server when you want to use a CDN or Multicast.
By default, no server streaming is configured. See Stream to a CDN and Stream content using multicast for
details on configuring one of these two options.
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Stream web content to many viewers on different Content Delivery
Networks simultaneously to any geographical location. A viewer accesses
the broadcast from a website using a user name and password, if required.
Using a CDN to host your broadcast is highly scalable and makes financial
sense to website owners since you do not pay for additional server
hardware or routing should your network traffic increase or decrease.
Content Distribution
Network (CDN)
Using one or more CDNs to stream live content allows you to reach a large
geographically diverse audience and because CDNs perform format
conversion, the stream is platform independent.
You can control when streaming to a CDN is enabled by using the Admin
panel or the touch screen. See Start and stop streaming to a CDN.
For more information about streaming to a CDN, see Stream to a CDN.
Stream content to a multicast IP address where it can be shared with
multiple viewers within the same LAN. All viewers receive the same stream
at the same time. Similar to turning on a radio station where all listeners
hear the same music at the same time.
This delivery method relies on network equipment that supports
multicasting and is usually used in high bandwidth corporate LANs and not
Multicast Streaming
on Internet-based architectures.
This delivery method is useful for training sessions, when there is a specific
timeframe when the audience will view the content. For more information
about using multicasting for streaming your content, see: Stream content
using multicast
This option can be used to stream video and audio to an IP TV or set top
box playlist.
315
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to a CDN
To stream video outside of your LAN, use a CDN or configure port forwarding on your router.
Refer to your Network Administrator; network configuration is beyond the scope of this guide.
Streaming to CDNs and multicast streaming is available only when the H.264 codec is selected.
Stream to a CDN
A Content Delivery Network (CDN) relies on geo-diverse CDN servers to receive and disperse web content to
the CDN server closest to the user. The closer the server is to the user, the faster the content is delivered.
Streaming your content through a CDN allows you to stream any time, anywhere, regardless of the viewing
device.
You can publish to any CDN provider that supports incoming streams sent via RTSP announce or RTMP push,
and you can publish to several different CDNs simultaneously. Both RTSP and RTMP can be used for live
streaming, however not all CDNs or media servers support both formats. Choose the streaming format that
your CDN or media server supports. Epiphan has tested with the CDN providers listed here:
https://www.epiphan.com/partners/cdn-partners/. Contact your CDN for a list of supported audio codecs
and ensure your Encoding configuration uses one of the supported codecs.
To publish content to a CDN provider, ensure you have:
l a path to the mount point or an XML configuration file (provided by the CDN provider);
l verify which transport protocols your CDN supports;
l a current flash player; and
l select the H.264 codec from the channel's Encoding page.
316
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
You can control when streaming to a CDN is enabled by using the Admin panel or the touch screen. See Start
and stop streaming to a CDN.
You can also test how your content is streamed by sending your content to Epiphan’s CDN. For a list of
Epiphan’s preferred CDN providers, see: https://www.epiphan.com/partners/cdn-partners/.
Use one of the following links to configure your Pearl-2 for publishing to a CDN:
l To stream content to a CDN using RTSP announce
l To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push
l Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
l Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
Once you have your CDN streaming configured for RTMP, RTSP, Wowza Streaming Cloud, or Original
Livestream, you can control when streaming is enabled and disabled through the Admin panel, the touch
screen or Epiphan Live.
Start and stop streaming using the Admin panel
To start (enable) or stop (disable) streaming using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. From the Admin panel, click the link for your Channel; the menu expands.
3. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
317
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
4. If streaming is enabled (started), click the Stop streaming button (at the top right corner of the stream)
or Stop all at the top of the page; streaming is disabled for either that stream or for all streams,
respectively.
5. If streaming is disabled (stopped), click the Start streaming button (at the top right corner of the
stream) or Start all at the top of the page; streaming is enabledfor either that stream or for all
streams, respectively, and a streaming timer appears on the touch screen.
Start and stop streaming using the touch screen's channel monitoring view
From the individual Channel monitoring view you can start and stop streaming in a similar way to how you
start and stop recording.
To control streaming from the touch screen:
1. Configure your CDN streaming settings.
2. View the individual channel monitoring page for your channel. See Channel monitoring.
3. If streaming is disabled, there is no way to start it - configure the settings and try again.
4. If streaming is already started, you'll see a flashing blue circle and a timer (indicating how long
streaming has been enabled) at the top left corner of the screen. To stop the stream, touch the blue
circle.
5. If streaming is not started, you'll see a grey circle and a timer reading 00:00:00 at the top left corner
of the screen. To start the stream, touch the grey circle at the left side of the screen; the text changes
to Starting... then to a timer once the server connection is established. If one of your streams is
318
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
unable to connect to your server, the circle changes to a yellow error icon as a notification. All other
working streams continue. You can fix non-working streams on the Admin panel.
Note you can also tell whether or not your channel is streaming by looking at it in the Grid view:
l If it has a blue dot in the top right corner, it is currently streaming.
l If it has a yellow dot with an exclamation mark, there is a problem with streaming.
Start/stop streaming using One Touch control
Pearl-2's "One Touch" recording/streaming control allows you to control your recording and streaming
across any number of specified channels and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button. See One
Touch streaming and recording control for more information.
To control streaming using One Touch control:
1. Configure your CDN streaming settings.
2. Configure your desired channels for One Touch streaming in the admin panel (all channels are enabled
for One Touch streaming by default) (see Specify channels for One Touch streaming).
3. Touch the One Touch control icon in the lower portion of the touch screen to display the One Touch
control screen. Note that you can customize how and when the One Touch control screen is displayed
in Pearl-2's admin panel (see Customize how One Touch control is displayed).
319
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
If the gear icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to activate the
control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's
touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system
information.
4. From the One Touch control screen, simply press Start to begin streaming. This starts each stream
where the Single touch control check box is checked. For more information on understanding the
elements in the One Touch control screen, see Understand and use One Touch control.)
5. To stop streaming, press Stop.
Start and stop streaming using Epiphan Live
You can control the streaming (and recording) of channels directly from the Epiphan Live Dashboard
interface. (See Accessing Epiphan Live for information about logging in to Epiphan Live.)
320
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
Streaming (and recording) control buttons are located under the Channels heading.
For each channel, the stream control is the left-most button containing the "signal" icon, and the recording
control is the right-most button containing the circle icon.
When a channel is not being streamed or recorded, the streaming and recording buttons are gray in color and
their respective timers are set to 00:00:00. If streaming has not been configured in the Admin panel, the
streaming button will display the text "Not set". See Stream to a server to learn how to configure streaming in
the Admin panel.
You can preview a channel by clicking on its name to display a small dropdown thumbnail view.
To start streaming and recording a channel, simply click (or press) the channel's streaming and/or recording
buttons.
When clicked, the streaming button turns blue in color and the recording button turns red. The timer
contained within each respective button also begins to count upward.
Alternatively, you can also control streaming and recording of a channel via the Dashboard's monitoring
panels. See Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring for more information.
321
Pearl-2 User Guide
To stream content to a CDN using RTSP announce
If a stream is not able to publish, the streaming button for that line flashes blue and displays "ERROR". The
stream can be fixed in the Admin panel.
In this case, check the streaming configuration settings for your channel in the Admin panel. (See Stream to
viewers
To learn more about the Epiphan Live control interface, see Epiphan Live.
To stream content to a CDN using RTSP announce
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
3. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
4. Scroll to the Stream to a server section of the page.
5. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
6. Choose RTSP announce from the drop-down menu.
322
Pearl-2 User Guide
To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push
7. Once selected, the stream options open. To rename the stream, click on the current name and type a
different name. Then pressing Enter.
8. The stream can be operated via One Touch streaming and recording control. You may remove this
functionality for this individual stream by deselecting the Single touch control check box.
9. Enter the ingestion point url provided by the CDN or media server.
10. Select UDP or TCP from the drop-down menu. Verify which transport protocols your CDN provider
supports.
11. Enter a user name and password.
12.
The CDN provider assigns a user name and password to authenticate the publisher.
Contact the CDN provider for your log in credentials.
13. Click Apply.
14. When ready to begin streaming, you may click Start to start that individual stream, or Start all to
simultaneously start this stream and any other streams you have configured. See Start and stop
streaming to a CDN for instructions on starting streaming from the touch screen or see Controlling
streaming and recording using Epiphan Live for instructions on streaming control using the Epiphan
Live control interface.
To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push
This is the most common method to stream to a CDN, as it is used by many CDNs including both Facebook
Live and YouTube.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
323
Pearl-2 User Guide
To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push
2. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
3. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
4. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
5. Choose RTMP push from the drop-down menu.
6. Once selected, the stream options open. To rename the stream, click on the current name and type a
different name. Then pressing Enter.
7. The stream can be operated via One Touch streaming and recording control. You may remove this
functionality for this individual stream by deselecting the Single touch control check box.
8. Enter the ingest point URL provided by the media server or CDN.
9. In the Stream name field, enter the stream name you configured with the CDN.
10. Enter the CDN user name and password.
The CDN provider assigns a user name and password to authenticate the publisher.
Contact the CDN provider for your log in credentials.
11. Click Apply.
12. When ready to begin streaming, you may click Start to start that individual stream, or Start all to
simultaneously start this stream and any other streams you have configured. (See Start and stop
streaming to a CDN for instructions on starting streaming from the touch screen or see Controlling
streaming and recording using Epiphan Live for instructions on streaming control using the Epiphan
Live control interface.)
13. You may delete the stream at any time using the Delete this stream button.
324
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
Some CDNs provide an XML file for easy configuration. If you're using one of these services, you can use the
following setup process.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
3. Select use profile XML from the New stream drop-down menu; a file browser window opens.
4. Select the XML profile supplied by your CDN and click OK; the configuration is read from the XML file
and applied.
325
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
3. Click Apply.
4. To control streaming, click either Stop and Start to control this individual stream, or Stop all and Start
all to control all streams simultaneously. (See Start and stop streaming to a CDN for instructions on
starting streaming from the touch screen or see Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
for instructions on streaming control using the Epiphan Live control interface.)
Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
To set up streaming via Wowza Cloud, you first need to sign in to the Wowza Streaming Cloud web site and
create a new Live Stream (when asked to select a camera or encoder type, select Epiphan).
Once the stream is created, you'll see a Connection Code on the stream's Overview page; this code is
required to complete the streaming set-up process.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Encoding; the channel's Encoding page opens.
5. Configure Encoding settings accordingly, ensuring the Codec selected is H.264.
Configuring audio is optional. Supported formats are limited to MP3 and AAC. Due to RTMP
restrictions, MP3 48 kHz is not supported.
6. Click Apply.
7. Under the selected channel, click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
326
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
8. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
9. Select Wowza Cloud from the drop-down list.
10. Enter the connection code obtained from the Wowza Streaming Cloud set-up into the Connection
code field.
11. Click Set to pair the channel on Epiphan's encoder with the live stream on Wowza Cloud; an icon
appears to show you the connection is validating. Once validated, the stream name you configured in
Wowza Cloud appears.
327
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to Wowza Streaming Cloud
12. When ready to begin streaming, there are two steps to take.
a. Click the Start Transcoder button. The state changes from stopped to starting, then to
started. If you log into your stream on Wowza Cloud you'll see the stream is started, but there is
no video detected. (You can also start the transcoder through the Wowza Cloud interface, by
clicking Start Stream.)
This action commences your session charges with Wowza Cloud.
b. To start sending video to the Wowza Cloud, you may either click Start to start that individual
stream, or Start all to simultaneously start this stream and any other streams you have
configured. (See Start and stop streaming to a CDN for instructions on starting streaming from
the touch screen or see Controlling streaming and recording using Epiphan Live for instructions
on streaming control using the Epiphan Live control interface.
13. When the connection to Wowza Cloud has been established, the stream name appears on the channel's
Status page.
328
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to Original Livestream
After clicking either Transcoder or Publish Start buttons, there can be a short delay before the
stream is established.
Stop streaming to the Wowza Streaming Cloud
When you are done streaming, be sure to stop the Wowza Transcoder by either returning to the channel's
streaming page and pressing the Stop Transcoder button, or by logging into the Wowza Cloud and stopping
the stream. Charges from Wowza continue until the Wowza Cloud stream is stopped in one of these two
ways.
Stopping the stream by using the touch screen , pressing Stop or by the Epiphan Live Publish
button does not stop the charges applied by Wowza.
Stream to Original Livestream
To set up streaming via the Original Livestream service, you first need to sign in to your Original Livestream
account and create a new stream.
To configure streaming on your Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Encoding; the channel's Encoding page opens.
5. Configure Encoding settings accordingly for best results: set the Codec to H.264, the Resolution to
640x480, the Frame rate to 30 fps, the Bitrate to 4Kbps, and the audio to 64Kbps AAC.
Configuring audio is optional. Supported formats are limited to MP3 and AAC. Due to RTMP
restrictions, MP3 48 kHz is not supported.
6. Click Apply.
7. Under the selected channel, click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
329
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to Original Livestream
8. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
9. Select Original Livestream from the drop-down list.
10. Enter the channel name in the Short channel name field.
11. Enter your Original Livestream Username and Password in the next two fields.
12. Click Apply.
13. When ready to begin streaming, you may click Start to start that individual stream, or Start all to
simultaneously start this stream and any other streams you have configured. (See Start and stop
streaming to a CDN for instructions on starting streaming from the touch screen or see Controlling
streaming and recording using Epiphan Live for instructions on streaming control using the Epiphan
Live control interface.)
330
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream content using multicast
When the connection to Original Livestream has been established, the stream name appears on the
channel's Status page, similar to this example from Wowza Streaming Cloud.
After clicking Apply, there may be a short 2-3 minute delay before the live stream is displayed.
Stream content using multicast
A multicast stream consists of one stream distributed to many viewers via a multicast-capable network. You
are only able to broadcast to one multicast network at a time, but you may broadcast to a multicast network
and any number of non-multicast CDNs.
Pearl-2 supports multicast streaming content to an IP TV or a set-top box playlist when the stream format is
MPEG-TS. You may only stream to one multicast network at a time.
Note that only one multicast network may be used simultaneously. So if you select MPEG-TS
UDP push, MPEG-TS RTP/UDP push or RTP/UDP push, you are not able to select any of the
others, and you must delete the stream to select a different multicast network. Adding, removing,
or changing the settings for any of these three multicast publishers stops any current streaming
or recording session.
The following procedures outline the steps to distribute your content using multicast streaming:
l MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
l MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
l Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
Before configuring your channel for MPEG-TS streaming, ensure the following codecs are configured:
l Video – H.264
l Audio – MP3 or AAC, if audio is configured.
To configure your channel for MPEG-TS using RTP/UDP push:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
331
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
5. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
6. Choose MPEG-TS RTP/UDP push from the drop-down menu.
7. Enter the destination multicast IP address where the broadcast can be viewed.
A IPv4 multicast address range is an address between 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Contact your System Administrator for the specific address to use.
8. Enter the destination port number through which the media will stream.
9. Perform one of the following:
a. If you do not want to advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, go to the last
step of this procedure; or
b. To advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, follow the steps below.
10. Enable the SAP announcement checkbox to advertise your stream over a local network. When the
checkbox is enabled and a multicast IP address is configured, your stream is displayed in the playlist of
the local media player.
11. Enter a multicast IP address in the SAP announcement IP field. If your media player is configured to
receive multicast streams from an IP address that is different from the default address 224.2.127.254,
you may need to contact your system administrator for a specific multicast IP address.
12. Enter a channel number in the Channel number field to identify your stream in the media player. By
default, the Channel number is the channel identifier.
332
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
When a channel number value is not specified, viewers cannot select a channel from the
set-top box or Smart TV .
13. Enter a name for a group of streams in the text box next to Group name. Since media players simply
present a list of available streams, you can organize your streams into multiple folders or in cases where
folders are not displayed, use dot separator hierarchy to help your viewers filter out unwanted streams
by category.
14. Click Apply.
15. Click the Info menu option of the Admin panel. An Info page opens displaying stream information.
To view the stream from a media player, open the URL in a media player, for example:
rtp://@ip:port or in the case of the sample configuration in the figure shown above:
rtp://@226.10.24.32:7000
To view the stream when SAP announce has been set and the stream is advertised on a media player, set-topbox or Smart TV, refer to Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP).
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
Before configuring your channel for the MPEG-TS streaming, ensure the following codecs are configured in
the encoding section:
l Video – H.264
l Audio – MP3 or AAC, if audio is configured.
To configure MPEG-TS with UDP push:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
5. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
6. Select MPEG-TS UDP push from the drop-down menu.
333
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
7. Enter the destination multicast IP address where the broadcast can be viewed.
A IPv4 multicast address range is an address between 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Contact your System Administrator for the specific address to use.
8. Enter the destination port number through which the media will stream.
9. Perform one of the following:
a. If you do not want to advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, go to the last
step of this procedure; or
b. To advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, follow the steps below.
10. Enable the SAP announcement checkbox to advertise your stream over a local network. When the
checkbox is enabled and a multicast IP address is configured, your stream is displayed in the playlist of
local media players.
11. Enter a multicast IP address in the SAP announcement IP field. If your media player is configured to
receive multicast streams from an IP address that is different from the default address 224.2.127.254,
you may need to contact your system administrator for a specific multicast IP address.
12. Enter a channel number in the Channel number field to identify your stream in the media player. By
default the Channel number is the channel identifier.
When a channel number value is not specified, viewers cannot select a channel from the
set-top box or Smart TV .
334
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
13. Enter a name for a group of streams in the text box next to Group name. Since media players simply
present a list of available streams, you can organize your streams into multiple folders or in cases where
folders are not displayed, use dot separator hierarchy to help your viewers filter out unwanted streams
by category.
14. Click Apply. To view the stream, open the URL in a media player, for example:
udp://@ip:port
For example: udp://@226.10.24.32:7000
To view the stream when SAP announce has been set and the stream is advertised from a media player,
set-top-box or Smart TV, refer to Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP).
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click a Channel; the menu expands.
4. Click Streaming; the channel's Streaming page opens.
3. Click the New stream button to open the drop-down menu.
4. Choose RTP/UDP push from the drop-down menu.
5. Enter the destination multicast IP address.
6. Enter the port number through which the audio will stream.
7. Enter the port number through which the video will stream.
335
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
Audio and video use nearby port numbers (<port number>and <port number+2>). The minimum
distance between audio and video ports must be 2.
8. Click Apply; an SDP file is generated and available from the channel's Status page.
9. Click the SDP file to download it. If asked, specify a name and location for the SDP file.
10. Share the file with your viewers!
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
When SAP Announce is configured for a stream that uses UDP streaming, the stream is advertised over the
local network. Local viewers can view the stream using a software or hardware media player. Viewers are
presented with a list of available channels, similar to a television menu. Viewers need only click on a stream
and the video is streamed to their desktop, mobile or tablet. To configure SAP announce, go to Stream
content using multicast.
Your stream is advertised by the metadata title, if one was configured under Branding, otherwise it is
identified by its channel identifier. For a description of how to set the metadata, refer to Add channel
metadata.
When browsing from a VLC media player, streams are advertised by their channel identifier and are organized
by the group name. When browsing from an XBMC media player, streams are advertised by the stream's
metadata title (if configured), otherwise streams are advertised by their channel identifier.
1. Ensure the stream has SAP announcement enabled, otherwise, it is not advertised in the media player's
playlist.
2. Ensure the SAP announcement IP is a multicast IP address.
3.
Some media players, for example Exterity receivers, listen for SAP announcements on a
specific multicast address 239.255.255.255. If your audience is using Exterity to view your
stream, you must change the SAP announcement IP address to 239.255.255.255.
4. Launch a media player. The following steps are based on a VLC media player and may be different for
other media players.
5. Click View from the menu; a drop-down menu opens.
6. Select Playlist. A Playlist window opens. The right-hand panel indicates the playlist is empty.
7. From the side menu, click Network streams (SAP). The playlist is populated with all streams in your
network that are SAP announcement enabled. If you specified a Group Name when you configured the
publish stream the stream will be listed in folder identified by the group name.
336
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
In the example below, two streams D2P83658.vga and D2P83658.video are organized in a folder by their
group name.
8. Click on a live stream; the stream plays in the media player window.
337
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to a media player or smart TV
Stream to a media player or smart TV
Your Pearl-2 can use UPnP and SAP to stream to set top boxes, digital signs, smart TVs and other digital media
players.
The following table gives an overview of each option.
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Using the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) networking protocol, your Pearl-2
UPnP
can be discovered and can stream to software and hardware media players,
set-top-boxes and Smart TVs with ease.
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)SAP (session
SAP
announcement protocol) is a protocol for broadcasting multicast session
information. Media players can see the announcement or can use the
multicast SDP file (session description file) directly.
To stream video outside of your LAN, use a CDN or configure port forwarding on your router.
Refer to your Network Administrator; network configuration is beyond the scope of this guide.
Stream content using UPnP
Using the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) networking protocol, your Pearl-2 can be discovered and can stream
to software and hardware media players, set-top-boxes and Smart TVs with ease. If UPnP is enabled, the
system automatically establishes communication with media players on the network.
UPnP uses MPEG-TS over HTTP with the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding (or no audio). You can
only access live streams or recordings that meet these requirements.
For security reasons the default behavior prevents UPnP access to live streams and recorded files.
This section covers the following topics:
l Enable UPnP
l Disable UPnP
l Viewing with UPnP
l Play directly to a media player
338
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
l Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
l Change UPnP device name
Some players will not be able to access the stream or saved recordings if a viewer password is set.
If needed, see User administration to clear the viewer password.
The topics in this chapter include how to enable and disable UPnP and how to control media players from
Pearl-2. To choose recordings or live streams from your media player, see Play directly to a media player.
Enable UPnP
Enable UPnP to allow digital media players on the network to browse for recorded media files or live streams
from your system. There are two steps required to enabled UPnP, enabling UPnP for the system (including
setting a share name) and enabling UPnP per channel or recorder. By default, UPnP is disabled at the
system level and for each channel.
Streams and MPEG-TS recorded files must use the supported codecs: H.264 with MP3 or AAC
audio. Having a viewer password could prevent the ability to use UPnP.
Step 1: Enable UPnP at the device level
To enable UPnP:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Click the UPnP link in the Configuration section; the UPnP configuration page opens.
339
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
4. Enter a name in the Server name field. If no name is provided the server name will be the system's
serial number.
5. Select whether you want to share live video and recorded files.
6. Click Apply.
7. If no live stream is available that meets the criteria for UPnP, a message is displayed in the Play on
service start section of the page.
8. Otherwise, the Play on service start section shows a drop-down list of what can be streamed.
Step 2: Enable UPnP for channels and/or recorders
After enabling UPnP for the device (for one or both of live stream sharing and recorded file sharing) you need
to enable sharing for each channel or recorder you wish to share.
Enable UPnP sharing for the channels or recorders you want to share:
1. For channels (live streaming):
a. Click the Streaming link for the desired channel; the Streaming page opens.
340
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
a. Click the Share via UPnP check box (if not checked).
b. Note, if you have not already enabled UPnP at the server level (see above), you are prompted
with a message "UPnP live video sharing is not enabled with this device, to fix it, click here". Once
you click the text "to fix it click here", the text changes to "will be fixed". The UPnP service will be
started when you click Apply.
c. Click Apply.
2. For channels (recorded files):
a. Click Recording for the desired channel; the channel's recording page opens.
b. Click the word change next to the list of what is being recorded; the recording options expand.
341
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
c. Click the Share via UPnP check box (if not checked).
d. Note, if you have not already enabled UPnP at the server level (see above), you are prompted
with a message "UPnP file sharing is not enabled with this device, to fix it, click here". Once you
click the text "to fix it click here", the text changes to "will be fixed". The UPnP service will be
started when you click Apply.
e. Click Apply.
3. For recorders:
a. Click the link for the recorder from the Recorders menu; the recorder's configuration page
opens.
b. Click the word change next to the list of what is being recorded; the recording options expand.
c. Click the Share via UPnP check box (if not checked).
d. Note, if you have not already enabled UPnP at the server level (see above), you are prompted
with a message "UPnP file sharing is not enabled with this device, to fix it, click here". Once you
click the text "to fix it click here", the text changes to "will be fixed". The UPnP service will be
started when you click Apply.
e. Click Apply.
You can now browse for your server from your digital media player.
342
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable UPnP
Disable UPnP
By default, UPnP sharing is disable for the device, and for each channels and recorder. If you enabled UPnP
sharing it for a particular broadcast, you may want to disable UPnP sharing after the broadcast is complete.
You can choose to disable access to live streams, recorded files, or to the whole system.
To disable UPnP for a channel or recorder:
1. For channels:
a. Click the Streaming link for the desired channel; the Streaming page opens.
b. Deselect the Share via UPnP check box (if checked).
c. Click Apply
2. For recorders:
a. Click the link for the recorder from the Recorders menu.
b. Click the word change next to the list of what is being recorded; the recording options expand.
a. Deselect the Share via UPnP check box (if not checked).
b. Click Apply.
To disable UPnP globally (for the whole system):
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Click the UPnP link in the Configuration section; the UPnP configuration page opens.
343
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with UPnP
4. Deselect Share live video through UPnP to stop sharing live video.
5. Deselect Share recorded files through UPnP to stop sharing recorded files.
6. Click Apply; UPnP sharing is disabled.
Viewing with UPnP
Using a software or hardware media player, you can browse for files or streams with Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP). UPnP uses MPEG-TS over HTTP with the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding (or no audio).
You can only access live streams or recordings that meet these requirements.
For security reasons the default behavior prevents UPnP access to live streams and recorded files.
To enable UPnP, see Enable UPnP
Some players cannot access the stream or saved recordings if a viewer password is set. If needed,
see Remove user passwords to clear the viewer password.
When browsing via UPnP your Pearl-2 is displayed by the server name you set, or it's product serial number.
For example, when browsing from a Windows computer, you will see a list of media devices that includes
Pearl-2:
Live streams
When you open the device from Windows Media Player, you'll see a list of the available channels you can
stream under the Videos tab. From other digital media players, the channel list can be under a Live Streams
folder.
With Windows Media Player, double click to open any channel and press Play to start the stream. Using your
digital media player, select a live stream and press play.
344
Pearl-2 User Guide
Play directly to a media player
Recorded files
Recorded files are shown in the Recorded Files folder. Files are organized by the channel or recorder from
which they were recorded. Windows Media Player shows the recorder files side by side with the channels and
other digital media players show the recorded files in a file tree format, see below.
UPnP can also be used to directly play a recording to the digital media player, or to set a media player to
automatically play a particular live stream after reboot of Pearl-2. See Stream content using UPnP and Play
directly to a media player.
Play directly to a media player
If your digital media player is UPnP enabled, Pearl-2 can play direct the media player to play recorded files,
without browsing through menus in the player.
Recorded files must be in MPEG-TS format and use the supported codecs: H.264 with MP3 or AAC
audio. Having a viewer password could prevent the ability to use UPnP.
To play directly to a media player:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Ensure Share recorded files through UPnP is enabled on your Pearl-2 and for the channel or
recorder you wish to share. (See Enable UPnP.)
3. Go to the recorded files list for the desired channel or recorder. (See View list of recorded files.)
4. From the list of files, select the file you want to play and click on the Play To icon for the file; a list of
visible digital media players is displayed.
5. Select a media player; the recording plays on the screen(s) connected to the media player.
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
In unmanned situations such as industrial applications and digital signs, it is useful to automatically have a
stream played to a digital media player, even if Pearl-2 restarts.
To configure auto-restart of a stream to a media player:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
345
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change UPnP device name
3. Click the UPnP link in the Configuration section; the UPnP configuration page opens.
4. Scroll to the Play on service start section.
5. Select a stream to use from the Live stream drop-down list.
6. Select a digital media player from the Player drop-down list. (Digital media players on your network
that support UPnP playback will automatically appear in the drop-down list.)
7. Click Apply.
Only a single stream and player combination can be configured for auto play. The channel's UPnP
configuration must be enabled for it to appear.
Change UPnP device name
You can configure the UPnP server name that appears for your Pearl-2. By default, if you left the server name
field blank when enabling UPnP, the server name is the system's serial number.
To change the UPnP server name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. Click the UPnP link in the Configuration section; the UPnP configuration page opens.
4. Highlight and delete the text in the Server name field, if any.
5. Type a new server name. Use characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, :, @, ^, #, -. {}, [], ().
6. Click Apply; the name changes.
346
Pearl-2 User Guide
Samples of stream settings
Samples of stream settings
When choosing your stream settings it is important to consider the stream content. When streaming fast
moving video, it's best to choose a higher bitrate and frame rate whereas if you're streaming a slide
presentation you can save on bandwidth and system processing by lowering the bitrate and frame rate.
Stream setup is a matter of balancing quality and system resource usage.
To help you to achieve this balance, the following tables list the recommended settings when streaming video
and slide content from a PC, Mac or tablet.
Streaming video content
The table below provides suggested settings to maximize your video quality while minimizing system resource
usage when streaming video content from your system.
Option
Setting
Codec
H.264
Video encoding preset
Hardware accelerated
Video encoding profile
Main
Key frame interval
2 sec
Limit frame rate
Bitrate
30
4 Mb/sec for HD; 6 Mb/sec for Full HD; 12 Mb/sec
Audio format
for 4K UHD4K
PCM 22 KHz
Streaming slide content
The table below provides suggested settings to maximize your stream quality while minimizing system
resource usage when streaming slide content from a PC, Mac or tablet.
Option
Codec
Video encoding preset
Setting
H.264
High Quality
347
Pearl-2 User Guide
Option
Streaming slide content
Setting
Video encoding profile
High
Key frame interval
2 sec
Limit frame rate
Bitrate
Audio format
15
4 Mb/sec for HD; 6 Mb/sec for Full HD; 12 Mb/sec
for 4K UHD4K
PCM 44 KHz
348
PART 4: Record
Your Pearl-2 encodes the video and audio it captures. Not only can you stream this content, but you can also
simultaneously record it. In fact, if you're streaming a picture in picture layout or low quality streams, you may
even want to create separate channels to also record each input at full frame size and with a high bitrate so
you have the best possible digital media for future re-use or post-processing.
If you choose to record your channels, Pearl-2 stores the recorded files on the system's amply-sized hard drive
and provides you a variety of automatic or manual mechanisms to download the files.
This section discusses the following topics related to recording:
l What is a recording?
l Recorders
l Recorded files
l File and recording transfer
l Local FTP server
349
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is a recording?
What is a recording?
Your Pearl-2 can record the output from each channel. (See Recorders for information on creating multi-track
recorders using multiple channels.) Recordings are very robust and crafted so that even in the case of
accidental system shutdown, recording files are closed off and playable.
You can choose to record simultaneously while streaming, or record without streaming.
This section describes the following topics for creating and configuring recordings via the Admin panel.
l Recording basics
l Record a channel via the Admin panel
l Record a channel via the touch screen
l Record a channel via Epiphan Live
l Record a channel via the touch screen
l Configure recording file size and type
l Restart recording
Recording control is easily performed through the Admin panel, but can also be set up for third party tools
using our APIs. See Control with HTTP commands and Control with RS-232 / serial port for information on
controlling recordings with third party tools.
See Recorded files to learn how to download the recorded files.
Recording can also be controlled via the Epiphan Live control interface. See Controlling
streaming and recording using Epiphan Live for more information.
Recording basics
While recording a channel or recorder, a new file is created each time the maximum time or size limit is met.
Additionally, when recording a multi-channel recorder or a multi-source layout channel, a new file is created if
an additional source is added to the recorder.
Physically removing the source (e.g. unplugging it) or otherwise interrupting the signal to the source does not
affect recording, and the recording will include the configured No Signal image. When recording auto channels,
a new recording is made when the input changes from one to another due to signal loss.
You can create AVI, MOV, MP4 or MPEG-TS recordings. Two MP4 formats are available: progressive MP4 and
MP4-fragmented. See Configure recording file size and type to learn how to change the recorded file type.
350
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel via the Admin panel
Epiphan has tested with the following players. See Troubleshooting for known player issues.
Table 43 Tested Media Players
Operating System
Tested Players
l QuickTime 10.3
l QuickTime 7.6.6+
l VLC 2.2.4
Mac OS
l Playback Pro 2.3.2
l Final Cut Pro 10.3.2
l Adobe Premier Pro CC 2017
l QuickTime 7.6.6+
l VLC 2.2.6
Windows
l Windows Media player 12+
l Movies & TV (Windows 10)
l Adobe Premier Pro CC 2015
l MPlayer
Linux
l VLC 2.2.2
HTML 5 Browsers
(Windows)
l Google Chrome 37+ (works with MOV and MP4 files using H.264 codec)
Not all media players and editors support all recording formats, such as the more modern MP4fragmented format. To playback MOV files created by Pearl-2, we recommend using a newer
player.
Record a channel via the Admin panel
Each channel has a configuration page that allows you to start, stop and configure recordings.
To start and stop channel recording:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the name of the desired channel; the channel menu expands.
351
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel via the Admin panel
3. Click the Recording link for the channel; the Recording page appears.
4. To start recording:
a. Click the Start button; the recording starts and a timer indicates how long it has been recording.
If the Start button is not active, there are no active sources for this channel or recorder.
Check your inputs to ensure signals are working as expected.
b. You may browse away from the page without affecting the recording. When the page refreshes,
the channel number is displayed in red to indicate recording is underway.
352
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record channels and recorders (using One Touch
control)
c. The system continues to record this channel (and any concurrent recordings) until it is stopped.
If the system runs out of storage space, the oldest recorded file is deleted to make room for the
new recording. The recording is broken into multiple files as defined by the channel
configuration. See Configure recording file size and type.
5. To stop recording:
a. Click the Stop button on the given channel’s Recording page. The channel number changes to
black next time the Admin panel is refreshed (by clicking a link or refreshing the page).
Record channels and recorders (using One Touch control)
Pearl-2's "One Touch" recording/streaming control allows you to control your recording and streaming
across any number of specified channels and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button. See One
Touch streaming and recording control for more information.
To control recording using One Touch control:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
1. Configure your desired channels and/or recorders for One Touch control in the admin panel (all
channels are enabled for One Touch recording by default) (see Specify channels and recorders for One
Touch recording).
2. Touch the One Touch control icon in the lower portion of the touch screen to display the One Touch
control screen. Note that you can customize how and when the One Touch control screen is displayed
353
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record channels and recorders (using One Touch
control)
in Pearl-2's admin panel (see Customize how One Touch control is displayed).
If the On Touch Control icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to
activate the control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in
the system's touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable
system information.
3. In the One Touch control screen, simply press Start to begin recording. For more information on
understanding the visual elements in the One Touch control screen, see Understand and use One
Touch control.
4. To stop recording, press Stop.
354
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel via Epiphan Live
Record a channel via Epiphan Live
You can control the recording of channels and recorders directly from the Epiphan Live Dashboard interface.
(See Accessing Epiphan Live for information about logging in to Epiphan Live.)
Streaming (and recording) control buttons are located under the Channels heading.
For each channel, the stream control is the left-most button containing the "signal" icon, and the recording
control is the right-most button containing the circle icon.
When a channel is not being streamed or recorded, the streaming and recording buttons are gray in color and
their respective timers are set to 00:00:00.
You can preview a channel by clicking on its name to display a small dropdown thumbnail view.
To start recording (and streaming) a channel, simply click the channel's recording (and/or streaming) buttons.
When clicked, the streaming button turns blue in color and the recording button turns red. The timer
contained within each respective button also begins to count upward.
355
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel via the touch screen
Alternatively, you can also control streaming and recording of a channel via the Dashboard's monitoring
panels. See Configuring Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring for more information, and the
section on Epiphan Live also contains more information on managing Your Recordings.
Record a channel via the touch screen
Pearl-2's touch screen gives you freedom to start and stop recording without needing to log in to the Admin
panel.
Simply scroll to the channel you wish to control and press the start or stop recording button.
356
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel via the touch screen
The touch screen may be configured to be always off, to prevent channel preview, or to prevent
recording control. If you are unable to follow the instructions below, see the Configure the
touch screen
To start recording:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on or to turn on the screen overlay.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control recording; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. Touch the red record button at the top right of the screen; recording starts and a timer is displayed to
show the length of the recording.
To stop recording:
1. If necessary, tap the screen once to turn it on.
2. If the grid view is showing, tap the channel for which you wish to control recording; the screen displays
the channel.
3. If necessary, tap the screen once to display controls on the channel view.
4. Touch the red record button at the top right of the screen; recording stops and the timer disappears.
357
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure recording file size and type
Configure recording file size and type
By default, recorders and channels record to AVI files. When the recording reaches 30 minutes in length or a
file size of 500 MB (whichever occurs first), the system closes the current recording file and opens a new one.
This is done seamlessly with no loss in recorded data.
You may find it useful to have recordings divided this way for ease of download, but you may also want to
change the recording limits to be larger or smaller to meet your individual situation.
Additionally, you can configure the following:
l Recorded file type (AVI, MP4-Progressive, MP4-Fragmented, MOV-Progressive or MPEG-TS)
l Recorded file prefix (the suffix is the date and time of the recording)
l Exclude a channel or recorder’s recordings from automatic upload
For MP4 recordings, select MP4 for best compatibility with video players and editors. Select MP4Fragmented for the same file format as releases 3.15.x.
There is no way to tell the difference between the two types of MP4 files after you save the
recording. Both use the .mp4 extension.
To change the recording configuration:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. For a channel recording:
a. Click the desired channel; the channel menu expands.
b. Click the Recording link for the channel; the Recording page opens.
3. For a recorder:
a. Click the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page
opens.
4. Click the change link under Recorder Setup; the recorder setup section expands. The setup page looks
slightly different for Recorders, but the options are the same.
358
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure recording file size and type
5. Select a time limit for the recording from the Time limit drop down.
6. Select a file size limit from the Size limit drop down.
Tip: If you don’t know what size to select, do some test recordings to get an idea of the file
sizes you can expect. If you want to guarantee the recording lasts to a given time limit,
select a file size that is far larger than you saw in your tests.
7. Select a file type from the File type drop down.
8. If desired, enter a prefix for the recordings. All new recording files for this channel or recorder will be
prefixed with the text you enter.
Tip: It’s best to avoid spaces in file names. Use underscores or hyphens to separate words.
9. If desired, click the check box to exclude this channel or recorder from automatic file uploads. See File
and recording transfer for information on automatic uploads.
359
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure recording file size and type
10. Click Apply; the changes are saved and the recorder setup displays the new configuration.
The table below describes the options available for recording file configuration.
Table 44 Recording File Configuration Fields
Label
Description / Options
Specifies the length of time the system waits before the recording file is saved and a
Time limit
new one is started (assuming the size limit has not yet been reached). Values range
from 5 minutes to six hours.
Specifies the maximum file size a recording can reach before it is saved and a new
Size limit
recording is started (assuming the time limit has not yet been reached). Values range
from 50 MB to 64 GB.
Specifies the recording file type. Select from AVI, MP4, MP4-Fragmented, MPEG-TS, or
MOV. Choose MPEG-TS for UPnP playback.
AVI
Generally used for playback on Windows.
A progressive version of MP4. This MP4 type has the best
video player and editor compatibility. Progressive MP4
MP4
files are initially recorded as MP4-Fragmented and are
converted when the file is closed. If power is lost during
conversion, the files are reverted to (and remain in)
File type
fragmented MP4 format.
MP4-Fragmented
MPEG-TS
A newer MP4 format. Fixed 10 second intervals.
Choose for UPnP playback. Does not support PCM audio
encoding.
A progressive version of MOV. Generally used for playback
MOV
on Mac OS. This type of MOV has the best compatibility
with video players and editors.
Specifies how the recordings are named. Recording files start with the given prefix
Filename prefix
followed by the date and time. The channel or recorder name is used if no prefix is
given. Allowed characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, , #, -, [], ().
360
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restart recording
Label
Description / Options
Automatic file
Select this if you want this channel or recorder to be part of any scheduled automatic
upload
uploads. See File and recording transfer for information on automatic uploads.
Select this if you want this channel or recorder to be available via UPnP. If global UPnP
Share via UPnP
is not enabled when you select this checkbox, a link appears to let you to fix it. Click the
link and click Apply to make the global UPnP change save your recording configuration
changes.
Single-touch
control
Record channels and recorders (using One Touch control)
If you've chosen MP4 as your file type, the file is initially saved as MP4 Fragmented, and at the
end of the recording is converted to regular MP4 (also know as MP4 Progressive) format. If the
system loses power during recording or before the conversion completes, the file is preserved but
remains in MP4 fragmented format. Simply run the file through ffmpeg or another transcoder,
preserving both audio and video output to convert to progressive format.
Restart recording
Recording files are automatically saved and new ones opened for writing when they reach the configured time
or size limit, when the channel or recorder name is changed, or when changes are made to the stream.
You cannot download files from the system while they are being recorded, so from time to time you may need
to close the current recording and restart a new one to facilitate file downloads. The system supports this
through the recording reset option, which closes the current recording file and opens a new one without
missing any frames.
To close the current recording and start a new file:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. For a channel recording:
a. Click the desired channel; the channel menu expands.
b. Click the Recording link for the channel; the Recording page opens.
3. For a recorder:
a. Click the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page
opens.
361
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restart recording
4. Click the Reset button next to the stop button; the current file is stopped and a new one begins.
5. Refresh the page to see the new recorded files list.
362
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recorders
Recorders
Your Pearl-2 can record the output from each channel and, using Recorders, it can also record multiple
channels together in a single multi-track file.
Recording multiple channels at once ensures the recordings are started and stopped at the same time,
resulting in perfect synchronization. Once the recording is complete, you can automatically use one of the
system's file synchronization methods to copy it off the server, or you can use our built-in tool to split the file
into individual tracks for post-processing.
You only need to create recorders for multi-track recordings. For single channel recordings, see
Record a channel via the Admin panel.
This section describes the following topics for creating and managing multi-channel recorders.
l Add a recorder
l Change the channels recorded by a recorder
l Record with a recorder (using the admin panel)
l Record a recorder (using One Touch control)
l Record a recorder (using Epiphan Live)
l Rename a recorder
l Duplicate a recorder
l Delete a recorder
See What is a recording? to learn how to create recordings and configure recording file sizes.
Add a recorder
Each channel has its own built-in recorder that is accessible from the Recording link. If you want to record
several channels simultaneously to a multi-track file, create a new recorder.
To add a new recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Click the Add recorder link from the Recorders section; a new recorder is created and the recorder
configuration page opens. By default this recorder uses the next available number and records all
channels.
363
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the channels recorded by a recorder
Change the channels recorded by a recorder
By default when you create a new recorder, it records all the channels configured on the system. If new
channels are added, they are automatically added to the recorder.
If you wish to record a subset of channels to a single multi-track file, you can edit the channels recorded by a
recorder.
To change the channels recorded by a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click change next to the list of what is currently being recorded.
364
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record with a recorder (using the admin panel)
4. If the all channels box is selected, click it to deselect it; the other check boxes are enabled.
5. Click the check boxes for the desired channels.
Channels with no active video source are displayed in italics. You can include these channels
in your channel selections for the recorder.
6. Click Apply; the changes are reflected in the recorder configuration page.
Record with a recorder (using the admin panel)
Recorders can be stopped and started via the configuration page, the ability to Record channels and recorders
(using One Touch control), and through Epiphan Live, and Multiple recorders and channel recordings can
occur concurrently. This page gives instructions for controling Recorders via the Admin panel.
The number of channels being recorded is displayed below the recording stop/start buttons. To configure the
channels being recorded, see Change the channels recorded by a recorder.
To start and stop recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
365
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record with a recorder (using the admin panel)
2. Click the name of the desired recorder; the recorder configuration page appears.
3. To start recording:
a. Click the Start button; the recording starts and a timer indicates how long it has been recording.
b. You may browse away from the page without affecting the recording. When the page refreshes,
the recorder number is displayed in red to indicate recording is underway.
c. The system continues to record this recorder (and any concurrent recordings) until it is stopped.
If the system runs out of storage space, the oldest recorded file is deleted to make room for the
new recording. The recording is broken into multiple files as defined by the recorder
configuration.
4. To stop recording:
366
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a recorder (using One Touch control)
a. Click the Stop button on the given recorder's configuration page. The recorder number changes
to black next time the Admin panel is refreshed (by clicking a link or refreshing the page).
Record a recorder (using One Touch control)
Pearl-2's "One Touch" recording/streaming control allows you to control your recording and streaming
across any number of specified channels and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button. See One
Touch streaming and recording control for more information.
To control recording using One Touch control:
1. Configure your desired channels and/or recorders for One Touch control in the admin panel (all
channels are enabled for One Touch recording by default) (see Specify channels and recorders for One
Touch recording).
2. Touch the One Touch control icon in the lower portion of the touch screen to display the One Touch
control screen. Note that you can customize how and when the One Touch control screen is displayed
in Pearl-2's admin panel (see Customize how One Touch control is displayed.)
367
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a recorder (using Epiphan Live)
If the gear icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to activate the
control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's
touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system
information.
3. In the One Touch control screen, simply press Start to begin recording. For more information on
understanding the visual elements in the One Touch control screen, see Understand and use One
Touch control.
4. To stop recording, press Stop.
Record a recorder (using Epiphan Live)
You can record a recorder in Epiphan Live using the button(s) located in the Recorders section of the
Dashboard interface. Note that the Recorders section only appears if at least one recorder has been added via
the Admin panel (see Add a recorder for more information).
When a recorder is not being recorded, the recording button is gray in color and its timer is set to 00:00:00.
To start recording a recorder, simply click the corresponding recording button.
368
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a recorder
When clicked, the recording button turns red. The timer contained within the button also begins to count
upward. Click the button a second time to stop the recording.
See Epiphan Live to learn more about the Epiphan Live control interface.
Rename a recorder
To rename a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click the recorder name to make it editable.
4. Highlight the old name and press backspace or delete to delete it.
5. Type the new name for the channel.
6. Press Enter to save the change; the new name is reflected in the Admin panel.
You must press Enter to save the recorder name change.
Duplicate a recorder
You can duplicate any recorder you've created. All settings in the recorder you duplicate are recreated.
To duplicate a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page opens.
369
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a recorder
3. Click the Duplicate this recorder button at the top of the page. The duplicate recorder is created and
assigned the next recorder number in your list of recorders.
Delete a recorder
When you no longer need a recorder, you can delete it.
Deleting a recorder deletes all the recorded files for the recorder. Be sure you have a copy of any
important recorded files.
To delete a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click the Delete this recorder button at the top of the page; a confirmation dialog reminds you that
deleting the recorder will delete all recorded files.
370
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a recorder
4. Click OK on the confirmation dialog; the recorder is removed from the list and all its related files are
deleted from the system.
371
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recorded files
Recorded files
Recordings you make of channels or with recorders are stored on the system's internal hard drive. Pearl-2 has
a finite amount of available hard drive storage space. Though it is enough space to hold a lot of recordings, it
will eventually run out of space if recordings are added but never removed. When this happens, the system
deletes the oldest recorded files to make room for new recordings.
You can use a variety of methods to automatically transfer files from the system to local network storage.
Alternatively you can manually select individual recordings to transfer or delete.
This section discusses the following manual file management topics.
l View list of recorded files
l Download recorded files manually
l Concatenate files
l Extract tracks from a recording
l Rename recorded files
l Delete recorded files manually
For information on automatic file transfers, see File and recording transfer.
View list of recorded files
Recordings for Pearl-2 are stored for each channel and each recorder separately. To view all the recordings
stored, follow the procedures below for all channels and all recorders you have configured.
To view the recordings for a channels or recorders:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. To view files recorded for a channel:
a. Select a channel from the Channels section; the channel menu expands.
b. Select the Recording link for your channel; the Recording page appears.
3. To view files recoded for a recorder:
a. Select the recorder from the Recorders section; the recorder page appears.
4. If there are no files:
a. A message indicates there are no recorded files (for this channel).
372
Pearl-2 User Guide
Download recorded files manually
5. Otherwise:
a. All files for this channel are listed, sorted by date.
Files that are part of the same recording session are listed one after another. Three dots appear
between files of different recording sessions. The file currently being recorded (if applicable) is
shown at the top of the list. It cannot be modified or downloaded until it has finished recording.
b. You may also manage the list of recordings in Epiphan Live, using the Your Recordings section.
Download recorded files manually
Recordings can be manually downloaded from the Admin panel. You should consider deleting them from
internal storage after you complete the download. See Delete recorded files manually, below.
This procedure explains how to download files to your admin computer. See File and recording transfer for
information on transferring files to a USB drive connected to the system.
373
Pearl-2 User Guide
Concatenate files
To download recordings to your admin computer:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
3. To download an individual file:
a. Click the name of a recording file to download it.
4. To download multiple files:
a. Select the check box next to the recordings you wish to download from this channel or recorder.
b. Click Download Selected to download a zip file containing the selected recordings.
Concatenate files
After recording files on Pearl-2, you may wish to combine two or more files through concatenation. The most
common reason for this is that the maximum recording time was reached, and cut a single recording into two
files. In this case, the best solution is to use the third-party ffmpeg tool to combine the files.
Use ffmpeg (download online if necessary) to concatenate files:
1. Download the files that you need from Pearl-2 and make sure you have the right paths and file names .
For instance, "C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_12-24-13.avi"
374
Pearl-2 User Guide
Extract tracks from a recording
2. Use the command "ffmpeg -i" to specify the input file. Using the file we downloaded above, the full line
will look like this: ffmpeg -i C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_12-24-13.avi
3. After specifying the first file, use the same process for the file you wish to combine it with. Note that
you can repeat this process for as many files as you wish to concatenate. After specifying the second
file, the full line will now look like this: ffmpeg -i C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_
12-24-13.avi -i C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_12-24-14.avi
4. Finally, use the "-c copy" command to specify the output file. After the command, type in the location,
file name and file extension that you want for the concatenated file. The full line will now look like this:
ffmpeg -i C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_12-24-13.avi -i
C:\Users\Technical Writer\downloads\Auto_A_Oct28_12-24-14.avi -c copy
C:\Users\Technical Writer\Desktop\Concatenated_File.avi
5. After completing the process, you will be able to access your new file in the location you specified. The
file will move straight from the first video into the second without pause.
As mentioned, you can use this process for any number of files, but note that the more files that
are included, the higher the likelihood that there is some audio desychronization between the
clips.
Extract tracks from a recording
Recorders combine multiple channels and audio sources together in a single multi-track file. If desired, you can
create a copy of a recording with only select tracks. This feature is supported for .AVI, .MP4 and .MOV
recordings only (MPEG-TS does not support track extraction).
Specific track versions of recorded files are not included in any automatic file transfers and need
to be downloaded manually by clicking the extracted track filename. See Download recorded
files manually.
You should make sure there's enough storage space for the extracted files before you start this procedure. To
check how much internal storage space is available on Pearl-2, see Storage disk maintenance.
To create a duplicate recording file with only select tracks:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the recorder from the Recorders section; the recorder page appears.
3. Find the file you want to duplicate and click the up arrow icon next to it; a list of tracks appears.
375
Pearl-2 User Guide
Extract tracks from a recording
4. Select the track(s) you want to extract.
Tip: To deselect all tracks, click the check box for the top track, then hold SHIFT and click the
check box for the bottom track.
5. Click Extract tracks; a duplicate of the recording is made with only the selected tracks.
376
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename recorded files
Only one duplicate recording is saved per recording file. If you create a second duplicate
recording, it will overwrite the previous copy. Download the file with your extracted tracks to
preserve it.
Rename recorded files
Recording files are named based on the filename prefix specified during configuration. If needed, you can
rename them to something more descriptive.
You can also change the default naming mechanism. See Configure recording file size and type for more
details about setting filename prefixes.
To rename recordings:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
3. Select the pencil and paper icon next to the filename you wish to change.
377
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete recorded files manually
4. Type the new file name and press enter when finished.
The Admin panel keeps track of the filename extension (i.e. .avi) so you do not need to
include it when renaming the file.
Delete recorded files manually
Recordings can be manually deleted via the Admin panel. You can delete one file at a time, select multiple files
for a given recorder or channel and delete those, or you can delete all recordings for a channel or recorder.
If you want to delete all the files on the system, follow this procedure for each channel and recorder listed in
the Admin panel.
To delete recordings:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
378
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete recorded files manually
3. To delete an individual file:
a. Click the X icon to the right of a file entry to request deletion; a confirmation dialog appears.
b. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.
4. To delete multiple files for the current channel or recorder:
a. Select the check box next to the recordings you wish to delete from this channel or recorder.
b. Click Delete Selected; a confirmation dialog appears.
c. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.
The list may not update immediately. You can refresh the list by reloading the Recording
page (for channels) or the recorder settings page (for recorders).
5. To delete all files for the current channel or recorder:
a. Click Delete All; a confirmation dialog appears.
b. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.
The list may not update immediately. You can refresh the list by reloading the Recording
page (for channels) or the recorder settings page (for recorders).
379
Pearl-2 User Guide
File and recording transfer
File and recording transfer
Your Pearl-2 can be configured to automatically upload recordings from local storage to a network storage
location or an attached USB drive.
We call this process Automatic File Upload or AFU for short.
This section discusses the following generic automatic upload topics:
l Automatic file upload (AFU) overview
l Choose files to include in AFU
l Enable AFU and set parameters
And the following specific configurations based on the location of upload:
l AFU to an FTP server
l AFU using RSync
l AFU using CIFS
l AFU using SCP
l AFU to a secure FTP server
l AFU to Amazon Web Server (AWS)
l AFU to a WebDav server
l AFU or copy to USB
l Automatic
l As a one-time copy
l Manually
Lastly, this section describes how to view file upload logs and manage the AFU queue:
l View the AFU log
l View AFU status (via Pearl-2's touch screen)
l Manage the AFU queue
Automatic file upload (AFU) overview
Pearl-2 can automatically upload recorded files from channels and recorders to an accessible off-system
storage location.
380
Pearl-2 User Guide
Choose files to include in AFU
Automatic file upload is not enabled by default. You must enable this feature for each channel or recorder
that you want included in automatic file transfers. A log file of all file transfers is created that you can view
anytime from the Admin panel.
The following types of off-system storage are supported for AFU:
l FTP
l RSync
l CIFS
l SCP
l SFTP
l Amazon Web Server (AWS)
l WebDav
l USB Drive.
Only one type of AFU can be used for all file transfers from the same channel or recorder.
After you enable AFU, you can set the file transfer to happen after a set amount of time or after the file
completes recording.
Additional settings are available to help you manage your AFU recordings and avoid file name collisions at the
AFU server side. You can:
l Automatically create a folder for your recorded files using the channel or recorder name.
l Save recordings to a folder that's labeled using the Pearl-2 serial number.
Files are automatically uploaded only once. New recordings created during later sessions do not overwrite files
that were previously uploaded. A new file is uploaded.
If the connection is lost during the transfer, the transfer automatically restarts when the connection is
reestablished.
If recorded files are selected for upload while the AFU is at maximum upload capacity or when the AFU is
unavailable, they are added to an upload queue. Files and their relevant information are displayed in a list and
are uploaded when the upload capacity becomes available.
Choose files to include in AFU
When configuring automatic file upload (AFU) you need to tell the system which channels and recorders you
want included in the upload schedule.
381
Pearl-2 User Guide
Choose files to include in AFU
When you log into the system and attempt to configure your desired type of AFU you see the following
warning in the Automatic File Upload configuration page if no channels or recorders are configured to be part
of AFU.
For each channel or recorder you want to add to your AFU schedule:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. For a channel recording:
a. Click the desired channel; the channel menu expands.
b. Select the Recording link for the channel; the Recording page opens.
3. For a recorder:
a. Click the desired recorder link from the Recorders section; the recorder configuration page
opens.
382
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable AFU and set parameters
4. Select the change link under Recorder Setup; the recorder setup section expands. (The setup page
looks slightly different for Recorders, but the options are the same.)
5. Check the Automatic file upload check box.
6. Click Apply; the Recording page is refreshed and the new settings are reflected.
Now that AFU is enabled for your desired set of files, enable AFU and configure your desired mechanism.
Enable AFU and set parameters
After configuring the channels and recorders to include in your AFU schedule, you must enable AFU and
configure the frequency of transfers.
383
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable AFU and set parameters
Files saved before you complete automatic file upload configuration are not part of the automatic
upload. Manual file transfer is required for these files. See Download recorded files manually.
To set up the frequency of automatic file uploads:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select Automatic File Upload from the Configuration section; the Automatic File Upload
configuration page opens.
If your screen does not indicate that AFU is enabled for at least one channel or recorder, return
to Choose files to include in AFU
384
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable AFU and set parameters
3. Select the Enable Automatic File Upload checkbox.
4. Specify how often automatic updates should happen.
The first transfer occurs after the specified amount of time expires, or after the current file completes
recording (i.e. if the value is set to every hour and five videos are saved the first hour, those five videos
are uploaded after the first hour, and one hour later the videos saved in the second hour are
uploaded).
The following table describes the available options.
Table 45 Automatic File Upload Interval Options
Name
Description
The system uploads each file after it stops recording it. You can control file size
On file rotation
and length to determine when files are done recording. You can also use the
reset button to close the current file and open a new one. See Configure
recording file size and type.
Every hour
The system uploads completed recordings every hour.
Every 6 hours
The system uploads completed recordings every six hours.
Every 12 hours
The system uploads completed recordings every 12 hours.
Every 24 hours
The system uploads completed recordings every 24 hours.
5. (Optional) Indicate the remote path, if desired. If no path is specified, the files are copied to the root
folder of the destination file system.
If AFU to your server fails, check the server configuration and permissions. For SCP servers, if
you specify a file path that doesn't exist on the SCP server, AFU fails.
6. (Optional) Check Remove after upload to have the files deleted from local storage when upload
completes.
7. (Optional) Check Mark file as downloaded to have the color of the file link in the recording list
change to show the files are downloaded. This only applies if the files are not deleted after upload is
complete.
8. (Optional) Check Create a subfolder for each channel to save the downloaded files in to a folder.
Use either the channel or recorder name.
9. (Optional) Check Create a subfolder for device to save the downloaded files in to a folder using the
385
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to an FTP server
serial number of Pearl-2.
10. Select the protocol or destination for upload. The following table describes the options.
Table 46 Automatic File Upload Protocol Options
Name
Description
FTP Client
The system uploads to an FTP server.
RSync Client
The system uploads to a network location using RSync to copy the file.
CIFS Client
SCP Client
SFTP Client
AWS S3 Client
The system uploads to a network location using CIFS (also known as SMB or
samba) such as a shared folder on a Windows machine.
The system performs secure copy (SCP) to a remote server. Authentication is
done either by password or uploaded SSH key.
The system uploads to a secure FTP server. Authentication is done either by
password or uploaded SSH key.
The system uploads to a bucket on Amazon Web Server (AWS) Simple Storage
Solution (S3).
WebDav Client
The system uploads to a remote WebDav server.
External USB Drive
The system uploads to a USB drive connected directly to the system.
11. Follow one of the procedures below to configure your selected protocol or transfer type.
l AFU to an FTP server
l AFU using RSync
l AFU using CIFS
l AFU using SCP
l AFU to a secure FTP server
l AFU to Amazon Web Server (AWS)
l AFU to a WebDav server
l AFU or copy to USB
AFU to an FTP server
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload to an FTP Server.
386
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to an FTP server
To configure upload to an FTP server:
1. Select FTP Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration page;
the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target FTP server. The standard port is 21.
4. Enter the FTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the FTP account password in the Password field; the characters are masked with dots.
6. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
7. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload to an FTP server.
Table 47 FTP Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server
address
Description / Options
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the FTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target FTP server. Standard port is 21.
Login
Username for the FTP server.
387
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
Description / Options
Password
Password for the FTP user.
AFU using RSync
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
AFU using RSync
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload using RSync.
To configure upload using RSync:
1. Select RSync Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration page;
the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server module. This is the name of the shared folder on the server. If needed, request this
value from your network administrator.
4. Specify a username for the RSync Server in the Login field. The user must have write permissions for
the module.
5. Specify the password for the user in the Password field; the value is masked by dots.
388
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU using CIFS
6. If desired, select the Checksum check box to add a checksum validation to the transfer between the
system and the recipient server.
7. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload to an RSync server.
Table 48 RSync Automatic File Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server
address
Description / Options
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the RSync server.
Server module The name of the shared folder on the RSync server.
Login
Username for the RSync server.
Password
Password for the RSync user.
Checksum
Select to enable checksum checking during file transfer. This increases the time taken to
transfer, but also increases reliability of the transfer.
AFU using CIFS
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload using CIFS (also known as SMB or samba).
To configure upload using CIFS:
1. Select CIFS Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration page;
the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
389
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU using CIFS
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Enter the target Server port, if you have configured the server to use something non-standard. Leave
this value blank to use the default port.
4. Specify the Server share. This is the CIFS share name or the name of the shared folder on the server.
If needed, request this value from the network administrator.
5. If the system is in a different domain than the server or if it is part of Active Directory, enter the
Domain name of the CIFS server.
6. Specify a username for the CIFS Server in the Login field. The user must have write permissions for the
share folder.
7. Specify the password for the user in the Password field; the value is masked by dots.
8. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
9. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload to a CIFS server.
Table 49 CIFS Automatic File Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server Port
Description / Options
The CIFS server port. Leave blank to use the default port, or enter the port used for your
CIFS server.
390
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
AFU using SCP
Description / Options
Server
address
Server share
Domain
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the CIFS server.
The name of the shared folder on the CIFS server.
The CIFS server's Windows domain or Work Group name . Needed if the server is part of
Active Directory or a Domain Controller.
Login
Username for the CIFS server.
Password
Password for the CIFS user.
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4, .ts or
.avi).
AFU using SCP
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload via secure copy (SCP).
AFU to an SCP server fails if you specify a file path that doesn't exist on the server.
To configure upload via SCP:
1. Select SCP Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration page;
the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
391
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU using SCP
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the destination SCP server. The standard port is 22.
4. Enter the SCP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the SCP account password in the Password field; the characters are masked with dots.
(Alternatively you can choose to use a private key instead of a password for authentication.)
For secure copy you can upload an SSH identity for your Pearl-2. This key must be trusted
by the destination server. Details for generating the key and setting up this trust are
beyond the scope of this document.
392
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU using SCP
6. If desired, scroll down to the section labelled SSH identity for SCP and SFTP clients.
1. If no identity is uploaded, or to upload a new identity (overwrites the old identity):
a. Click Choose File; a file selection dialog opens.
b. Select the private key file from your hard drive and click Open.
The system accepts RSA keys for SSH-1; DSA, ECDSA, EC25519 and RSA for SSH-2.
Keys must be in OpenSSH format.
c. Click Upload to upload the file.
2. Use the Test your key field to test your uploaded key against the secure server, if desired.
7. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload using SCP.
Table 50 SCP Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
Description / Options
Server address The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the destination server.
Server port
The SCP port used by the target server. Standard port is 22.
Login
Username for the SCP server.
Password
Password for the SCP user.
393
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to a secure FTP server
AFU to a secure FTP server
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload to a secure FTP Server (SFTP).
To configure upload to a secure FTP (SFTP) server:
1. Select SFTP Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration page;
the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target SFTP server. The standard port is 22.
4. Enter the SFTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the SFTP account password in the Password field; the characters are masked with dots.
(Alternatively you can choose to use a private key instead of a password for authentication.)
6. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
For secure file transfer you can upload an SSH identity for your Pearl-2. This key must be
trusted by the destination server. Details for generating the key and setting up this trust
are beyond the scope of this document.
394
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to a secure FTP server
7. If desired, scroll down to the section labelled SSH identity for SCP and SFTP clients.
1. If no identity is uploaded, or to upload a new identity (overwrites the old identity):
a. Click Choose File; a file selection dialog opens.
b. Select the private key file from your hard drive and click Open.
The system accepts RSA keys for SSH-1; DSA, ECDSA, EC25519 and RSA for SSH-2.
Keys must be in OpenSSH format.
c. Click Upload to upload the file.
2. Use the Test your key field to test your uploaded key against the secure server, if desired.
8. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload to a SFTP server.
Table 51 SFTP Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server
address
Description / Options
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the SFTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target SFTP server. Standard port is 22.
Login
Username for the SFTP server.
Password
Password for the SFTP user.
395
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
AFU to Amazon Web Server (AWS)
Description / Options
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
AFU to Amazon Web Server (AWS)
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters before you
configure uploading files automatically to a bucket on Amazon Simple Storage Solution (S3).
You must have read and write privileges for your AWS account to setup AFU to upload to an AWS S3 location.
To configure upload to AWS S3:
1. Select AWS S3 Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration
page; the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
2. Specify the AWS Region Code and the data storage Bucket where you want to upload the file.
3. Enter your AWS Access Key Id and Secret Access Key to authenticate access to the AWS S3 data
storage bucket.
4. In the Session Token field, enter the temporary token you got from the AWS Security Token Service
(STS).
5. Click Apply.
The following table describes the options for uploading to AWS S3.
396
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to a WebDav server
Table 52 AWS Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
AWS Region Code
Bucket
Access Key Id
Secret Access Key
Session Token
Description / Options
The geographical region of the AWS server that contains the bucket you want to
upload to, e.g. us-east-2.
The id of the data storage container you created in Amazon S3 for the recorded live
streaming files.
The Access Key Id is part of your access key for your AWS account, i.e.
GAKSOSIFDONN2EXAMPLE.
The secret access key is part of your access key for your AWS account,
i.e.bHaprXUenFEMI/K6MANVG/cPxDfiBYEXAMPLEKEY.
The temporary security token provided by the AWS Security Token Service (STS) that
allows access to your AWS account for authorized users.
AFU to a WebDav server
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload to a WebDav Server.
To configure upload to a WebDav server:
1. Select WebDav Client from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload configuration
page; the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
397
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU or copy to USB
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target WebDav server. The standard port is 21.
4. Enter the FTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the FTP account password in the Password field; the characters are masked with dots.
6. Select Enable HTTPS if you need a secure HTTPS link to the WebDav server.
7. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
8. Click Apply; if there are any problems the system notifies you with a message: One or more parameter
values are not valid and those were not applied!
The following table describes the options applicable to configuring upload to a WebDav server.
Table 53 WebDav Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server
address
Description / Options
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the FTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target WebDav server. Standard port is 21.
Login
Username for the WebDav server.
Password
Password for the WebDav user.
Enable HTTPS
Select if you need to use a secured HTTPS link to the WebDav server.
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
AFU or copy to USB
The system is equipped with USB 3.0 ports that can be used to copy files from internal storage to external
USB flash drives or hard drives. An example use of this feature is to provide speakers with a copy of their
presentation before they leave the presentation venue.
The external drive must be formatted with one of the following file systems:
l FAT16
l FAT32
l XFS
398
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU to a USB drive
l EXT2
l NTFS
l EXT3
l EXT4
File transfer to a USB drive occurs in one of the following ways. This section describes the procedures.
l AFU to a USB drive
l One-time copy/move of all recorded files to USB drive
l Manually copy recorded files to USB drive
l View available USB storage space
l Safely eject the USB drive
Only one copy or move to USB operation is permitted at a time, even though the UI may appear
to let you start a second one. Please wait until the first is complete before starting a new
operation.
AFU to a USB drive
This procedure assumes you have completed the steps in Enable AFU and set parameters and wish to
continue with configuration of upload to a USB drive.
To configure automatic upload to a USB drive:
(USB ports are available on both the back and the front of Pearl-2 .)
1. Insert the properly formatted USB drive into one of the system’s USB ports. (USB ports are available
on both the back and the front of Pearl-2 .)
2. Select External USB Drive from the protocol drop down list in the Automatic File Upload
configuration page; the lower half of the page reflects the selection.
3. If your Automatic File Upload setting conflicts with your new USB drive setting, a message is displayed.
399
Pearl-2 User Guide
One-time copy/move of all recorded files to USB drive
4. Click the fix link.
Using the fix link disables any other type of automatic file upload you have configured.
When you are done with USB uploads, return to the Automatic File Upload configuration
page and re-configure FTP, RSYNC, or CIFS.
After clicking the fix link, the text changes to "will be fixed", however changes are saved only
after clicking Apply.
5. Select Create a subfolder for each channel to have recordings organized by channel.
6. Click Apply; the changes are saved.
One-time copy/move of all recorded files to USB drive
When configured to make a one-time copy of files, the system will automatically begin to copy files to an
inserted USB drive, starting with the newest recording. Files will continue to copy until all are copied, the
specified maximum number of files is copied, or the target drive runs out of storage space.
The file currently being recorded (if any) cannot be transferred until recording is completed.
This procedure is separate from automatic file upload and does not need any pre-configuration in the
automatic file upload page.
Ideally only USB drives with visible activity indicators should be used.
400
Pearl-2 User Guide
One-time copy/move of all recorded files to USB drive
To configure a one-time copy of all recorded files to a USB drive:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the External USB Drive link in the Configuration section; the External USB Drive configuration
page is displayed.
3. Select used for one-time move/copy of the recorded files (upon insertion) from the drop down
list.
4. Select the appropriate check boxes based on the descriptions provided in the following table. If your
USB drive does not have activity indicators it is suggested you select either remove after copying or
mark file as downloaded so you know when the transfer is complete.
Table 54 One-Time Transfer/Copy to External USB Drive Options
Name
Description
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder with the system’s
create subfolder with
serial number on the USB drive. This is useful if you are using the same
serial number (<serial>)
drive to collect recordings from multiple systems and want to know which
system they came from.
create subfolder for
each channel
remove after copying
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder for each channel and
recorder (within the subfolder for the serial number, if that option is also
selected). Files are copied to their respective folders.
If checked, the file(s) are removed after being copied to the USB drive.
Checking this box makes the transfer a move instead of a copy.
If checked, the files that are downloaded are marked with a downloaded
mark file as downloaded
icon when viewing file lists. This has no effect if remove after copying is
checked.
ignore already
If checked, files that were previously downloaded or marked as
downloaded files
downloaded are not included in subsequent downloads.
401
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manually copy recorded files to USB drive
5. Click Apply; the changes are saved.
If a conflict is reported regarding the Automatic file upload, go to the Automatic File Upload
configuration page and disable automatic file upload or switch it to a non-USB based
upload type. Repeat the steps above.
6. Insert the properly formatted USB drive into one of the system’s USB ports; the drive is recognized and
the transfer begins. If the drive has an activity indicator light, it flashes during the transfer.
7. When the activity light stops flashing, remove the USB drive.
8. If your USB drive does not have activity indicators:
a. Check the Recording list for each channel and the Recorded Files list for each recorder to
verify if there are files that have yet to be copied.
b. Safely eject the USB drive when you are satisfied all files have been copied, or if you see the USB
drive is out of storage space (View available USB storage space).
Manually copy recorded files to USB drive
You can manually copy recorder files to a USB drive connected to Pearl-2.
This procedure is separate from automatic file upload and does not need any pre-configuration in the
automatic file upload page.
To manually copy recorded files to a USB drive:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the External USB Drive link in the Configuration section; the External USB Drive configuration
page is displayed.
3. Select used to manually move/copy selected files via the Admin panel from the drop down list.
4. Click Apply; the changes are saved.
402
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manually copy recorded files to USB drive
If a conflict is reported regarding the Automatic file upload, go to the Automatic File Upload
configuration page and disable automatic file upload or switch it to a non-USB based
upload type. Repeat the steps above.
5. Insert your USB drive in an available USB port on the system. (It is recommended you only use one
USB drive at a time.) (USB ports are available on both the back and the front of Pearl-2 .)
6. To download files for a specific channel:
a. Select the desired channel from the Channels list
b. Click the Files Archive link for the selected Channel
7. To download files for a recorder:
a. Select the desired recorder from the Recorders list
8. Select the check box next to the files you wish to download. In the example below the topmost file is
still recording and cannot be downloaded.
9. To copy the files to the USB drive:
a. Click Copy Selected to external drive
10. To move the files to the USB drive (i.e. erase the files after the copy)
a. Click Move Selected to external drive
11. Repeat the steps to select a channel or recorder and copy or move files to the external drive until you
403
Pearl-2 User Guide
View available USB storage space
have copied all the files you wish.
12. Follow the steps to Safely eject the USB drive.
View available USB storage space
When you insert a USB drive in an available port of Pearl-2 and select an External USB Drive action other
than ignored (i.e. manual copy, automatic copy, etc), the total and free space are calculated and displayed in
the Admin panel.
To see the available USB storage space:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Insert your USB drive in an available USB port on the system. (It is recommended you only use one
USB drive at a time.) (USB ports are available on both the back and the front of Pearl-2 .)
3. Scroll to the bottom of the Admin panel page; external USB storage is displayed under internal storage
space.
Safely eject the USB drive
When you have completed work with the USB drive you can safely eject it by using the link at the bottom of
the Admin panel page.
To safely eject the USB drive:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the Admin panel page; click the eject link below external storage space.
404
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the AFU log
3. When prompted, click OK to confirm that you want to eject the USB drive.
4. Disconnect the USB drive from the system.
View the AFU log
A log is kept of automatic file uploads.
To view the log:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select Automatic File Upload from the Configuration section; the Automatic File Upload
configuration page opens.
405
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU status
3. Click the Show log of automatic file upload link; the log page opens. Note the page is blank if there
are no logs present.
4. Click the browser's back button when you are done.
View AFU status
You can view basic Automatic File Upload (AFU) information from your Pearl-2's touch screen.
See File and recording transfer to learn how to configure AFU settings in the Admin panel.
406
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU status
Table 55 AFU status touch screen components
Label Name
Description
Indicates the AFU status:
l Enabled
l Disabled
1
Status
l Waiting – files are in queue to be transmitted for upload
according to specified time interval – within the next 6,
12 or 24 hours. (See Enable AFU and set parameters)
l Error – an error has occurred with the AFU
Provides the configured AFU protocol:
l FTP
l RSYNC
l CIFS
2
Protocol
l SCP
l SFTP
l AWS S3 Client
l WebDav
l External USB drive
3
Queue
Displays the number of files currently in the AFU queue and
the total file size.
To access the Automatic File Upload status in the touch screen:
1. Touch the system settings button (the gear icon) in the lower right corner of the screen.
407
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manage the AFU queue
If the gear icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to activate the
control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's
touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system
information.
2. Touch the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to naviaget to the second Settings page.
3. Touch Automatic File Upload to display the AFU Status page.
To close the system information screen, touch Back (in the upper-left corner of the screen) to return to the
System Settings view, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
Manage the AFU queue
The AFU queue displays a list of recording files waiting to be uploaded. Individual file details can be viewed
using the Admin panel.
Access the AFU queue
Accessing the AFU queue allows you to view the list of files queued for upload using the Admin panel.
408
Pearl-2 User Guide
View content in the AFU queue
To access the AFU queue:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
3. From the Admin panel, click Automatic File Upload; if there are files to be uploaded, they are
displayed under the Upload Queue header.
View content in the AFU queue
There are several buttons in the Admin panel that allow you the ability to control how you see your queued
content.
To control how you view content in the AFU queue:
1. Navigate to the bottom of the upload queue list and manipulate the list view using the Newer 5 and
Top of the List buttons.
409
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete content in the AFU queue
The upload queue can display only 15 files at one time. Additional content is still stored and
is viewed in increments of five files using the Newer 5 button.
Delete content in the AFU queue
Files can be deleted from the upload queue, either individually or as a group.
To remove content from the upload queue:
1. Navigate to the bottom of the upload queue and click Empty Queue to delete the entire upload
queue, or click the red 'X' icon at the end of each row to remove files individually.
Note that there is no confirmation prompt after pressing Empty Queue. Once pressed,
the queue is immediately deleted with no way to restore the queued files.
410
Pearl-2 User Guide
Local FTP server
Local FTP server
Pearl-2 can act as an FTP server, allowing you to manually or automatically connect to the system and
download recordings. Depending on configuration of the FTP server, you may also be able to remotely delete
files after download, maximizing available system storage.
When using an FTP server to download a file, it is possible to start the download while that file is
still in the process of being recorded. This results in an incomplete file. To avoid this, check the
status of the file in the Admin panel before beginning the download process.
This section discusses the following FTP Server topics.
l Configure the local FTP server
l Using the local FTP server
Configure the local FTP server
To configure your sysetem's local FTP server:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the FTP Server link in the Configuration menu; the FTP Server configuration page opens.
3. To enable the FTP server:
a. Select the Enable FTP access check box.
b. Select a user from the FTP user name drop down.
411
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the local FTP server
The ftp password is the regular access password for the selected user. See User
administration for details on user names and passwords.
c. Click Apply.
4. To allow the FTP user to delete files:
a. Select the Enable FTP DELETE command check box.
b. Click Apply.
Any currently logged in ftp users must log out and back in again to have access to
the command.
5. To disable the FTP server:
a. De-select the Enable FTP access check box.
b. Click Apply.
6. To disable file deletion by FTP:
a. De-select the Enable FTP DELETE command check box.
b. Click Apply.
Any currently logged in users will continue to have access to the delete command
until they log out and log in again.
The following table summarizes the options for configuring the local FTP server.
Table 56 FTP Server Configuration Options
Name
Enable FTP access
FTP user name
Enable FTP
DELETE
command
Description / Options
The check box controls whether or not the system acts as an FTP server. By default this
is disabled.
Select one of the system users: admin, operator, or viewer. The ftp password will be the
access password for the selected user. By default the admin user is selected.
Controls whether or not FTP users can delete files. By default file deletion is not
permitted.
412
Pearl-2 User Guide
Using the local FTP server
Using the local FTP server
Once you have configured a local FTP server, you can use the tool of your choice to download files from the
system.
The system stores files in a folder structure with a folder for each channel and a folder for each recorder.
Channel folders are labeled video<channel number> (i.e. video3 for channel 3). Recorder folders are labeled
videom<recorder number> (i.e. videom1 for the first recorder). Channel and recorder numbers are displayed
next to the name of the channel or sources in the Admin panel.
To get started you will need:
l The IP address of your system (found in the Network configuration menu)
l An FTP tool
l The username and password for your FTP user (See Configure the local FTP server)
In the example below, the IP address of Pearl-2 is 192.168.1.210, the username is admin, there is no
password, and the Windows command line ftp utility is used.
To connect to the FTP server:
1. Open a command window on Windows (alternatively open a terminal window on Linux/Mac, or open
your FTP utility of choice).
2. Establish an ftp connection using the command: ftp 192.168.1.210.
3. Provide the username: admin (provide the username of your FTP user).
4. Provide the password: (provide the correct password for your FTP user); the connection is opened.
5. Use the dir command to see the file structure.
413
Pearl-2 User Guide
Using the local FTP server
6. Use dir or your tool’s GUI to look in each folder for recordings.
7. Use get or your tool’s transfer mechanism to transfer files to your computer.
8. If enabled in the FTP configuration page, delete the file after downloading it by issuing the delete
command, or using your tool’s delete mechanism.
If the delete command is not enabled, attempting to delete a file will result in an Unknown
Command error.
414
PART 5: Maintenance
This section covers topics that will keep your Pearl-2 running smoothly. It also covers the Epiphan Live
interface and ways to configure and operate your system using third party tools via HTTP or RS-232.
Specific topics covered are:
l Power down and system restart
l Perform factory reset
l Firmware upgrade
l Support
l Storage disk maintenance
l Third party integration
415
Pearl-2 User Guide
Power down and system restart
Power down and system restart
This section covers the following topics:
l Restarting the device via the Admin panel
l Shutting down the device via the Admin panel
l Shutting down the device manually
Restarting the device via the Admin panel
Pearl-2's Admin panel allows you to reboot the system.
To restart the system:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Reboot Now button; a confirmation dialog appears.
4. Click OK.
Shutting down the device via the Admin panel
The Pearl-2 Admin panel allows you to shut down the system.
To shut down the system:
416
Pearl-2 User Guide
Shutting down the device manually
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Shutdown Now button; a confirmation dialog appears.
4. Click OK.
Shutting down the device manually
You can manually shut down the Pearl-2 via the button physically located on the system.
Note: The power button for Pearl-2 is found on the front.
To shut down the system manually:
1. Double-click (two successive fast presses and releases) the system power button to initiate a safe
power down; the system shuts down.
If the system is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds to force an
immediate power down.
417
Pearl-2 User Guide
Save and restore device configuration
Save and restore device configuration
The previously used backup and restore procedure is replaced by configuration presets, which are the perfect
way to backup all or any set of your configuration items for future import back to the same system or
another. See Configuration presets for more details.
418
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform factory reset
Perform factory reset
If you’ve been testing with your Pearl-2 and are ready to reset it back to factory settings, you can do this
through the Admin panel.
This section covers the following topics:
l Restore factory configuration via the Admin panel
Restore factory configuration via the Admin panel
The Admin panel allows you to restore the factory configuration to return your Pearl-2 back to the original
settings it had when you purchased it.
Restoring the factory settings erases everything on the system. This includes all your source
settings, channels, configuration presets, network settings and all saved files.
Consider using the factory default configuration preset if you want to preserve files. See
Configuration presets.
Only proceed if you know this is what you want to do.
To restore the factory configuration via the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Reset button next to Factory Reset; a warning dialog appears asking you to confirm this
destructive action.
419
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restore factory configuration via the Admin panel
4. Click OK on the warning dialog; the system resets to factory defaults and reboots.
5. Wait for the system to reboot and begin re-configuration.
420
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
Firmware upgrade
Epiphan will from time-to-time issue an updated firmware revision to bring new features to your Pearl-2. To
take advantage of these new features, you will need to install the new firmware on the system.
This section covers the following topics:
l Check for firmware updates
l Install firmware
Check for firmware updates
When you register your product with Epiphan you are given a choice to be notified by email of firmware
updates for your system. If you selected this choice, you will be notified of updates applicable to Pearl-2.
If your Pearl-2 has internet access, you can check for updates directly by following the procedure below.
The system will also automatically check for firmware updates if the Maintenance page option Enable
connection to maintenance server is checked.
This is the preferred method of checking for firmware updates. The built-in firmware update
mechanism checks for updates that match your specific product and hardware revision.
To check for new firmware:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Firmware Upgrade link in the Configuration menu; the firmware upgrade page opens.
3. Click the check for updates link next to your current firmware version; the system connects to Epiphan
servers to look for updates.
4. If an update is found a red box appears in the top left side of the Admin panel with a link to download
and install the firmware.
5. Follow the steps below to download and install the firmware.
421
Pearl-2 User Guide
Install firmware
Install firmware
When you’ve received a new firmware file from Epiphan’s support team, schedule a time where you can
update the firmware without negatively impacting viewers or file recordings.
It is good practice to take a backup of your current configuration before applying a firmware
update. In the rare case that you wish to downgrade the firmware, you will be able to apply this
configuration backup and restore your previous state. See Create a configuration preset.
There are two ways to install new firmware: from the download link via the Admin panel, or from a file
provided by Epiphan.
Installing new firmware takes a few minutes. Broadcasting and recording are not available until
the upgrade is complete.
While the firmware update is applied, the touch screen displays a firmware update in-progress notice and no
other interaction is possible. Do not interrupt power to the system during the firmware upgrade. Confirm
using the touchscreen that the upgrade has completed successfully.
Install firmware directly from the Admin panel:
If your Pearl-2 has internet access, the easiest method of installing new firmware is to use the download link
provided when you check for new firmware.
To download new firmware directly:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Save a copy of the current system configuration, if desired. See Configuration presets.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link in the Configuration menu; the firmware upgrade page opens.
4. Click the check for updates link next to your current firmware version; the system connects to Epiphan
servers to look for updates.
5. Click download from the red box that appears at the top left of the Admin panel; the firmware is
downloaded and immediately starts to install and the firmware update box changes to have a cancel
button.
422
Pearl-2 User Guide
Install firmware directly from the Admin panel:
6. The touch screen, if enabled, also displays a notice that the firmware update is in progress.
Do not interrupt power to the system during the firmware upgrade. Confirm using the
touchscreen that the upgrade has completed successfully.
7. When the firmware update is complete, the message lets you know it is going to reboot.
8. Wait for the system to restart. Depending on the upgrade, a disk rebuild may be required, causing the
restart process to take much longer than usual.
9. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
10. Login as admin.
11. Select the Firmware Upgrade link in the Configuration menu; the firmware upgrade page opens.
12. Verify that the firmware version is the expected new version.
Although unexpected, it is possible the firmware update fails. In this case, the touch screen reports the failure.
Please collect system information such as device serial number and, if known, the previous firmware version
along with the new firmware version and contact info@epiphan.com
423
Pearl-2 User Guide
Install firmware from a file
Install firmware from a file
Before getting started, ensure you have the firmware file accessible from your admin computer.
To install new firmware from a file:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Save a copy of the current system configuration, if desired. See Configuration presets.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link in the Configuration menu; the firmware upgrade page opens.
4. Note the current firmware version listed.
5. Click the Choose File button next to Select firmware upgrade file; a file selection box opens.
6. Select the firmware upgrade file from your local computer.
7. Click Apply; the file is uploaded. The system unpacks and verifies the file. If the file is valid, the upgrade
begins.
8. The touch screen, if enabled, also displays a notice that the firmware update is in progress.
Do not interrupt power to the system during the firmware upgrade. Confirm using the
touchscreen that the upgrade has completed successfully.
9. Wait for the system to restart.
10. Connect to the Admin panel using your preferred connection mechanism. See Connect to the Admin
panel.
11. Login as admin.
12. Select the Firmware Upgrade link in the Configuration menu; the firmware upgrade page opens.
13. Verify that the firmware version is the expected new version.
Although unexpected, it is possible the firmware update fails. In this case, the touch screen reports the failure.
Please collect system information such as device serial number and, if known, the previous firmware version
along with the new firmware version and contact info@epiphan.com
424
Pearl-2 User Guide
Install firmware from a file
425
Pearl-2 User Guide
Support
Support
Epiphan provides a complimentary one-year support plan with your purchase (starting one year from the
original product shipment date) as well as two extended support plans, SupportPlan and SupportPlan+. Both
plans add two more years to extend the support to three years from original product shipment date.
To contact Epiphan support:
l Email: support@epiphan.com
l Online chat: www.epiphan.com/support (Monday to Friday between 9am and 5pm
Eastern)
l Call: 1-877-599-6581 / 613-599-6581
From time to time, Epiphan support may ask you for logs from your system. Follow the instructions in this
section to download the log files for support.
l Download logs and "allinfo"
Pearl-2 also supports remote troubleshooting by Epiphan’s support team. This service is only available to
systems covered by SupportPlan+.
Remote support allows Epiphan to assist in troubleshooting issues you experience with the system and can
also assist with resetting lost admin passwords. No private information is sent to the Epiphan maintenance
server.
By default, all systems are setup with remote support configuration enabled.
This section describes procedures for the following topics:
l Configure remote support
l Disable remote support
Remote support is only provided for systems covered by SupportPlan+. For more information
about our service plans, see www.epiphan.com/supportplan.
Download logs and "allinfo"
If requested by Epiphan support, you can download the logs files and/or "allinfo" data from your system.
These files help our support team troubleshoot problems.
To download the logs and allinfo file:
426
Pearl-2 User Guide
Download logs and "allinfo"
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Select the Permanent Logs check box.
4. Click Apply; the page updates to let you know the changes were applied.
5. Select the Maintenance link again; the maintenance page opens.
6. Click Download permanent logs; a zip file containing system logs begins to download.
7. From your browser, run the allinfo script; a file is saved to your computer.
427
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure remote support
http://<ip address of your system>/admin/allinfo.cgi
8. Share the log files and allinfo results with Epiphan support.
Configure remote support
Remote support is configured by default to connect to the Epiphan maintenance server with the domain
name epiphany.epiphan.com. The system must be able to resolve this domain name to connect to the server
and permit remote support. Remote support uses ports 22 and 30, therefore this port must be available for
communication. If your system is protected from the Internet by a firewall, speak to your network
administrator to configure the firewall appropriately.
Remote support is available from Epiphan only if your device is covered by SupportPlan+.
To configure remote support:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Click Enable remote support if the check box is not selected. This setting controls incoming links
from Epiphan.
4. Click Enable connection to maintenance server if the check box is not selected. This setting
configures outgoing links to Epiphan.
428
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable remote support
5. Ensure the server address is epiphany.epiphan.com, unless Epiphan support directs you to change it.
6. Ensure the port is 30, unless Epiphan support directs you to change it.
7. Click Apply.
8. Test that the system can access the maintenance server:
a. Select the Network link under Configuration.
b. Type epiphany.epiphan.com Network Diagnostics box.
c. Click ping.
d. Ensure the result shows an IP address for epiphany.epiphan.com and report any packet loss to
Epiphan support.
9. If the system cannot reach the maintenance server, check the network settings (see Configure DHCP)
to ensure DHCP is selected or a DNS server is listed and try again. Consult with your network
administrator if problems persist.
10. If the system reaches the maintenance server, ensure your firewall, if you have one, has port 30 open
for the system.
11. Confirm with Epiphan support that they are able to access your Pearl-2 for remote troubleshooting.
Disable remote support
By default, remote support is on. If you want to turn it off, you may use the following procedure.
Disabling remote support for Pearl-2 removes the ability for Epiphan to reset a lost admin
password. If you forget the admin password and remote support feature is off, you will need to
return the system to Epiphan for reprogramming.
To disable remote support:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Maintenance link in the Configuration menu; the maintenance page opens.
3. Click Enable remote support check box to deselect it. This prevents incoming links from Epiphan.
4. Click Enable connection to maintenance server to deselect it. This prevents outgoing links to
Epiphan.
5. Click Apply.
429
Pearl-2 User Guide
Storage disk maintenance
Storage disk maintenance
Your Pearl-2 is equipped with a solid-state storage drive for storage of recordings. Occasionally, maintenance
is required for these disks. This section describes procedures for the following topics:
l Check disk storage space
l Check disk storage space via the touch screen
l Schedule disk check
l Perform disk check
Check disk storage space
Pearl-2 has a finite amount of storage. By default, Pearl-2 has a 512 GB SSD. This storage space holds a lot of
recordings, but it can get full. It’s a good idea to monitor your current disk usage.
If available storage is low, consider removing some unneeded recordings or setting up an automatic file
transfer with deletion after transfer. See Recorded files and File and recording transfer.
Disk space can also be checked via the Epiphan Live control interface. See Configuring
Dashboard panels for visual confidence monitoring for more information.
To check disk storage space:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Check the Internal Storage section at the bottom of the menu column. The bar will be mostly green if
there is lots of space left, or mostly red if storage space is nearly full.
3. If available storage is low, take action to remove files as discussed in Recorded files and File and
recording transfer.
430
Pearl-2 User Guide
Check disk storage space via the touch screen
Check disk storage space via the touch screen
Pearl-2's touch screen can show you the system's disk space on the system information screen.
To show system information on the touch screen:
1. If the system information button does not appear on the screen, tap the screen once to turn on the
control buttons.
2. If the system information button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's touch screen
configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
3. Touch the system information button (i) on the screen
.
To close the system information screen:
1. Touch anywhere on the screen to return to the previous screen.
Schedule disk check
A disk maintenance schedule is used to check the system storage drives for errors. Two values are supplied,
one to specify the number of system restarts that should occur before disk check, and the second to specify
the number of months before performing a disk check. The disk check happens based on whichever event
occurs first.
For example, let's say the restart setting is set to 50 and the months setting is set to 6. If six months pass and
less than 50 restarts happened, a disk check will occur on the next restart. However if you do 50 restarts in
one month, the disk check will happen after the fiftieth restart.
Disk check occurs during start up and can cause a lengthy delay in starting up the system.
To set the disk check schedule:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
431
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform disk check
2. Select the Disk Check link in the Configuration menu; the disk maintenance page opens.
3. Set the number of restarts to occur before the next check. Set to 0 if you don’t want to force a
disk check after a specific number of restarts.
4. Set the number of months to pass before the next check. Set to 0 if you don’t want to force a
disk check after a specific number of months.
5. Click Save.
Perform disk check
A disk maintenance schedule is used to periodically check the system storage drives for errors. If you prefer,
you can run the disk check manually at a time that is convenient for you.
Running the disk check manually resets the timers for the scheduled disk check (i.e. next check won’t happen
automatically until either the number of restarts or months passes).
If the system is recording when you start a disk check, it will stop recording and resume after the
check is complete. Frames presented during the disk check are not part of any recording.
To start a manual disk check:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Disk Check link in the Configuration menu; the disk maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Check Now button; a new page opens showing you the progress of the disk check.
Do not interrupt power to the system during the disk check.
4. When the disk check is complete, the main page returns and a summary is shown.
432
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform disk check
5. If any unrecoverable errors are detected, contact Epiphan support.
433
Pearl-2 User Guide
Third party integration
Third party integration
Pearl-2 has a comprehensive set of APIs to allow integration with third party tools.
You can use either the HTTP or RS-232 commands to configure your system exactly how you need it. For
example you can start and stop recordings, you can configure meta data on a channel, or even change a
channel's frame size and encoding settings.
The following topics are covered in this section:
l Control with RS-232 / serial port
l Control with HTTP commands
l Configuration keys for third party APIs
434
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control with RS-232 / serial port
Control with RS-232 / serial port
Pearl-2 presents an RS-232 / serial port control interface for integration with existing control room and board
room equipment. This section covers the following topics:
l Connect and configure the RS-232 cable
l Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
l RS-232 / Serial port command examples
Connect and configure the RS-232 cable
To connect your control equipment to Pearl-2 you will need a standard RS-232 cable.
To connect the serial port cable:
1. Attach the RS-232 cable to the control interface.
2. Connect the RS-232 cable to the back of the system.
The only configuration available for the serial port is flow control. Flow control changes the rate of data
transfer over the cable. Some communication settings are static and cannot be changed. The static settings
are:
l Baud rate set at 19200
l Parity set to none
l Stop bits set to one
To configure serial port flow control:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to the Admin panel.
2. Select the Serial Port link in the Configuration menu; the serial port configuration page opens.
3. Select Hardware, Software, or None from the drop-down menu. Refer to the table below for a
description of the options.
Table 57 Serial Port Flow Control Options
Label
Hardware
Software
Description / Options
A hardware handshake mechanism is used for flow control. This is also called RTS / CTS flow
control. Select this when your control terminal requires it (see control terminal manual).
A software handshake that uses XON/XOFF characters to control the flow of data. Select this
when your control terminal requires it (see control terminal manual).
435
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
None
Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
Description / Options
No flow control is used. Only select this if your control terminal requires it (see control
terminal manual).
4. Click Apply.
Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
You can use the null-modem cable and your control terminal software to issue commands to Pearl-2 such as
when to start or stop recording, or to retrieve or set the value for various settings.
Each command sent to Pearl-2 via RS 232 must be terminated with a line feed (LF) character
(ASCII code 10). Your software may need to be configured to add the line feed to each command.
Some commands require a channel or recorder name as an argument. In those commands, the channel or
recorder name is separated from the command name by a period, as shown in the table. The channel name
value can be either the name or the index of the recorder or channel. Use of the index is recommended.
A channel's index is found by looking at the Channels list in the Admin panel. In the screen capture below, the
channel with index 1 is currently recording (it's index number is red). To address this channel via RS-232
commands, use the index 1.
For commands requiring a recorder index, determine your recorder's index by combining the recorder's
number with the prefix m. In the example below, the second recorder's index is 2. To access this recorder via
RS-232 commands, use the index m2.
436
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
The table describes the RS-232 commands supported by Pearl-2.
Table 58 Supported RS-232 Commands
Command Name
Description
Recording Commands
Starts recording for the provided channel or recorder. This can alternatively be
accomplished with the following set commands:
START.<channel>
SET.<channel>.rec_enabled=on
START.<recorder>
SAVECFG
If the channel is already recording, the current recording is continued.
Starts recording for all channels and recorders.
There is no RS-232 command to restart recording. If recording is
START
already active when the start command is issued, the recording
continues.
Stops recording for the provided channel or recorder. This can alternatively be
STOP.<channel>
accomplished with the following set commands:
STOP.<recorder>
SET.<channel>.rec_enabled=""
SAVECFG
STOP
Stops recording for all channels and recorders.
Takes a snapshot image of the current channel (supported only if the channel is
SNAPSHOT.<channel>
configured to use the Motion JPEG codec). Snapshots are saved with recording
files on the system.
Takes a snapshot image of all channels (supported only for channels configured to
SNAPSHOT
use the Motion JPEG codec). Snapshots are saved with recording files on the
system.
437
Pearl-2 User Guide
Command Name
Control Pearl-2 with RS-232
Description
Configuration Commands (see Configuration keys for third party APIs for available keys)
GET.<channel>.<key>
Gets the saved value of a given parameter for the specified channel or recorder.
GET.<recorder>.<key>
SET.<channel>.<key>
Sets the value of a given parameter for the specified channel or recorder. The
SET.<recorder>.<key>
value is not saved until the SAVECFG command is sent.
SAVECFG
Saves the parameters modified by the SET command.
Status Commands
Reports the recording status of the specified channel or recorder.
STATUS.<channel>
Status is one of:
l RUNNING
STATUS.<recorder>
l STOPPED
l UNINITIALIZED
Reports the recording status of each channel and recorder.
Status is one of:
STATUS
l RUNNING
l STOPPED
l UNINITIALIZED
FREESPACE
Reports the free storage space, in bytes.
RECTIME.<channel>
Reports the elapsed recording time in seconds for the current file on the specified
RECTIME.<recorder>
channel or recorder.
RECTIME
Reports the elapsed recording time in seconds for the current file on each channel.
Additionally, the system automatically reports its status changes back along the RS-232 connection using the
following automatic messages:
Table 59 RS-232 Status Changed Messages
Command Name
Description
Provides the status of the recording service for the channel as either:
STATUS.<channel> <status>
l Running
438
Pearl-2 User Guide
Command Name
RS-232 / Serial port command examples
Description
l Stopped
l Uninitialized
The Uninitialized status is sent when there is an internal error. Check the
system for more details.
RS-232 / Serial port command examples
The following examples demonstrate how to use some of the RS-232 commands supported by the system.
The list of supported SET and GET parameters are found in Configuration keys for third party APIs .
Each command sent to Pearl-2 via RS 232 must be terminated with a line feed (LF) character
(ASCII code 10). Your software may need to be configured to add the line feed to each command.
For values with spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. For empty values, use empty quotation marks
with nothing between.
You must always follow a "SET" command in RS-232 with the "SAVECFG" command. Otherwise the
new configuration setting(s) will not take effect. See "SET" examples below.
1. To start recording on channel 2:
START.2
2. To stop recording on channel 2:
STOP.2
3. To start recording on all channels and recorders:
START
4. To get the value of the frame size (resolution) for channel 2:
GET.2.framesize
5. To set the frame size (resolution) on channel 2, enclose the parameter in quotes to preserve the spaces:
439
Pearl-2 User Guide
RS-232 / Serial port command examples
SET.2.framesize="640 x 480"
SAVECFG
6. To enable broadcasting audio on channel 2:
SET.2.audio=on
SAVECFG
76. To disable broadcasting audio on channel 2:
SET.2.audio=""
SAVECFG
440
Pearl-2 User Guide
Control with HTTP commands
Control with HTTP commands
Pearl-2 has an HTTP API interface for configuration and control by a third party application or with a script
that sends commands to the system as a series of URLs. This section covers the following topics:
l HTTP command syntax
l HTTP command examples
l Global variable HTTP command syntax for custom layouts
HTTP command syntax
Control of Pearl-2 by HTTP is done by sending commands to one of two URLs and specifying the target
configuration item. Syntax for the get and set commands follows.
Many commands require a channel or recorder index as an argument. A channel's index is found by looking at
the Channels list in the Admin panel. In the screen capture below, the channel with index 1 is currently
recording (it's index number is red). To address this channel via http commands, use the index channel1.
For commands requiring a recorder index, determine your recorder's index by combining the recorder's
number with the prefix channelm. In the example below, the second recorder's index is 2. To access this
recorder via http commands, use the index channelm2.
441
Pearl-2 User Guide
HTTP command syntax
To Get configuration settings:
http://<address>/admin/channel<N>/get_params.cgi?key
(or for recorders, add 'm' before the recorder number, i.e. channelm1 for recorder 1)
http://<address>/admin/channelm<N>/get_params.cgi?key
To Set configuration settings:
http://<address>/admin/channel<N>/set_params.cgi?key=value
(or for recorders, add 'm' before the recorder number, i.e. channelm1 for recorder 1)
http://<address>/admin/channelm<N>/set_params.cgi?key
Where <address> is the IP address of the system, channel<N> is the channel number (i.e. channel2 for
channel number two), channelm2 for recorder two, key is the key for the configuration item being checked or
changed (see the list in Configuration keys for third party APIs ), and value is the value to set for the
configuration item.
Multiple requests at once
You can include multiple key/value pairs in a single command by separating the statements with &.
For example, the key for product name is product_name and the key for firmware version is firmware_
version. To send a request for both the product name and the firmware version, use the following command:
http://<address>/admin/channel1/get_params.cgi?product_name&firmware_version
Or, to turnoff publishing (set to 0) and set the bitrate (vbitrate) to 256,000:
http://<address>/admin/channel1/set_params.cgi?publish_type=0&vbitrate=256K
Third party applications like wget
If you’re using a third party application like wget to send commands to the system, always include the admin
username and password when viewing or setting configuration items.
The syntax for wget commands is shown below. Specify your system’s IP address, password and the key(s) or
value(s) you wish to query. Note your system may require use of single quotes around the password to
handle special characters such as exclamation marks.
442
Pearl-2 User Guide
HTTP command examples
get_param using wget:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=<password> http://<address>/admin/channel<N>/get_
params.cgi?<key>[&<key>]
set_param using wget:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=<password> http://<address>/admin/channel<N>/set_
params.cgi?<key>=<value>[&<key>=<value>]
HTTP command examples
Some configuration of Pearl-2 can be done by non-interactive http commands. The following examples
demonstrate how to use wget to exercise some of the HTTP commands supported by the system.
For values with spaces, encode space as %20. i.e.: set_params.cgi?framesize=640%20x%20480
The examples assume a system IP address of 192.30.23.45 and admin password pass123.
1. To get the type of stream being published and frame size for channel 1:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=pass123 http://192.30.23.45/admin/channel1/get_
params.cgi?publish_type&framesize
2. To set the publish stream type to RTMP Push (6) and at the title “System Stream” for channel 2:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=pass123 http://192.30.23.45/admin/channel2/set_
params.cgi?publish_type=6&title=System%20Stream
3. To start recording on channel 2:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=pass123 http://192.30.23.45/admin/channel2/set_
params.cgi?rec_enabled=on
4. To stop recording on channel 2:
443
Pearl-2 User Guide
Global variable HTTP command syntax for
custom layouts
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=pass123 http://192.30.23.45/admin/channel2/set_
params.cgi?rec_enabled=""
5. To start recording on recorder 2:
wget --http-user=admin --http-passwd=pass123 http://192.30.23.45/admin/channelm2/set_
params.cgi?rec_enabled=on
Global variable HTTP command syntax for custom layouts
Your Pearl-2 can create global variables via HTTP for use specifically with custom layout as responsive text
overlay elements. See Add a text overlay (custom channel) for more information on adding a global variable
into a custom layout.
Important considerations for global custom layout variables
l Each system variable must have its own unique name
l System variable names and variable values are case sensitive
l Each variable name must start with a letter or underscore sign and is followed by any combination of
letters, digits and underscore characters [A-Za-z_0-9]{0,32} to a limit of 32 total characters (note that
saving an empty string to a variable will clear the variable value)
l There is a limit of 1024 total unique system variables per Pearl-2 system
l System variables can be used in text labels across any number of channels
l System variable commands can be issued at a frequency of 5 per second, and up to 6 variables may be
set in a single command (for example, variables "gpsvar1", "gpsvar2" and "gpsvar3" can be updated in a
single command, five times per second). After issuing a set command, all channels using the specified
variable(s) are updated. The frequency of commands issued is not influenced by the number of
channels on your Pearl-2 system.
l System variables are considered volatile data and are erased when your Pearl-2 system reboots
Set variables – syntax and example
A set command saves a value to a variable, where <address> is the IP address of the Pearl-2, name is the
unique name for each variable, and value is the text/character content stored in each variable.
You can set multiple variables at the same time by separating each variable with an "&" (as shown within the
square brackets in the syntax below).
To "set" variables, use the following syntax:
444
Global variable HTTP command syntax for
Pearl-2 User Guide
custom layouts
http://<address>/admin/set_variables.cgi?name1=value1[&nameN=valueN]
For values with spaces, encode space as %20. (i.e.: set_variables.cgi?name1=640%20x%20480)
To erase a previously set variable, simply set the variable's name with an empty space.
Example: "http://192.168.0.129/admin/set_
variables.cgi?gpsvar1=N103%2068201%20W765%2029712&gpsvar2=S490%2018731%
20E756%2019890&gpsvar3=N123%2046891%20W345%2065431&gpsvar4=S767%2033410
%20E770%2004513"
sets:
"gpsvar1"
"gpsvar2"
"gpsvar3"
"gpsvar4"
to
to
to
to
"N103
"S490
"N123
"S767
68201
18731
46891
33410
W765
E756
W345
E770
29712"
19890"
65431"
04513"
Get variables – syntax and example
A get command returns the value of a variable (called name in the syntax). You can return multiple variables
at the same time by separating each variable with an "&" (as shown within the square brackets in the syntax
below).
To "get" a variable (or a list of specified variables), use the following syntax:
http://<address>/admin/get_variables.cgi?name1[&nameN]
Example: "http://192.168.0.129/admin/get_variables.cgi?gpsvar1"
returns:
"gpsvar1=N103 68201 W765 29712"
To "get" a list of all variables saved to your Pearl-2, use the following syntax:
http://<address>/admin/get_variables.cgi
Example: "http://192.168.0.129/admin/get_variables.cgi"
returns:
"gpsvar1=N103 68201 W765 29712
445
Pearl-2 User Guide
Global variable HTTP command syntax for
custom layouts
gpsvar2=S490 18731 E756 19890
gpsvar3=N123 46891 W345 65431
gpsvar4=S767 33410 E770 04513"
To learn how to use global variables as text overlays in custom channels, see Add a text overlay (custom
channel).
446
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration keys for third party APIs
Configuration keys for third party APIs
Using HTTP or RS-232, you can send commands to the system to query or configure the system. For the RS232 and HTTP syntax see Control with RS-232 / serial port and Control with HTTP commands.
Using a "SET" command in RS-232 must always follow with the "SAVECFG" command for the new
configuration setting(s) to take effect.
When setting keys to values with spaces use the following syntax.
For RS-232:
Enclose in quotes: SET.2.framesize="640 x 480"
For HTTP:
Encode each space as %20: set_params.cgi?framesize=640%20x%20480
The following sections describe the API keys supported by the system in each of these categories:
l System-level settings keys (read-only)
l System-level settings keys (read/write)
l System-level custom layout keys (read/write)
l Touch screen settings keys (read/write)
l Recording configuration keys
l HTTP server configuration keys
l IP-based access control configuration keys
l UPnP configuration keys
l Broadcast configuration keys
l Channel encoder configuration keys
l Channel layout configuration keys
l Audio configuration keys
l Stream publishing configuration keys
447
Pearl-2 User Guide
System-level settings keys (read-only)
l RTSP Announce configuration keys (Publish type 2)
l RTP/UDP configuration keys (Publish type 3)
l MPEG-TS configuration keys (Publish types 4 and 5)
l RTMP push configuration keys (Publish type 6 and 7)
l Livestream configuration keys (Publish type 8)
l Content metadata configuration keys
The list of supported keys is also available for viewing from your system. Browse to the following URL (where
<address> is the IP address of the system):
http://<address>/admin/http_api.cgi
System-level settings keys (read-only)
The following read-only system-level setting keys are supported. The channel number can be omitted from
the command when requesting the value for these keys.
Table 60 Supported Read-Only System-level Settings configuration keys
Key
Values
String, including the
firmware_version
text FIRMWARE_
VERSION=.
mac_address
String
Description
The system’s firmware version.
The value is read-only.
The system’s mac address. Useful for debugging.
The value is read-only.
The product’s name.
product_name
String
Useful to confirm you are communicating with the right
product or for debugging purposes.
The value is read-only.
Name of the vendor.
vendor
Epiphan Video
The value is always “Epiphan Video”.
The value is read-only.
System-level settings keys (read/write)
The following read/write system-level setting keys are supported. The channel number can be omitted from
the command when requesting the value for these keys.
448
Pearl-2 User Guide
System-level custom layout keys (read/write)
Table 61 Supported Read/Write System-level Settings configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
frmcheck_
on
To enable firmware update checking, set to on.
enabled
empty string ("")
To disable firmware update checking, set to an empty string ("").
description
string
Enables or disables automatic firmware update checking.
To give this system a name in the Epiphan discovery utility,
specify a description string.
System-level custom layout keys (read/write)
The following read/write system-level custom layout keys are supported.
Table 62 Supported read/write system-level custom layout keys
Key
Values
Description
Any combination of
letters, digits and
name
underscore
characters [A-Za-z_09]{0,32} to a limit of
Each unique name key contains a variable value. Used for
dynamic overlay text in custom layouts (see Control with
HTTP commands and Add a text overlay (custom channel))
32 total characters
Touch screen settings keys (read/write)
The following configuration keys are supported for modifying the touch screen configuration. The channel
number can be omitted from the command when requesting or setting the value for these keys.
Table 63 Supported Touch Screen Settings configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
touchscreen_backlight
integer( 0...255)
Specify the touchscreen backlight level.
touchscreen_enabled
touchscreen_info
on
empty string ("")
on
empty string ("")
Enables or disables the touch screen.
To enable the touch screen, set to on.
To disable the touch screen, set to an empty string ("").
Enables or disables system information from the touch
screen.
To enable system info from the touch screen, set to on.
449
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recording configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
To disable system info from the touch screen, set to an
empty string ("").
Enables or disables channel preview on the touch screen.
touchscreen_preview
on
To enable preview on the touch screen, set to on.
empty string ("")
To disable preview on the touch screen, set to an empty
string ("").
Enables or disables recording control from the touch screen.
touchscreen_recordctl
on
To enable recording from the touch screen, set to on.
empty string ("")
To disable recording from the touch screen, set to an empty
string ("").
Enables or disables settings changes from the touch screen.
touchscreen_settings
on
To enable settings changes from the touch screen, set to on.
empty string ("")
To disable settings changes from the touch screen, set to an
empty string ("").
touchscreen_timeout
integer
Specify the time in seconds before the touchsreen times out.
For no timeout, use 0.
Recording configuration keys
The following recording settings are supported. When using,, specify the channel or recorder you wish to
configure.
Table 64 Supported Recording configuration keys
Key
rec_enabled
Values
on
empty string ("")
Description
Enables or disables recording.
To enable recording, set to on.
To disable recording, set to an empty string ("").
avi
mov
rec_format
mp4
mp4f
Specifies the format of the saved file. (mp4 is used for the
progressive mp4 file format, mp4f for fragmented)
ts
rec_prefix
string
Specifies a prefix for the recorded filenames.
450
Pearl-2 User Guide
HTTP server configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
rec_sizelimit
integer
Specifies the file size limit, in kilobytes (kB).
string (no quotes)
Specifies the time limit before a new recording file is created.
hh:mm:ss
For example, for 3 hour recordings, use 3:00:00
on
Specifies whether or not recordings should be available over
off
UPnP.
rec_timelimit
rec_upnp
HTTP server configuration keys
The following settings are supported for configuration of the HTTP server run by Pearl-2.
Table 65 Supported HTTP Server configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
http_port
integer
Specifies the HTTP server port.
http_sport
integer
Specifies the HTTP server SSL port (HTTPS port).
Enables or disables HTTPS (SSL Server)
To enable SSL, set to on.
http_usessl
on
To disable SSL, set to an empty string ("").
empty string ("")
When HTTPS is enabled for the Admin UI, Epiphan Live does
not display channel previews.
IP-based access control configuration keys
The following settings are supported for configuring allowed and denied IP addresses for the system ONLY,
not for individual channels. See Restrict viewers by IP address for more information on Allow and Deny lists.
Table 66 Supported IP-Based Access configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
string: commaallowips
separated list of
Specifies the IP addresses to permit access.
IP addresses and/or
To restrict access, provide a list of permitted IP addresses.
ranges.
To clear allowed IP restriction, set to an empty string ("").
empty string("")
denyips
string: comma-
Specifies the IP addresses to deny access.
separated list of
To restrict access, provide a list of denied IP addresses.
451
Pearl-2 User Guide
Key
UPnP configuration keys
Values
Description
IP addresses and/or
ranges.
To clear denied IP restriction, set to an empty string ("").
empty string("")
UPnP configuration keys
The following settings are supported for UPnP streaming.
Table 67 Supported UPnP Streaming configuration keys
Key
share_archive
Values
on
empty string ("")
Description
Enables sharing of recorded files via UPnP.
To enable sharing files over UPnP, set to on.
To disable sharing files over UPnP, set to an empty string ("").
Enables sharing of the live stream via UPnP.
share_livestreams
on
To enable stream sharing over UPnP, set to on.
empty string ("")
To disable stream sharing over UPnP, set to an empty string
("").
server_name
string
Specifies the UPnP server name.
To use the system name, set to an empty string ("").
Broadcast configuration keys
The following settings for streaming to viewers (broadcasting) are supported, including stream access control
settings.
Table 68 Supported Broadcast configuration keys
Key
bcast_disabled
rtsp_port
streamport
Values
on
empty string ("")
Description
Enables or disables the broadcast.
To disable broadcast, set to on.
To enable broadcast, set to empty string ("").
1000...65535,
Specifies the port for RTSP streaming. Note port 5557 is used
but not 5557
for network discovery and cannot be used for streaming.
1000...65535,
Specifies the port used for streaming. Note port 5557 is used
but not 5557
for network discovery and cannot be used for streaming.
452
Pearl-2 User Guide
Key
Channel encoder configuration keys
Values
Description
Overrides the global stream access settings or uses global
ac_override
on
empty string ("")
stream access settings.
To use global stream access settings, set to empty string ("").
To override global stream access settings and use local viewer
access permtions, set to on.
ac_viewerpwd
string
Specifies the password for Viewers.
ac_allowips
integer
Displays a list of the allowed IP addresses for live streams
ac_denyips
integer
Displays a list of the denied IP addresses for live streams
Channel encoder configuration keys
The following encoder settings are supported for each channel. For more information on individual items
listed, see Configure encoding .
Table 69 Supported channel encoder configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
Enables or disables use of the current signal’s resolution as the
autoframesize
on
empty string ("")
frame size. Is switched to off if a frame size is manually
specified.
To use current signal’s frame size, set to on.
To specify frame size directly, set to empty string ("").
codec
fpslimit
h.264
mjpeg
1-60
wxh
Specifies the stream codec.
Specifies the frame per second limit.
Set to your desired limit.
Specifies the frame (width by height) size in pixels.
for example:
framesize
slicemode
vbitrate
640x480, 720x400,
Set to desired size. Choose from the list in the UI or set a
1024x768,
custom value of your choosing up to the maximum output
1920x1080
resoultion supported by Pearl-2
on
Enables or disables H.264 slicing for RTP. To enable slicing, set
empty string ("")
to on. To disable slicing, set to empty string ("").
Integer
Gets or changes the video bit rate in kbit/s.
453
Pearl-2 User Guide
Key
vbufmode
vencpreset
Channel layout configuration keys
Values
1 (low delay)
2 (storage)
For low delay when streaming, specify 1.
For best results or recording, set to 2.
Specifies a video encoding preset.
5 (Hardware
For software, set to 0.
Accelerated)
For hardware acceleration (recommended), set to 5
66
77
100
qvalue
Specifies the broadcast compression level.
0 (Software)
vkeyframeinterval integer
vprofile
Description
0...100
Interval time in seconds between key frames in the encoded
stream.
Specifies the h.264 video profiles.
For Baseline profile, select 66.
For Main profile, select 77.
For High profile, select 100.
Specifies quality for M-JPEG videos.
Channel layout configuration keys
The following settings are channel layout configuration.
To work with layouts, you need to know the integer identifier for the layout. To find your layout's identifier,
select the layout from the Admin panel and look for the identifier in the browser's url bar.
Table 70 Supported channel layout configuration keys
Key
Values
active_layout
integer
Description
Specifies which layout is currently active for the specified
channel.
454
Pearl-2 User Guide
Audio configuration keys
Audio configuration keys
The following audio configuration keys are supported. For more information on individual items listed, see
Configure Encoding (Multi-source).
Table 71 Supported Audio configuration keys
Key
audio
Values
on
empty string ("")
Description
Enables or disables audio for the stream.
To enable audio, set to on.
To disable audio, set to an empty string ("").
32
64
96
audiobitrate
112
128
Specifies the audio bitrate for the stream.
Not applicable for PCM audio codecs.
160
192
audiochannels
1 (mono)
2 (stereo)
Specifies the number of audio channels.
For mono, set to 1.
For stereo, set to 2.
CODECS:
pcm_s161e (PCM)
libmp3lame (MP3)
libfacc (AAC)
audiopreset
RATES:
16000 (AAC only)
Specifies an audio code preset in the format CODEC;RATE.
i.e. libfaac;22050
22050
44100
48000
Stream publishing configuration keys
The system supports the following stream publishing settings. For more information on publishing the
stream, see What is streaming?.
455
RTSP Announce configuration keys (Publish type
Pearl-2 User Guide
2)
Table 72 Supported Stream Publishing configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
Starts or stops streaming to CDN servers (RTSP, RTMP type
streaming including Original Livestream and Wowza Cloud).
publish_enabled
on
See Stream to a CDN.
off / any other value
To turn streaming on, set to on.
To turn streaming off, set to off or to any other value.
0 (do not publish)
2 (RTSP Announce)
3 (multicast RTP/UDP)
4 (multicast MPEG-TS
over UDP)
publish_type
5 (multicast MPEG-TS
Specifies the type of stream publishing, if any.
over RTP/UDP)
6 (RTMP push)
7 (Wowza Streaming
Cloud)
8 (Original
Livestream)
RTSP Announce configuration keys (Publish type 2)
The following settings are supported when the publish type is set to RTSP Announce. For more information on
RTSP and these settings, seeTo stream content to a CDN using RTSP announceWhat is streaming?.
Table 73 Supported RTSP Announce configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
rtsp_url
string
Specifies the RTSP server announce URL.
Specifies the RTSP transport, either tcp or udp.
rtsp_transport
tcp
udp or empty string ("")
Use udp or "" for udp transport
Use tcp for tcp transport.
rtsp_username
string
Specifies the username for the RTSP server.
rtsp_password
string
Specifies the password for the RTSP server.
456
Pearl-2 User Guide
RTP/UDP configuration keys (Publish type 3)
RTP/UDP configuration keys (Publish type 3)
The following settings are supported when the publish type is set to RTP/UDP. For more information on
RTP/UDP and these settings, see What is streaming?.
Table 74 Supported RTP/UDP configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
unicast_address
string (IP address)
Specifies the unicast/multicast address.
unicast_aport
unicast_vport
1000...65535,
but not 5557
1000...65535,
but not 5557
Specifies the UDP port for RTP/UDP audio streaming. Note
port 5557 is used for network discovery and cannot be used
for streaming.
Specifies the UDP port for RTP/UDP video streaming. Note port
5557 is used for network discovery and cannot be used for
streaming.
MPEG-TS configuration keys (Publish types 4 and 5)
The following settings are supported when the publish type is set to MPEG-TS and for associated SAP
distribution. For more information on MPEG-TS and these settings, see What is streaming?Viewing with
Session Announcement Protocol (SAP).
Table 75 Supported MPEG-TS and SAP configuration keys
Key
Values
Description
unicast_address
string (IP address)
Specifies the unicast/multicast address.
unicast_mport
sap
1000...65535,
but not 5557
on
empty string ("")
Specifies the UDP port for MPEG-TS streaming. Note port 5557
is used for network discovery and cannot be used for
streaming.
Enables sharing of recorded files via SAP.
To enable sharing files over SAP, set to on.
To disable sharing files over SAP, set to an empty string ("").
sap_channel_no
integer
Specifies the SAP channel number.
sap_group
string
Specifies the SAP group name.
sap_ip
string
Specify the SAP annoucement IP.
457
RTMP push configuration keys (Publish type 6
Pearl-2 User Guide
and 7)
RTMP push configuration keys (Publish type 6 and 7)
The following settings are supported when the publish type is set to RTMP Push. For more information on
RTMP and these settings, see To stream content to a CDN using RTMP push and What is streaming?.
Table 76 Supported RTMP Push Configuration Keys
Key
Values
Description
rtmp_url
string
Specifies the RTMP server URL.
rtmp_stream
string
Specifies the RTMP stream name, as configured with the CDN.
rtmp_username
string
Specifies the username for the RTMP server.
rtmp_password
string
Specifies the password for the RTMP server.
Livestream configuration keys (Publish type 8)
The following settings are supported when the publish type is set to Original Livestream. For more
information on these settings, see Stream to Original Livestream What is streaming?.
Table 77 Supported Livestream configuration Keys
Key
Values
Description
livestream_channel
string
The channel name, configured at the Livestream server.
rtmp_username
string
Specifies the username for the Livestream server.
rtmp_password
string
Specifies the password for the Livestream server.
Content metadata configuration keys
The following keys are available for configuration of the content's metadata.
Table 78 Supported Content Metadata Configuration Keys
Key
Values
Description
Specifies the name of the author for the stream/recording.
author
string
Refer to description above on handling white space (spaces) in
the string.
Specifies a comment for the stream/recording. Refer to
comment
string
description above on handling white space (spaces) in the
string.
458
Pearl-2 User Guide
Key
Content metadata configuration keys
Values
Description
Specifies the copyright for the streaming/recording. Refer to
copyright
string
description above on handling white space (spaces) in the
string.
Specifies the title for the stream/recording. Refer to description
title
string
above on handling white space (spaces) in the string. (This
string can be displayed by certain viewing applications by
looking at the stream's metadata information.)
459
Pearl-2 User Guide
PART 6: Troubleshooting
PART 6: Troubleshooting
Use the follow tables for help if you are experiencing problems or unexpected behavior from your Pearl-2.
Table 79 Troubleshooting
Problem
Action(s) to Resolve
The most likely problem is that the 4K Feature add-on is not
4K features not working
activated. You can lean more about activating this feature here:
4K
Check each source's input from the source preview in the
Admin panel.
OR
Not sure if the connected video inputs
Check the touchscreen interface to view confidence monitoring
are being captured.
for each channel. See Touchscreen overview.
OR
Check the Dashboard interface in Epiphan Live. See Monitoring
video and audio sources.
Verify that you are using the correct audio input by following
the steps in Configure encoding .
OR
No sound is coming from an audio
source.
Check the audio meter from the Dashboard view in Epiphan
Live. See Monitoring video and audio sources.
OR
Check the touchscreen interface for audio monitoring or use
the 3.5 mm audio jack on the front of Pearl-2 to verify audio.
See Touchscreen overview.
Captured SDI audio contains audible
"clicking" sound or other audio
distortions upon playback.
Timestamps between Pearl-2 and an
RTSP source are not synchronized.
Ensure audio sample rate is set to 48 kHz. Lower sample rates
(i.e. 32 kHz and 44 kHz) can sometimes cause audio distortion.
Reconnect your RTSP source to reset desynchronized
timestamps. Verify that you are using a local NTP server on
your Pearl-2 as a time synchronization server for your RTSP
460
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
PART 6: Troubleshooting
Action(s) to Resolve
source. See Configure synchronized time (NTP, PTP v1 and
RDATE).
Too much noise is present in the audio
output.
Video playback is fine, but when I play the
clip in Adobe Premier Pro the audio and
video are out of sync.
Modify the Input Amplifier Volume parameter in the Audio
menu. Start with setting it to 40% and reduce until the noise is
no longer present. See for details on this setting.
Adobe Premiere Pro has a known issue handling video that is
recorded using a variable frame rate. Convert the clip to a
constant frame rate using a third-party software, such as
Handbrake, before editing in Adobe Premier Pro.
The following tips can help improve image quality:
1. Ensure the source resolution is used as the output or
recorded resolution. Up-scaling and down-scaling can
Image quality is poor or insufficient.
affect picture quality.
2. Increase the Bitrate value and/or decrease the Limit
frame rate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding .
The following tips can help improve frames per second (fps):
1. Increase the Limit frame rate value and/or decrease
the Bitrate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding .
2. Reduce the number of actions happening
simultaneously on the system (i.e. if streaming,
Frames per second are lower than
recording, and copying files, consider waiting to copy
expected.
files until after streaming and recording are complete).
3. Enter a low negative value (i.e. -5) in the Frame Grabber's
Vertical Shift field.
4. Reduce the number of channels encoding data.
5. Ensure the hardware-accelerated H.264 encoding preset
is chosen for all channels.
Verify that the Stream Type matches with the media player
Stream won't play in my media player or
used and that you have the correct url or SDP file for the
browser.
player. See Stream content using HTTP or RTSP and Stream to a
media player or smart TV.
461
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
PART 6: Troubleshooting
Action(s) to Resolve
If you still cannot see the stream, try disabling your local
computer firewall.
If the issue is still not resolved, contact Epiphan Support at
support@epiphan.com.
The following tips can help diagnose image problems:
1. Ensure the source resolution is used as the output or
recorded resolution. Up-scaling and down-scaling can
affect picture quality. Configure encoding .
The stream interrupts or the image
breaks up.
2. Increase the Bitrate value and/or decrease the Limit
frame rate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding .
3. Check network settings including filters, routers and
application settings. Packet loss can result in stream
failure.
If recording will not start, check the Disk Status Information to
Recording issues.
see if the system is out of disk space. See Check disk storage
space and Recorded files.
Firmware upgrade fails.
Reboot the system and try again. If the problem persists,
contact Epiphan support at support@epiphan.com.
Depending on the media player used, there could be different
issues, including:
1. On Windows 10, the Movies & TV app sometimes fails to
Certain Media players won't play encoded
playback MP4-fragmented files with MP3 audio: try
videos but others will.
changing your MP4 audio encoding to AAC.
2. Streams and recordings at very low frame rates (e.g. 1
fps) are not playable in VLC media player, use Windows
Media Player and Quicktime Player instead.
Some media players won't play MOV videos that are recorded
with MP3 audio encoding, including:
Certain Media players won't play MOV
videos.
1. VLC 2.2.4 (Microsoft Windows) if MP3 audio encoding is
at 48 kbps.
2. Movies & TV 10.16122.1029 on Windows 10.
462
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
PART 6: Troubleshooting
Action(s) to Resolve
3. Windows Media Player 12.
Choose a different audio encoding when recording MOV files or
use a different media player to playback the recording.
Legacy Ubuntu systems have poor support for HDMI 2.0, and
Ubuntu not recognizing attached
does not recognize a monitor being plugged into Pearl-2 unless
monitor
the monitor is plugged into Pearl-2 before the system is turned
on.
Feature add-on purchase/activation not
working
In Epiphan Live, sources are sometimes
invisible in the preview panel
Currently, Pearl-2 requires internet access to activate new addons. If the system has internet access, ensure that there is no
firewall preventing access to license.epiphan.com, Port 443.
This can occur if the image is too large for the panel. Check the
size of the source, and ensure that constraints are applied to
each corner of the layout.
Video output port is configured to display
4K video, but the video is not appearing
Not all AOC brand monitors are compatible with HDMI 1.4
on is configured to display working, but
output. Check the brand of your monitor and attempt on
not appearing on the connected 4K
different display.
monitor
Ensure there are no USB sticks inserted into the USB ports
System is not starting up correctly.
during power up. They may be conflicting with the internal hard
drive, causing unexpected behavior.
There are several possible causes of poor performance on web
cameras:
l The camera itself might be malfunctioning. Try hooking it
into a computer to see if the problem remains.
Web camera is not working correctly.
l If the picture quality is below standard, try adjusting the
settings using the instructions for how to Configure a
source
l Check that your web camera is on our list of supported
models. If it is not, try using a supported camera, and if
the problem persists, contact our support team.
463
Limitations and known issues
This section includes known issues or limitations that affect functionality or usability and ways that you can work
around these limitations.
Important notes about upgrading to firmware 4.3.0
l Support of the ASF streaming format is removed in 4.3.0. That format is no longer used since support of
MPEG-4 was removed in firmware 4.0.0.
l Rotating a video source is removed in 4.3.0. Existing video will no longer appear rotated.
Workaround: Physically rotate the camera or use the video source's software settings to rotate the source
image.
l Pearl-2 now supports hardware deinterlacing for SDI frame grabbers, so the option to enable software
deinterlacing for SDI ports is removed in firmware 4.3.0. No action is required for existing configurations.
l Do not interrupt power to the system during the firmware upgrade. Confirm using the touchscreen that the
upgrade has completed successfully.
Affecting encoding
l Limitation: When Pearl-2 is overloaded, video frames or audio samples can be dropped causing variable frame
rate and audio cracks.
Workaround: Pearl-2 is a powerful system capable of many simultaneous tasks, but like any other computing
device, it has finite resources. If this problem is observed, check the CPU load from your system's Info page.
To reduce system load do any of the following: disconnect unused video displays from Pearl-2's video output
ports, delete unused channels and unused layouts, or reduce the complexity of layouts by scaling at the source
instead of having the system scale, or reduce the number of sources in layouts, or reduce the frame size or
frame rate for channels displayed on the video output ports. Note that actions performed in the Admin panel
and Epiphan Live can increase overhead (such as adding channels/sources to Epiphan Live's Dashboard preview
panels), as can switching layouts via Pearl-2's touch screen.
l Video bitrate for MJPEG streams is larger than the configured value.
Workaround: Verify the actual bitrate on the channel's channel status page when there are connected viewers.
If lower bitrates are important, select another codec.
l Encoding video at 60 fps with either 16 kHz or 22 kHz AAC audio can result in some dropped video frames.
Workaround: Select another video frame rate, a different audio sampling rate, or choose MP3 audio.
l Configuring very low frame rates such as 1 fps encoding with a high bitrate setting (e.g. 7000 kbps) results in
poor video quality.
Workaround: Allow Pearl-2 to automatically select the best bitrate setting. For 1 fps, this results in a bitrate of
about 1180 kbps.
l When using an AV.io 4K video capture card in 1280x720 at 60 fps, over time the audio timestamps become
unsynchronized. This causes the audio to periodically disappear from the stream and the pipeline to restart.
Audio is eventually recovered.
Workaround: Use a different resolution or frame rate setting on the AV.io 4K.
l Occasionally, a solid black image appears when connecting an AV.io HD capture card to a USB port on Pearl-2.
Workaround: Reconnecting the capture card resolves the issue and captures the video normally.
l Some audio distortion is heard on video output port using PCM 22 kHz encoding or very low frame rate (1-5
fps).
Workaround: For best results, use AAC 48 kHz or PCM 48 kHz audio encoding and encode the channel at
higher than 5 frames per second.
Affecting streaming and recording
l When using the Admin panel to switch layouts while streaming or recording, it's possible to have a small
number of frames (approximately 100 ms worth) repeated in the stream or recording file, and over the same
time period a small number of frames from the new layout skipped. An audible stutter may also be heard on
the HDMI output.
Workaround: If dropped frames are problematic for your application, avoid using the Admin UI to switch
layouts. Use Epiphan Live or the touchscreen to switch instead.
l Streaming status on the touch screen does not include Wowza Streaming Cloud transcoder settings.
Workaround: Start the transcoder from the Pearl-2 or Wowza web UI.
l Interlaced SDI capture is sometimes shifted downwards, resulting in a small green line at the top of the video.
Workaround: This issue varies with different sources. If it is affecting your capture, the best solution is to crop
out the green line in your layout.
l During recording if the touchscreen is used to switch layouts, headphones attached to the audio jack on the
front of Pearl-2 sometimes pick up audio crackling and pops during the switching process.
Workaround: Note that these artifacts do not affect the final recording, only the audio monitoring feature. To
avoid the disruption to audio confidence monitoring, use the Pearl-2 Admin Panel or Epiphan Live to switch
between layouts.
l Extracting tracks from an .MP4 recording when there isn't enough storage space for the extracted files causes
the extracted files to become corrupted.
Workaround: Check how much internal storage space is available on Pearl-2 and delete any unnecessary
recordings to free up more space.
l Occasionally, tracks won't extract from a 64 GB .AVI multi-track recording using the Admin UI.
Workaround: Perform the extraction again.
Affecting the Admin panel
l Passwords and IP restrictions set for viewers don't restrict access when using certain common platforms or
when set on a per-channel basis if your stream uses HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) because HLS is processed
directly by the apache server.
Workaround: This only applies if you're using a password for the stream. The only common platforms where
this is a know issue are VLC and iPhone6, iOS 10.0.1, and using another platform prevents the issue. If you're
streaming over HLS, do not set viewer passwords and IP restrictions per-channel. Use global viewer passwords
and IP allow/deny lists instead.
l It is possible to name two or more channels with the same value. Use of automatic file transfer and UPnP is
unpredictable if this occurs.
Workaround: Ensure each channel has a unique name.
l The automatic file upload (AFU) file queue shows a maximum of 15 files, Newer 15 and Top of the list buttons
do not work. All files are transfered, even though they are not listed.
Workaround: Wait for the queue to have fewer files in the list. Use global viewer passwords and IP allow/deny
lists instead.
l Cropping a video source to 16:9 using the layout editor may not scale correctly and can appear as a thin line in
the layout editor. This happens when the device or web browser your using with the admin interface has a
different approach to composing layout. Recording and streaming are not affected.
Workaround: Due to color space limitations (YUV with 2x2 subsampling), the cropped region's dimensions
must be set to even values.
l Authentication to Pearl-2 using DNS login will often fail for Windows Edge, and on Mac OS X 10.10 with Safari,
Chrome, and Firefox.
Workaround: Use a different web browser such as Chrome or Internet Explorer, or use a different OS.
l When streaming to the Wowza streaming cloud, the Transcoder state field always displays a status of "starting"
even after the stream has started.
l The special preview mode that lets you preview all channels at once using a web browser isn't functioning.
Workaround: Preview individual channels using different tabs in your web browser.
Affecting Epiphan Live
l Streaming status on the Epiphan Live Dashboard interface (and touch screen) does not include information
regarding Wowza Streaming Cloud transcoder settings.
Workaround: When streaming to Wowza, ensure the transcoder in the Wowza Streaming Cloud web interface
is enabled.
l The green and red borders around the "Preview" and "Live" areas in the Channel section are offset from the
video by a few pixels.
Workaround: The offset is cosmetic and does not affect your Live stream, so no workaround is required.
l For interlaced HDMI video sources, the letter "P" appears next to the frame size for the Video input instead of
the letter "I".
l When a HDMI output assigned to a Dashboard preview panel has its source changed, the preview panel does
not automatically update to reflect the change.
Workaround: Refresh the Epiphan Live Dashboard in your web browser to update any changes in your
preview panels.
l After refreshing Epiphan Live, a prompt appears to Take Over Session, despite being logged in.
Workaround: Selecting Take Over Session does not stop your session, but rather continues it. Select Take
Over Session to continue your session.
Affecting video output ports
l Connecting an external monitor to the HDMI 1 port while Pearl-2 is powered on may cause the monitor to not
be detected.
Workaround: Connect an external monitor to the HDMI 1 port before turning on Pearl-2.
Affecting USB devices
l For the IPEVO Ziggi-HD Plus web camera, you must enable the power line frequency setting in the web camera
before connecting the camera to Pearl-2.
l The timestamp on the last recorded video frame from a Logitech BRIO 4K camera in 4K mode at 30 fps is
approximately 200 ms out of synchronization with the timestamp on the last frame recorded from the same
camera when in full HD mode. However, the actual recorded content in Pearl-2 is identical in both modes.
Affecting other areas
l AFU to Amazon Web Services S3 Simple Cloud Storage transfer sometimes does not recover after the network
connection is cut. The expected behavior is that the file transfer would restart, but there is sometimes a time
desync that results in a failed transfer.
Workaround: If the network connection is severed during a AFU transfer, the process must be restarted from
the beginning, and the transfer must proceed without interruptions to the network.
l Software-initiated reboot of Pearl-2 sometimes results in failure to recover.
Workaround: When possible, use the power button on the front of Pearl-2 to restart the system. If a software
reboot is used and the system does not restart as expected, use the power button to try restarting it, or unplug
the system for 10 seconds, then re-insert the power cord and use the power button.
Previous releases and features
This section outlines the features introduced with previous product releases.
Release 4.2.0
l USB 3.0 support for web cameras and AV.io UVC video capture cards
l Fully integrated multi-publishing
l Enhanced video cropping
l Audio delay control
l Epiphan Live recordings management
Release 4.0.1
l Launch of Pearl-2 Rackmount models
l 4K add-on
Release 4.0.0
l Inaugural release of Pearl-2 with the following features
l Capture 6 video sources at once
l Epiphan Live
l Switch video sources live
l Pro video inputs and outputs
l Pro audio inputs
l 512 GB data storage (SSD)
l Touchscreen
Software license
ATTENTION: THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT ARE BEING
LICENSED TO YOU BY EPIPHAN SYSTEMS INC. ("LICENSOR") AND ARE NOT BEING SOLD. THIS AGREEMENT
CONTAINS LIMITATIONS ON REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REMEDIES, AND LIABILITIES
THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION.
Epiphan Systems Inc.
Software License
IMPORTANT: BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION, PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT WHICH CONTAINS THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH YOU ARE ACQUIRING A LICENSE TO USE THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT
PLEASE DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION AND
PROMPTLY RETURN OR DESTROY THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. IF YOU DOWNLOAD,
INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION, YOU WILL HAVE ACCEPTED AND
AGREED TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE AND DOCUMENTATION
ARE ALSO PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS AND INTERNATIONAL COPYRIGHT TREATIES, AS WELL
AS OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAWS. IF YOU ARE AN AGENT OR EMPLOYEE OF AN ENTITY,
YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT (I) THE INDIVIDUAL ACCEPTING THIS AGREEMENT IS DULY
AUTHORIZED TO ACCEPT THIS AGREEMENT ON SUCH ENTITY'S BEHALF AND TO BIND SUCH ENTITY,
AND (II) SUCH ENTITY HAS FULL POWER, CORPORATE OR OTHERWISE, TO ENTER INTO THIS
AGREEMENT AND PERFORM ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
1. Definitions: In this Agreement:
"Agreement" means this Epiphan Systems Inc. Software License;
"API" means an application programming interface;
"Documentation" means the technical publications delivered to You with the Software relating to the
installation and operation of the Software and/or Hardware, such as reference, user, installation and technical
guides and release notes;
"Epiphan" means Epiphan Systems Inc;
"Epiphan Hardware Product" means an Epiphan hardware product (including enclosure and mechanical
parts, circuitry and electrical and electronic components contained therein) purchased by You, which is
intended to be used in conjunction with the licensed Software and Documentation;
"License Key" means a series of computer-generated characters used for the purpose of controlling the
operation of Epiphan Hardware Products and/or related Software;
"Software" means the Licensor binary and/or bytecode software and/or firmware programs that are (i)
specified in Your Order or that are included with or in the Epiphan Hardware Products specified in Your Order,
(ii) are made available to You for download after acceptance of this Agreement, (iii) are packaged with this
Agreement, (iv) pre-installed on Epiphan Hardware Products, (v) embed this Agreement in their installer(s) and
which are installed after acceptance of this Agreement, or (vi) embed this Agreement in their product
documentation. Software also includes the related Documentation;
"You" or "Your" means the individual acquiring the Software license or any entity on whose behalf such
individual is acting. In the case of an entity, "You" includes any entity that by majority voting interest controls,
is controlled by, or is under common control with You; and
"Your Order" means (i) the web forms provided by Epiphan or its applicable reseller or distributor for
ordering Epiphan Hardware Products and related Software licenses, or (ii) written documents executed by
Epiphan, or one of its resellers or distributors, and You in respect to Your purchases of Epiphan Hardware
Products and/or related Software licenses.
2. Grant of Software License: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, including payment of
any applicable fees specified in Your Order, Licensor grants You a non-exclusive, non-transferable, nonsublicensable, internal license to use the number of copies of the Software specified in Your Order and to use
the Software functions specified in Your Order solely for operation on the Epiphan Hardware Products for
which such Software has been designed as specified in the Documentation for such Software. If the number
of copies of Software is not specified in Your Order, then the number of copies shall be a reasonable number
of copies. You acknowledge and agree that the ability to use certain Software functions is controlled by a
Licensing Key and that You will not be able to use such functions unless You have paid the applicable fees
charged by Epiphan for the right to use such functions and to receive a Licensing Key to enable such
functions. For functions that are controlled by a Licensing String You shall only use that Licensing String with
the copy of the Software for which it was issued and You shall not use that copy of the Licensing String with
any other copies of the Software that You may have or make. All copies of the Software made by You shall
include all trademarks, copyright notices, restricted rights legends, proprietary markings and the like exactly as
they appear on the copy of the Software originally provided to You. No other rights in the Software or
Documentation are granted to You.
3. Open Source Software: Binary, bytecode and source code versions of certain open source software
packages may be embedded in or distributed with the Software ("Open Source Software"). If a separate
license agreement for an item of open source software is: delivered to You with the Software; included in the
download package for the Software; referenced in any material (including the Documentation) that is included
in the download or distribution package for the Software; or listed at www.epiphan.com/opensource, then
such open source software shall be Open Source Software and such separate license agreement shall govern
Your use of that item or version of such open source software. The Open Source Software may include free
software (i.e. software licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License or other free software licenses)
for which the applicable free software license may also require that the source code for such free software be
made available to those receiving only executable versions of such free software. If the source code for any
free software distributed with the Software is not provided with the Software, then upon request, within a
three (3) year period from the original receipt of the binary or bytecode version of such Open Source Software
from Licensor, for a fee that shall not exceed Licensor's costs associated with the shipping of the source code
for such free software, Licensor will provide a copy of the source code for such free software to You.
4. Restrictions: The terms set forth in this Section 4 are additional conditions to the licenses granted in
Section 2. Your right to use the Software is conditioned upon Your timely payment of the full amount of fees
due for: (i) the Epiphan Hardware Product(s) on which You want to use the Software; (ii) all support
agreements You have entered into with Licensor or any of its distributors and/or resellers; (iii) licensed
Software and Documentation.
You shall not reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile or in any other manner decode any
Epiphan Hardware Product or Software except to the extent the Software is distributed with any Open Source
Software that prohibits the imposition of such a restriction or to the extent the foregoing restriction is
expressly prohibited by applicable law notwithstanding a contractual obligation to the contrary. You
acknowledge and agree that no rights in respect to the source code of the Software are granted to You. You
acknowledge and agree that the rights in respect to use of the Software and Documentation are granted only
for use in conjunction with Epiphan Hardware Products. You shall not distribute, lease, rent, grant a security
interest in, assign, or otherwise transfer the Software except as expressly provided in this Agreement. You
shall not modify or create any derivatives works of the Software or merge all or any part of the Software with
another program. Notwithstanding the foregoing, You may call public APIs made available by Epiphan in the
Software from applications developed by or on Your behalf provided that such applications do not embed
any of the Software other than the minimum linkage materials required to call separately running instances of
the Software. You shall not use the Software or make the Software available to any third parties as part of any
service bureau, time sharing service, application service provider offering, software-as-a-service offering or any
other managed service offering. You shall not disclose any performance, benchmarking, or feature-related
information about the Software. You further agree not to disclose, transfer or otherwise provide to any third
party any portion of the Software, except as expressly permitted herein.
Some Epiphan Hardware Products and Software embed third-party APIs that integrate with third-party party
services (“Third-Party Services”) to allow users of such Epiphan Hardware Products and Software to interact
with such Third-Party Services for various capabilities offered by such Third-Party Services, such as, and
without limitation, authentication, uploading and downloading of video content and other features made
available by such Third-Party Services. If You access or use any Third-Party Service and/or related APIs using an
Epiphan Hardware Product and/or the Software then You shall comply with all of the terms and conditions for
such Third-Party Service and/or related APIs.
5. Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE PROVIDED IN ANY
COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT EXECUTED BETWEEN YOU AND LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE
OF LICENSOR’S RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS), THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE
AND/OR DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY REPRESENTATIONS,
CONDITIONS, AND/OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND. WITHOUT LIMITATION, LICENSOR AND ITS
AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND
DISTRIBUTORS DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL IMPLIED REPRESENTATIONS, CONDITIONS AND/OR
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, DURABILITY,
COMPATIBILITY, TITLE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WHETHER ARISING BY STATUTE, COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OF TRADE OR OTHERWISE. EXCEPT AS
OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANY COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT EXECUTED BETWEEN YOU AND
LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE OF LICENSOR’S RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS), THE ENTIRE
RISK OF THE USE OF THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION
SHALL BE BORNE BY YOU. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANY COMMERCIAL
AGREEMENT EXECUTED BETWEEN YOU AND LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE OF LICENSOR’S
RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS), NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY OF ITS OR
THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATIONS OR PROVIDE ANY CONDITIONS AND/OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE SUITABILITY
OF THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, SERVICES AND/OR DOCUMENTATION.
NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR PROVIDE
ANY CONDITIONS AND/OR WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER ABOUT ANY INFORMATION AND/OR DATA
THAT MAY BE PROCESSED BY OR MADE AVAILABLE USING ANY EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCT
AND/OR SOFTWARE OR ABOUT ANY THIRD-PARTY SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSIBLE USING ANY
EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY OF ITS OR
THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE
ANY LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM THIS
AGREEMENT, RELATING TO THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATING TO
ANY SERVICES PROVIDED TO YOU BY LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR
LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS) IN RELATION TO
THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SERVICES, SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION FOR ANY
INDIRECT, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO DATA,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, REPLACEMENT OR RECOVERY COSTS, OR OTHER
COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS, WHETHER ARISING FROM CONTRACT, EQUITY, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR ANY OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY, EVEN IF
LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS) HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR THEY ARE FORESEEABLE. THE LIMITATIONS IN THIS SECTION SHALL APPLY
WHETHER OR NOT THE ALLEGED BREACH OR DEFAULT IS A BREACH OF A FUNDAMENTAL
CONDITION OR TERM OR FUNDAMENTAL BREACH. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO
THESE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE
LIABILITY OF LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS) TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY
FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT, RELATING TO THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE
PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION AND/OR RELATING TO ANY SERVICES PROVIDED TO YOU
BY LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS) IN RELATION TO THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE
PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION, EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY YOU FOR
THE SOFTWARE.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF
ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR
DISTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY
WHATSOEVER IN RESPECT TO ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUE
OR PROFIT, LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA,
REPLACEMENT OR RECOVERY COSTS, OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS, ARISING FROM
OR RELATING TO ANY INFORMATION AND/OR DATA THAT MAY BE PROCESSED BY OR MADE
AVAILABLE USING ANY EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE OR ARISING FROM OR
RELATING TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSIBLE USING ANY EPIPHAN
HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE.
THE DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS AND LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY CONSTITUTE AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS AGREEMENT. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT BUT
FOR THE DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS AND LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY, NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS WOULD GRANT THE RIGHTS GRANTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
7. Term and Termination: This Agreement shall continue for as long as You use the Software, however, it
may be terminated sooner as provided in this Section 7. You may terminate this Agreement by destroying all
copies of the Software and Documentation under Your control and providing certification of such destruction
to Licensor or by returning the Software to Licensor. Licensor may terminate this Agreement immediately by
providing You with written notice if: (a) You are in material breach of any provision of this Agreement, which
breach, if capable of being cured, is not cured within thirty (30) days after Licensor gives You written notice
thereof; or (b) You have committed a non-curable material breach of this Agreement. Upon termination You
shall destroy all copies of the Software and Documentation. In addition to this Section, the Sections entitled
Definitions, Disclaimer of Warranties, Limitation of Liability, Title, Indemnities, High-Risk Activities, Intellectual
Property, and General shall continue in force even after any termination of this Agreement. No termination of
this Agreement will entitle You to a refund of any amounts paid by You to Licensor or any reseller or
distributor or affect any obligations You may have to pay any outstanding amounts owing to Licensor or any
reseller or distributor. Upon any termination of this Agreement, Your license to the Software and
Documentation will terminate and You shall destroy all copies of the Software and Documentation under
Your control and certify such destruction to Licensor.
8. Support and Updates: This Agreement does not grant You the right to any updates or enhancements of
the Software or the right to receive any technical support for the Software. Such updates and other technical
support services, if available, may be purchased separately from Licensor or one of Licensor’s resellers or
distributors. Use of any updates or enhancements to the Software provided pursuant to any technical
support You may procure from Licensor or one of Licensor’s resellers or distributors shall be governed by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Licensor reserves the right at any time not to release or to
discontinue the release of any Software and to alter prices, features, specifications, capabilities, functions,
licensing terms, release dates, general availability or other characteristics of the Software.
9. Title: All right, title, and interest (including all intellectual property rights) in, to, and under the Software
(including all copies thereof) shall remain with Licensor and its licensors.
10. Indemnities: You shall indemnify, defend and hold Licensor, its affiliates, its and their licensors, suppliers,
subcontractors, resellers and/or distributors and all of the directors, officers, employees of all of the foregoing
(collectively the “Indemnified Parties”) harmless from and against any damages, losses, liabilities, expenses,
costs, claims, demands, actions, suits and/or proceedings incurred by the Indemnified Parties as a result of (i)
Your use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation, (ii) any use of the Epiphan
Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation on Your behalf, (iii) the use of the Epiphan Hardware
Products, Software and/or Documentation by anyone to whom You give the Epiphan Hardware Products,
Software and/or Documentation, and/or (iv) the use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or
Documentation on behalf of anyone to whom You give the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or
Documentation, including, without limitation, in all of the foregoing cases, any damages, losses, liabilities,
expenses, costs, claims, demands, actions, suits and/or proceedings arising from or relating to any information
and/or data that may be processed by or made available using any Epiphan Hardware Product and/or
Software or arising from or relating to any Third-Party Service that may be accessible using any Epiphan
Hardware Product and/or Software (collectively, each matter falling within any of the foregoing, a “Claim”),
including, without limitation, indemnifying, defending and holding the Indemnified Parties harmless from and
against any settlements agreed by You in connection with any Claims and/or any damages, costs or other
amounts (including reasonable attorneys' fees) awarded to a third party against any of the Indemnified
Parties by a court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction in respect to any Claim. If You do not timely defend
against or resist a Claim after notice from Licensor, Licensor shall be entitled to investigate, defend,
compromise, settle, or otherwise dispose of the Claim, and incur costs in connection therewith, at Your
expense, in such manner as Licensor deems in its best interests until a reasonable time after You comply with
its obligations under this Section 10. You shall not enter into a settlement of any Claim without the Licensor’s
written consent unless such settlement is solely for monetary payment by You and contains an express,
complete, unconditional release of all of the Indemnified Parties and which does not impose any obligations
or restrictions on any of the Indemnified Parties.
11. High-Risk Activities: The Software and Epiphan Hardware Products are not fault-tolerant and are not
designed, manufactured or intended for use in or in conjunction with on-line control equipment in hazardous
environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation
systems, air traffic control, or direct life support machines. Licensor, its licensors, suppliers, subcontractors,
resellers and distributors specifically disclaim any express or implied representations, warranties and/or
conditions for such uses.
12. U.S. Government End-Users: The Software and Documentation are each a "commercial item" as that
term is defined at FAR 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer
software documentation" as such terms are defined in FAR 12.212, and are provided to the U.S. Government
only as commercial end items. Government end users acquire the rights set out in this Agreement for the
Software, Epiphan Hardware Products and Documentation consistent with: (i) for acquisition by or on behalf
of civilian agencies, the terms set forth in FAR12.212; or (ii) for acquisition by or on behalf of units of the
Department of Defense, the terms set forth in DFARS 227.7202. Use of the Epiphan Hardware Products,
Software and Documentation is further restricted by the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the
applicable commercial purchase agreement for the Epiphan Hardware Products. For the purposes of any
applicable government use, the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and Documentation were developed
exclusively at private expense, and are trade secrets of Epiphan Systems Inc. for the purpose of any Freedom
of Information legislation or any other disclosure statute, regulation or provision.
13. Export Restrictions: The Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and related
information are subject to export and import restrictions. By downloading, installing, or using the Software,
Epiphan Hardware Products, Documentation and/or related information, You are representing and
warranting that You are not located in, are not under the control of, and are not a national or resident of any
country to which the export of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and/or related
information would be prohibited by the laws and/or regulations of Canada or the United States. You are also
representing and warranting that You are not an individual to whom the export of the Epiphan Hardware
Products, Software, Documentation or related information would be prohibited by the laws and/or
regulations of Canada or the United States. You shall comply with the export laws and regulations of Canada
and the United States that are applicable to the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and
related information and You shall also comply with any local laws and/or regulations in Your jurisdiction that
may impact Your right to export, import, or use the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation or
related information, and You represent and warrant that You have complied with any such applicable laws
and/or regulations. The Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and related information shall
not be used for any purposes prohibited by export laws and/or regulations, including, without limitation,
nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. You shall be responsible for procuring all required
permissions for any subsequent export, import, or use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software,
Documentation or related information.
14. Intellectual Property: Epiphan, Epiphan Systems and Epiphan Video are tradenames, trademarks or
registered trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc. in certain countries. All Licensor product names and logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc. in certain countries. All other company and
product names and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners in certain
countries. You shall not disclose, transfer or otherwise provide to any third party any portion of the Software,
except as expressly permitted in this Agreement.
15. General: This Agreement is the entire agreement between You and Licensor in respect to the Software,
superseding any other agreements or discussions, oral or written. The terms and conditions of this Agreement
shall prevail over any pre-printed terms on any quotes, orders, purchase orders, or purchase order
acknowledgements, and shall prevail over any other communications between the parties in relation to the
Software. You may not assign this Agreement whether voluntarily, by operation of law, or otherwise without
Licensor's prior written consent. Licensor may assign this Agreement at any time without notice. The failure of
a party to claim a breach of any term of this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver of such breach or the
right of such party to enforce any subsequent breach of such term. If any provision of this Agreement is held
to be unenforceable or illegal, such decision shall not affect the validity or enforceability of such provisions
under other circumstances or the remaining provisions of this Agreement and such remaining provisions shall
be reformed only to the extent necessary to make them enforceable under such circumstances. This
Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario and the laws of Canada applicable
therein. No choice or conflict of laws rules of any jurisdiction shall apply to this Agreement. You shall only be
entitled to bring any action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement, the Epiphan Hardware
Products, Software, Documentation or any services provided in respect to the Epiphan Hardware Products,
Software and/or Documentation in a court in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, and You consent to the jurisdiction of
such courts for any such action or proceeding. You waive all rights that You may have or that may hereafter
arise to contest the jurisdiction of such courts for any action or proceeding brought by You. You hereby waive
any right You may have to request a jury trial with respect to any action brought by You in connection with
this Agreement, the Epiphan Hardware Products or Software or any services provided in respect to the
Epiphan Hardware Products or Software. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods to this Agreement is expressly excluded.
October 6, 2016
© 2006-2016. Epiphan Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Environmental Information
The equipment that you bought has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It
may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment. In order to avoid the
dissemination of those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources,
we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems. Those systems will reuse or recycle most of the
materials of your end life equipment in a sound way. The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to use
those systems. If you need more information about collection, reuse and recycling systems, please contact
your local or regional waste administration. You can also contact us for more information on the
environmental performance of our products.
Important Safety Warnings
WARNING: This product has no user-serviceable parts and the battery used in this device is not replaceable.
Do not attempt to disassemble. Return the device for service.
CAUTION, RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK: This device may have multiple AC power cords installed. All power
sources shall be disconnected before servicing to avoid shock hazard.
ATTENTION: Cet appareil ne contient aucun composant pouvant être entretenu ou réparé par l'utilisateur. En
cas de panne, retourner l'appareil pour réparation.
ATTENTION, RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE: Cet appareil peut être équipé de multiples cordons
d'alimentation en courant alternatif. Pour placer cet appareil hors tension, débrancher tous les cordons
d'alimentation sans exception.
FCC & CE Compliance Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this device with EMC directive of the European Community
and meets or exceeds the following technical standard.
EN 55022 - Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information
Technology Equipment.
Other Jurisdictional Issues
Epiphan makes no representation that its products or information in this document or its web site is
appropriate or available for use in your jurisdiction. Those who choose to access the Epiphan web site or use
Epiphan products do so on their own initiative and are responsible for compliance with local laws, if and to the
extent local laws are applicable
Submissions to Epiphan and Affiliated Servers
Any information, including but not limited to remarks, suggestions, ideas, graphics, or other submissions,
communicated to Epiphan through their Epiphan web site is the exclusive property of Epiphan. Epiphan is
entitled to use any information submitted for any purpose, without restriction (except as stated in Epiphan's
Privacy Statement) or compensation to the person sending the submission. The user acknowledges the
originality of any submission communicated to Epiphan and accepts responsibility for its accuracy,
appropriateness, and legality.
Third Parties and Links to Third-Party Web Sites
Mention of non-Epiphan Systems Inc. products or services on their website, or this document site is for
informational purposes and does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation.
This document may contain links to non-Epiphan web sites. These links are provided to you as a convenience,
and Epiphan is not responsible for the content of any linked web site. Any outside web site accessed from the
Epiphan web site is independent from Epiphan, and Epiphan has no control over the content of that web site.
In addition, a link to any non-Epiphan web site does not imply that Epiphan endorses or accepts any
responsibility for the content or use of such a web site.
In no event shall any reference to any third party or third party product or service be construed as an
approval or endorsement by Epiphan of that third party or of any product or service provided by a third
party.
Miscellaneous
It is the user's responsibility to ascertain whether any information downloaded from the Epiphan web site or
other websites is free of viruses, worms, trojan horses, or other items of a potentially destructive nature.
Enforcement of Terms and Conditions
These Terms and Conditions for use of this document and the associated Epiphan Product are governed and
interpreted pursuant to the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada, notwithstanding any principles of
conflicts of law.
All disputes arising out of or relating to these Terms and Conditions shall be finally resolved by arbitration
conducted in the English language in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada under the commercial arbitration rules of the
Canada. The parties shall appoint as sole arbitrator a retired judge who presided in the province of Ontario.
The parties shall bear equally the cost of the arbitration (except that the prevailing party shall be entitled to an
award of reasonable attorneys' fees incurred in connection with the arbitration in such an amount as may be
determined by the arbitrator). All decisions of the arbitrator shall be final and binding on both parties and
enforceable in any court of competent jurisdiction. Notwithstanding this, application may be made to any
court for a judicial acceptance of the award or order of enforcement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Epiphan
shall be entitled to seek injunctive relief, security, or other equitable remedies from any court of competent
jurisdiction.
If any part of these terms is unlawful, void, or unenforceable, that part will be deemed severable and will not
affect the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions. Epiphan may, at its sole discretion and
without notice, revise these terms at any time by updating this posting.
Copyright © 2017 Epiphan Systems Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
© and ™ 2017, Epiphan Systems, Inc
Download PDF
Similar pages